Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi
    The New Zealand Government: A United States SEC Registered Corporation  |  Who Owns New Zealand's Banks - And Australia's Banks - Anyone's Banks?
 
Wake Up Kiwi
 
Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

· Home / Introduction

CURRENT AFFAIRS

· Current Events & Breaking News

· Cabal / Illuminati / NWO Watch

· Mainstream Media Manipulation

· Banking Crimes & Criminals

· Political Crimes & Criminals

· Feature Articles

· Positive Developments

ILLUMINATI / NWO

· NWO Globalist Agenda

· Secret Societies & The Illuminati

· Conspiracy To Rule The World

· What / Who Is "The Crown"?

· Agenda 21 In New Zealand

· Surveillance Society/Police State

· 'Terrorism' & Engineered Wars

· Eugenics / Depopulation Agenda

· Religion As A Tool For Control

· Common Law Vs Statute Law

SCIENCE / TECHNOLOGY

· The Climate Change Scam

· Chemtrails & Geoengineering

· Suppressed Science

· Positive New Technologies

· Cures, Health & Wellbeing

· Dangerous & Dirty Technology

· Spiritual Aspects & Metaphysics

· The Extra-Terrestrial Presence

HISTORY

· Suppressed / Hidden History

· Real New Zealand History

· The Opal File: NZ / AUS History

· 150+ NWO Globalist Quotes

MISCELLANEOUS

· Political Commentary

· Positive Resources

· Resistance, Resources & Links

· Contact


Newsletter archive - click here

Site Search:
















Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
News Archives



 

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

5G: The Dominoes Are Starting To Fall
May 7 2019 | From: TakeBackYourPower / Various

Long-time United Nations staff member Claire Edwards summarizes worldwide developments in the 5G situation.



While still far from a victory claim, there is much to be hopeful about as millions around the world deepen involvement and take a stand for our shared future.

Related: 5G: Vaud (Switzerland) Adopts Resolution for a Moratorium + Geneva too

How do you stop the rollout of a 12 trillion dollar technology promoted by one of the most profitable industries on the planet and bulldozed through by the EU, FCC and the whole UN, most notably its WiFi enablers, WHO and ITU?

Many people have said it’s impossible. But even as the Trump administration attempts to ram through 5G in the United States, the dominoes are indeed falling around the world, as cities and entire nations are coming to their senses and putting the brakes on 5G.

Important Comment:

As some such as Jordan Sather have pointed out, we know that the Alliance has access to clean technologies.

Given that many of us know 5G is a terrible health hazard in the least, President Trumps comments about 5G (as noted by Sather) indicate a move to get control of 5G so it can be mitigated and disabled. The Alliance cannot reveal their moves ahead of time for obvious reasons...



Additional:

Read about the Alliance that has been working behind the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.

Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing everything within it's power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the Illuminati down once and for all.

Related Articles:

Who Is QAnon? An Introduction To The QAnon Phenomenon #QAnon #GreatAwakening

Global Alliance Moving For A Checkmate Versus The Deep State

In Switzerland, some cantonal governments have blocked the granting of permits for new antennas or have adopted a 5G moratorium. But the telecoms bought the 5G licenses from the federal government, so they’re using their existing antennas to start deploying 5G.

Greater grassroots involvement is needed. The updates we have provided were not a victory call - but rather a reason to hope and a call to join the movement on the ground where you live.




Related: 5G: The Big Picture & Brussels Becomes First Major City To Halt 5G Due To Health Effects

Want to know more about 5G? Go here: WhatIs5G.info


Lawmakers Hitting the Brakes on 5G:



USA, 24 March:



Portland Oregon city officials state clear opposition to the installation of 5G networks around the city, supported by the mayor and two commissioners.

Italy, 28 March: Florence applies the precautionary principle, refusing permissions for 5G and referring to “the ambiguity and the uncertainty of supranational bodies and private bodies (like ICNIRP)”, which “have very different positions from each other, despite the huge evidence of published studies”.

Italy, 28 March: One Roman district votes against 5G trials, with others expected to follow. Other motions to Stop 5G are expected in the four regional councils, one provincial council and other municipal councils of Italy.

Russia, 28 March: The Russian Ministry of Defence refuses to transfer frequencies for 5G, which effectively delays any 5G rollout there for several years.

Belgium, 31 March: The Belgian Environment Minister announces that Brussels is halting its 5G rollout plans, saying, “The people of Brussels are not guinea pigs whose health I can sell at a profit.

Germany, 4 April: Germans sign a petition en masse to force the German Bundestag to debate 5G.

Netherlands, 4 April: Members of Parliament in the Netherlands insist that radiation research must be carried out before any approval of the 5G network.

USA, 5 April: California Supreme Court Justices unanimously uphold a 2011 San Francisco ordinance requiring telecommunications companies to get permits before placing antennas on city infrastructure.

Switzerland, 9 April: The Canton of Vaud adopts a resolution calling for a moratorium on 5G antennas until the publication this summer of a report on 5G by the Swiss Federal Office for the Environment.

Switzerland, 10 April: Geneva adopts a motion for a moratorium on 5G, calling on the Council of State to request WHO to monitor independent scientific studies to determine the harmful effects of 5G.


Overcoming the Roadblocks

For me, it has always seemed an information problem. If the public simply understood the existential threat posed by adopting a military weapon as a communications technology, they would not accept it.

The challenge of informing people is twofold. The name “5G” is deceptive, implying a simple upgrade from the current 4G or fourth generation wireless. [And many WiFi routers now display “5G” as a mode option, but it means “5GHz” in that context, not actual “5G” - an industry ploy to normalize the term’s acceptance through intentional obfuscation. -Ed.]

This ruse cleverly disguises the reality that 5G means densification, with each individual, visible antenna being replaced by thousands of tiny antennas menacing people, animals and nature from every nook and cranny on Earth and from 20,000 or more satellites with lethal, laser-like beams hitting their unwitting targets millions of times a day like silent bullets.



Related: Why Is The Minister Of Health Taking Advice About The Health Effects Of 5G From A Committee Influenced By
People With Ties To The Telecommunications Industry?

The second difficulty is the tight control of the media. Hardly a whisper of negativity about 5G penetrates the public sphere, while its claimed benefits are constantly touted in puff pieces in newspapers and in numerous promotional videos.

Yet in the space of only a year since we first heard about the impending catastrophe that is 5G, the message has spread virally through the alternative and social media.


5G Deserves the Bad Rap

Since US Senator Blumenthal dealt a major blow to the telecommunications industry by definitively establishing that no safety studies have been done, the bad news on 5G just keeps on coming.

At least 21 US cities have passed ordinances restricting “small cell” installation, and many are charging “recertification fees” to make it unprofitable for the wireless industry.



Related: Los Alamos Research Explains How 5G Terahertz Waves Tear Apart DNA & Why We Must Stop The 5G Wireless Network

And the UK-based microwave weapons expert Barrie Trower reports that 17 mystery countries are taking steps to avoid getting 5G.

While the EU eagerly promotes the rollout of 5G, a new EU report admits that 5G is a massive experiment, lamenting that:


“[T]he problem is that currently it is not possible to accurately simulate or measure 5G emissions in the real world … concern is emerging over the possible impact on health and safety arising from potentially much higher exposure to radiofrequency electromagnetic radiation arising from 5G.”

The EU report goes on to set out the dangers:


“Increased exposure may result not only from the use of much higher frequencies in 5G but also from the potential for the aggregation of different signals, their dynamic nature, and the complex interference effects that may result, especially in dense urban areas.”

Meanwhile, a court in France has recognized electrohypersensitivity (EHS) as an occupational disease that can be developed also from exposure to levels of radiation that are considered to be safe by the government.




Something Strange Is Happening to Our DNA – 5G Assassination by Profile?

At the beginning of 2019, it was reported that over 26 million individuals had taken an at-home DNA test, but the companies seeking to profit off of the most unique thing about us still remain largely a mystery.

So who are the two superpowers harvesting the largest trove of human DNA? What do they do with your DNA after they send you the test results? And most importantly, why should you care?





Related Articles:

Cell Phones at Body Contact 11X US Radiation Limit - and Then There is 5G and Electromagnetic Pollution Overall…

International Appeal: Stop 5G on Earth and in Space

Will 5G Cell Phone Technology Lead to Population Reduction as Large Numbers of Men Become Sterile?

5G Health Effects: Swiss Telecom Ignores Official Laws and Launches 5G; Rule of Law Under Attack

5G Wireless Technology Is the “Stupidest Idea in the History of the World”

The Dangers of 5G to Children’s Health

What You Don’t Know About 5G but Will Find Out When Its Too Late

5G: The Big Picture


No One Wants 5G But the Telcos

5G is beginning to look like an unwanted orphan. Everyone who hears the truth about it shuns it like the plague. Even most of its proponents clearly have no love for it.

In his Palm Beach neighborhood, President Trump and his fellow billionaires are not having any of it.

None of the EU institutions in Brussels are having it (European Commission, Council of the European Union, European Council and the European Parliament). And its very enablers, the UN and its WHO and ITU are not going to be having it in Geneva, either.

Watch for moratoria being declared in Washington, D.C., home to the FCC; and Munich, nearby home to ICNIRP. Either would be an obvious indicator that the game is rigged.

But one wonders how the 5G movers and shakers will avoid the satellites, which the 5G literature boasts as being intended to “blanket” the Earth. Perhaps the satellite beams will avoid the areas where they live. Or perhaps not.



Related: 5G Network Uses Same EMF Waves As Pentagon Crowd Control System + NZ 5G Update: June 2018

Unless this insane 5G satellite plan is stopped, they, too, might wake up to find themselves as much guinea pigs as the rest of us in this massive biological experiment.

While well over ten thousand peer-reviewed scientific studies on the biological effects of electromagnetic radiation provide a clear perspective on the unprecedented risk of 5G, the rhetoric from the corporate media would have you believe that it’s the greatest thing since sliced bread.

One thing we can agree on: if we were to allow 5G to go ahead, it would make history. What a pity, then, that it would leave no one standing to celebrate it.

The tide is turning in our favour because people like you, dear reader, are becoming educated and involved.

You are sharing information and speaking with leaders. Thanks to your willingness to stand up for life and love, we will succeed in this great battle of our time.





Related Articles:

5G is Electromagnetic Genocide

What are 5G and the Internet of Things?

Smart Meters Cause Changes To The Heart

Cell Tower Removed From Schoolyard Due to Cluster of Cancer Cases

Millennium Report: 5G EMF Kills Zones USA

Health hazards from 5G cell towers going mainstream; new calls for protection against radiation pollution

NZ Petition: I do not consent to 5G radiation

5Ggate: The Greatest Criminal Conspiracy in U.S. History

5G Roll-out Seriously Endangers Every Person on Planet Earth

Reasons to block Spark's 5G rollout 'classified'

2018 / 5G: Great risk for EU, U.S. and International Health! Compelling Evidence for Eight Distinct Types of Great Harm Caused by Electromagnetic Field (EMF) Exposures and the Mechanism that Causes Them


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Lindsay Perigo: New Zealand Is A Police State
May 6 2019 | From: BreakingViews / Various

There is now apparently a police-compiled Enemies List circulating among New Zealand's totalitarian Globalist elite, such as Comrade Ardern, Comrade Andrew Little, Comrade Winston Peters and new Human Wrongs Commissar Comrade Paul Hunt, a lackey of raving anti-Semite and hard-core socialist Comrade Jeremy Corbyn, all advancing the agenda of the most evil man on the planet, George Soros.



(Why was this Islamo-Marxist fascist Paul Hunt brought over to destroy our Bill of Rights?! At whose expense?!) 

Related: ANZAC: Let’s think about the defence of democracy

From many accounts police are actively harassing people on this list.


Freedom of Expression

Everyone has the right to freedom of expression, including the freedom to seek, receive, and impart information and opinions of any kind in any form.

That's what NZ and UK Labour want to destroy, Section 14 of our Bill of Rights (lifted from the UN Declaration of Universal Human Rights), and anything resembling it, in all countries hitherto free or semi-free.

Beyond the criminalisation of criticism of Islam, Soros wants the destruction of Western Civilisation. The likes of Hunt, Ardern, Peters, Little, Corbyn, et al are his willing accomplices.

And so, the Orwellian Police State is upon us:



Christchurch terror attack: More than 100 people being monitored by police

Freedom-lovers are on notice: you may be about to be arrested for what in 1984 are called Thought Crimes. Come on then, Thought Police: arrest me for my thoughts.

It doesn't get any worse than:


“I disagree with what you say but defend to the death your right to say it,"
now does it?!

Seditious and revolutionary stuff in the Land of Political Correctness!

As Orwell said;




Related: Nationalised Online ID - Here Now

What you could consider doing instead, though, Thought Police, is gathering signatures on my Citizens' Pledge.

If everyone signed up to this, understood it and meant it, we wouldn't have to worry about a thing, now would we?! It goes as follows:



“Just as I reserve the right to hold and express my opinions on any matter whatsoever, I promise to respect the right of all others to do the same. I renounce unreservedly the use of coercion and violence in the promotion of my opinions."

It shouldn't be hard to get signatures.

A recent poll on Stuff, quickly removed when the results were so decisively un-PC, showed 90% of respondents saying that while Israel Folau's anti-gay tweets were offensive, they certainly shouldn't be illegal.



Related: From The Archives For ANZAC Day: All Wars Are Bankers' Wars

New Zealanders get it that there's no such thing as a right not to be offended; snowflakes who don't get it should consider migrating to Iran or North Korea.

The ANZAC heroes whom we've just been re-commemorating would surely be appalled to think that the single most precious thing for which they died is about to be extinguished.


Related Articles:

Christchurch Terror Attack: Mass Censorship, Mystery Shooters, And The Globetrotting Lone Gunman

New Zealand False Flag by Zionist Israel with Police & Freemason Complicity UPDATE 10: Christchurch, the Former Islamic Minister: “Mossad Behind Shootings”

NZ Gun Confiscation After Mosque Shooting NOT Justified! Mike Loder on The Vinny Eastwood Show AFR

The Christchurch Multiple Mosque Massacre, Vinny Eastwood On The Unicus Radio Hour

Vinny Eastwood & Jim Fetzer on The Christchurch Multiple Mosque Massacre

NZ Shooting Exposed, Vinny Eastwood On The Big Puzzle, Barry Prince

NZ Mosque Shooting Analysis by Ben Vidgen & Vinny Eastwood

On Ardern and Macron’s campaign against violent social media

Jeffrey Daugherty Interviews Vinny Eastwood About The Christchurch Mosque Massacre

The Ardern Effect: A Disturbance In The Force & Jacinda Ardern And Labour: The Truth Exposed

NZ Shooting Exposed, Vinny Eastwood & Max Igan On PSEC with Dave Kelso

Where Elites Travel, Death & Destruction Follow! irish Terror, France Fire, NZ Mosque


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Nutrition And Mental Health + ADHD Is A Fabricated Disease, Says Reputed Neurologist
May 5 2019 | From: BePure / Sott

Last week I attended a conference by Dr Julia Rucklidge from the University of Canterbury where she presented her groundbreaking research on the treatment of mental health disorders such as ADHD, bipolar, depression and anxiety using therapeutic doses of micronutrients.



More and more we are seeing that what we eat, and what we absorb from our food choices, affect more than our physical appearance and physical fitness.

Related: Nutrition And Mental Health

Yes these things are important, but actually there are numerous benefits to eating a nutrient-dense diet with supporting products that don’t get mentioned. And they should. Our mental health is something that affects every interaction we have with ourselves, our families, our work colleagues and our friends.

The takeaway message from this conference is the prevalence of mental health problems in the modern world is concerning. According to Dr Rucklidge:


“There is a very real danger of mental health care bankrupting our society in terms of cost and social implications.”

In this blog I’m going to address the link between nutrition and mental health. There are many other factors involved in the prevention and treatment of mental illness. We are only addressing nutrition in this blog as it is such an important factor to consider.


The Whole Picture

One in ten New Zealanders are on antidepressants. This is an eight-fold increase in total prescription numbers from 1998.

There has been a four-fold increase in claimed disability financial support due to psychiatric disorders in New Zealand from 1991 to now. Both these figures are supplied through Statistics New Zealand’s annual reports.



Related: Getting Real About What Depression IS and ISN'T

In a period of time where more “cutting edge medicines” have been researched, developed and trialled on our population, rates of mental health disorders continue to rise.

The long term results from the National Institute of Mental Health’s (NIMH) MTA study found that children taking medication for ADHD for longer than 24 months showed “significant markers not of beneficial outcome, but of deterioration… medicated children were also slightly smaller, and higher delinquency scores.” Source: The MTA cooperative randomised clinical trial.

It’s fair to say our current gold standards are not working, so what else has changed in this time period?



Food And Stress

This increase in mental health conditions follows the same exponential rise of obesity and type two diabetes from the 1970s to now. We know that the rise in medical knowledge and the availability of medications hasn’t resolved the problem, nor has a 300% increase in gym memberships, so what has changed to negatively affect our mental and metabolic health?



Related: A Mind of Your Own with Guest Dr. Kelly Brogan

I firmly believe, and the evidence supports this idea, that what we are eating and the nutrients we give to our bodies drastically affect our weight, energy, metabolic health AND mental health in both negative and positive ways.

For many people gluten, refined grains and sugar can cause problems affecting everything from digestion, mood, skin disorders like rashes and eczema, to joint pain, weight gain, migraines, thyroid disorders, mental health disorders and behavioural issues such as ADHD.

For an extensive list of gluten-related symptoms, check out this list.

Gluten is a protein found in wheat, barley, and rye, and is what gives bread its stretch. Many nutritionists now believe many people - not just those with gluten intolerance or Celiac Disease - should avoid gluten as it is a known contributor to leaky gut.



Related: Simple changes to your diet can help with mental health issues

This is problematic for mental health conditions because if serotonin is not kept within your gut and digestive tract, it cannot engage in chemical reactions within your brain to increase your mood.

Refined grains and sugar cause blood sugar spikes and energy crashes as insulin is produced to mitigate the quick rush of glucose and fructose. You can read in length about the problem with refined grains and sugar.

Lastly, the stress of modern living has a huge impact on our mental health. Cortisol is a stress hormone that is activated by everything from traffic, fighting with a loved one, worry, anxiety, excessive caffeine intake and even exercise. Cortisol initiates our fight or flight response in our nervous system. In ancestral times this response was necessary for fleeing from danger.



Related: Sadness: The Problem and The Solution

In the modern world, we perceive danger to be everywhere (i.e we release cortisol) despite the fact we aren’t running away from a lion. This constant flood of cortisol prevents our “rest and digest”  nervous system from operating. This prevents recovery from exercise or the day’s stressors, the production of growth hormone and serotonin as well as preventing sleep and digestion.

Managing stress is critical for those people with mental health concerns.



The Brain Gut Connection

Current research in the field of microbiome health and mental health conditions confirms the theory our stomach is our second brain. There are several reasons for this. The first is Serotonin.



Related: What Does Your Illness Mean?

Serotonin is your happiness hormone. It is a neurotransmitter that relays messages from all areas of your brain to your cells. An imbalance or deficiency in serotonin is thought to influence the brain in a way that causes depression.

Up to 70% of your bodies total serotonin lives in your digestive tract. If you have leaky gut, a food intolerance or gut dysbiosis through poor diet or antibiotic use, the serotonin can leak out of your gut and is then unable to do its job in your brain.

The second factor has to do with the nutritional and energy demands of our brains. Our brains are approximately 2% of our body weight. However, it consumes 20-40% of our metabolism. In other words, it is constantly and disproportionately demanding nutrients and oxygen. One litre of blood enters your brain every minute, carrying whatever nutrients it has access to.

Giving it nutrient dense food and access to as many nutrients as possible is critical for mental health.



So What Can We Do?

Dr Rucklidge’s research suggests we need to ensure good nutrient-density in our diets and use therapeutic doses of micronutrients to support mental health conditions.



Related: 5 Stages of Transformation


“Micronutrients such as zinc, vitamin D, Essential Fatty Acids and many more have been used in many open label trials across anxiety, sleep issues, bipolar disorder and ADHD.

All have shown significant reductions in psychiatric and psychological symptoms. Response rates range from 50-80% improvements."

Source: Dr Julia Rucklidge at the University of Canterbury.

The current medical model seeks to use medication first before addressing stress, food, sleep and nutrient deficiencies. I would personally love to see this equation flipped. If we can address dietary and lifestyle factors first, along with nutrient support, while using medication sparingly on a case-by-case basis, we can greatly improve the mental health of our nation.

If you or a loved one are currently struggling with depression-like symptoms, bipolar ADHD or anxiety please seek assistance. You can contact your GP or health care provider, the BePure team at info@bepure.co.nz, www.depression.org.nz or the depression helpline at 0800 111 757.


Related: German psychologists declare "the drugs don't work"


Renowned Harvard Psychologist Calls ADHD A Fraud That Only Benefits The Pharmaceutical Industry

Viewed by academics as one of the most influential psychologists of the 20th century, Jerome Kagan ranked above Carl Jung (the founder of analytical psychology) and Ivan Pavlov (who discovered the Pavlovian reflex) in a 2002 American Psychological Association ranking of the eminent psychologists.



He is well-known for his pioneering work in developmental psychology at Harvard University, where he has spent decades documenting how babies and small children grow, and is an exceptional and highly-regarded researcher.

So it may be surprising to learn that he believes the diagnosis of ADHD (attention deficit hyperactivity disorder) is an invention - and only benefits the pharmaceutical industry and psychiatrists.


Mislabeling Mental Illness


"That is the history of humanity: Those in authority believe they're doing the right thing, and they harm those who have no power", says Jerome Kagan.

In an interview with Spiegel, Kagan addressed the skyrocketing rates of ADHD in America, which he attributes to "fuzzy diagnostic practices."

He illustrated his point with the following example:

Say fifty years ago you have a 7-year-old who is bored in school and exhibits disruptive behavior. Back then, he would be labeled as lazy. But today, that same child is said to suffer from ADHD. That's why we've seen such a dramatic increase in the disorder.

Every child who is having problems in school is sent to see a pediatrician, who then claims it's ADHD and prescribes Ritalin.


"In fact, 90 percent of these 5.4 million kids don't have an abnormal dopamine metabolism. The problem is, if a drug is available to doctors, they'll make the corresponding diagnosis," he said.




Related: Does ADHD Really Exist!? This Is Why French Kids Don’t Have ADHD


"We could get philosophical and ask ourselves: "What does mental illness mean?"

If you do interviews with children and adolescents aged 12 to 19, then 40 percent can be categorized as anxious or depressed.

But if you take a closer look and ask how many of them are seriously impaired by this, the number shrinks to 8 percent.

Describing every child who is depressed or anxious as being mentally ill is ridiculous.

Adolescents are anxious, that's normal. They don't know what college to go to. Their boyfriend or girlfriend just stood them up. Being sad or anxious is just as much a part of life as anger or sexual frustration," Kagan told Spiegel.


What are the implications for the millions of children who are inaccurately diagnosed as mentally ill? Kagan believes it's devastating because they think there is something fundamentally wrong with them.

He's not the only psychologist to raise the alarm about this trend, but Kagan and others feel they're up against:


"An enormously powerful alliance: pharmaceutical companies that are making billions, and a profession that is self-interested."

Kagan himself suffered from inner restlessness and stuttering as a child, but his mother told him: "There's nothing wrong with you. Your mind is working faster than your tongue." He thought at the time: "Gee, that's great, I'm only stuttering because I'm so smart." If he had been born in the present era, he most likely would have been classified as mentally ill.



Jerome Kagan


ADHD isn't the only mental illness epidemic among children that worries Kagan, depression is another.

In 1987, about one in 400 American teenagers was using an antidepressant. By 2002, the numbers leaped to one in 40.

He feels it's another overused diagnosis, simply because the pills are available.

Instead of immediately resorting to pharmaceutical drugs, he thinks doctors should take more time with the child to find out why they aren't as cheerful, for instance. At the very least, a few tests should be carried out - and an EEG for certain, especially since studies have shown that people who have heightened activity in the right frontal lobe respond poorly to antidepressants.



Kagan remembers going into a textbook-type depression after a major research project he was involved with failed. He had insomnia and met all the other clinical criteria for depression. But since he knew what the cause was, he didn't seek professional help. After six months, the depression was gone.

Under normal circumstances, he would have been diagnosed as mentally ill by a psychiatrist and put on medication.

But here lies an important distinction: when a life event overwhelms us, it's common to fall into a depression for a while. But there are those who have a genetic vulnerability and experience chronic depression; they are mentally ill.

It's crucial to look not only at the symptoms, but the causes.

This is where psychiatry drops the ball, as it's the only medical profession that establishes illness on symptoms alone.

Such a blind spot opens the door for new maladies - like bipolar disorder, which we never used to see in children. As it stands today, nearly a million Americans under the age of 19 are diagnosed with it.


"A group of doctors at Massachusetts General Hospital just started calling kids who had temper tantrums bipolar. They shouldn't have done that. But the drug companies loved it because drugs against bipolar disorders are expensive. That's how the trend was started. It's a little like in the 15th century, when people started thinking someone could be possessed by the devil or hexed by a witch," said Kagan.

When asked if there are alternatives to pharmaceutical drugs for behavioral abnormalities, Kagan said we could look at tutoring, as an example, for kids diagnosed with ADHD. After all, it's never the ones who are doing well in school that are diagnosed, it's always the children who are struggling.

Related: ADHD Is A Fabricated Disease, Says Reputed Neurologist


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Dancing On The Crumbling Precipice: Jim Quinn Explains Why The Deep State Is The True Enemy Of Human Civilization
May 4 2019 | From: NaturalNews / Various

If you’re not yet familiar with the writing of Jim Quinn from The Burning Platform, he’s an author you may want to consider adding to your “must-read” list. Quinn’s articles are insightful and daring, and his grasp of history is spot-on.



Quinn’s latest article, reprinted here, is entitled, “Dancing on the Crumbling Precipice.”

Related: Deep State Desperation Surges Sky High Anew

The title is apparently borrowed from a song called “The Violence” by a band known as “Rise Against,” whose lead singer believes that humanity will ultimately destroy itself with violence. (He’s not wrong on that point, by the way.)

In this article, Quinn convincingly argues that humanity must declare war on the deep state and destroy it in order to survive. If we do not destroy the deep state, it will destroy the world, Quinn explains.

Here’s Quinn’s article, with extraneous quotes removed:


Dancing on a Crumbling Precipice

This recent song by Rise Against, inspired by the turmoil since the 2016 election of Donald Trump, captures the feeling of angst and uncertainty engulfing the world today.

This Fourth Turning is entering its most violent stage, where blood will be spilled in vast quantities as an epic conflict between good and evil plays out across the globe.

Eighty years ago, the bloodiest conflict in human history began, as the social mood turned dark and compromise was no longer a viable option.

It wasn’t a coincidence World War II began exactly eighty years after the onset of the American Civil War, which began as compromisers died off and hearts hardened on both sides.



Related: Mystery: Assange Shouts ‘Resist’ And Yells Message To Trump Administration & The Patriots Have The Deep
State Exactly Where They Want Them, MOAB Incoming


We are now eighty years gone since the outset of World War II and a global mood of impending doom overshadows our daily lives.

The inevitability of conflict, domestically and internationally, eclipses all efforts to bridge the ideological differences of competing interests around the world.

The cycles of history will not be denied and this Fourth Turning will play out as those before, with clear victors and clear losers.

Tim McIlrath, the lead singer of Rise Against, observing the violent conflict raging in our country in the press, social media, in the streets, and on battlefields across the Middle East wondered whether violence is an inevitability of the human condition, or whether we can make a choice to reject it. In an interview with Kerrang!, McIlrath stated:


As we were watching the news and seeing all the different things [unfold] around the planet, I realized that violence has such a role in a lot of what we see when the world is falling apart.

The violence is a reflection of whether our [aggression] is in our nature, our DNA, or whether we have a choice to be part of it.

And it is a choice that we make – a conscious one – to use violence as a means to an end. Aren’t we better than this? Aren’t we the apex of the animal kingdom?

Aren’t we the only ones on the planet that have the capacity for compassion? Aren’t we good enough or brave enough to not sink to violence?”

I hate to break the bad news to Tim, but human nature never changes.

We aren’t better or worse than the billions of people who have proceeded us on this earth. We are all susceptible to the vices which have plagued mankind for eternity: pride, greed, anger, envy, lust, gluttony and laziness.

We are also capable of elevating our society through exercising displays of courage, applying justice fairly, prudently managing our affairs, treating others with respect, and acting charitably towards mankind.

As Solzhenitsyn noted in his masterpiece, Gulag Archipelago, “the line dividing good and evil cuts through the heart of every human being”. The violence in our nature is ingrained in our makeup as human beings. The Bible details our violent nature in the Garden of Eden, with the murder of Abel by Cain, his brother.

The ability to use violence against others is most certainly in everyone’s nature, but average hard-working folks trying to survive in this dog eat dog world are not prone to violence or conflict.




AG Barr Drops The Hammer On Crazed Dem Circus





Related: The Tables Have Turned: Here Comes The Real Story Of Collusion And Corruption




They are too busy working, living, raising kids, buying shit they don’t need, paying the credit card bills for shit they don’t need, being entertained by modern day techno bread and circuses, and being propagandized by their government and their mouthpieces in the corporate media.

The overwhelming amount of gun violence occurs in the Democrat run urban ghettos with the strongest gun laws. The violence is not a function of being poor.

Poor folks in rural communities (aka flyover country) own firearms, but are not killing each other in large numbers, if at all. Extreme levels of violence are a function of morality, culture, and lack of family and community cohesiveness.

The legally armed “deplorables” are family oriented and law abiding. They will only resort to violence when pushed too far.

The extremist left wing politicians bloviating on a daily basis, inciting their sycophant followers towards aggression have lit the fuse for the coming civil war.


There’s never been a true war that wasn’t fought between two sets of people who were certain they were in the right. The really dangerous people believe they are doing whatever they are doing solely and only because it is without question the right thing to do. And that is what makes them dangerous.” ?

-
Neil Gaiman, American Gods

The violence in our inner cities is insignificant when compared to the violence exported across the globe by the sociopaths at the highest levels of our government and their co-conspirators in the military industrial complex.

It is naïve to think the violence engulfing the world is primarily the result of the average person’s nature.

It’s the result of dangerous men inflicting their warped worldview, blood lust ambition, thirst for power, and hubristic arrogance upon the unsuspecting dupes inhabiting their countries.

Sociopaths like Bolton and Pompeo have risen to positions of immense power, believing global disorder and war are beneficial to a bankrupt declining empire flailing about trying to preserve its superpower stature.

The Deep State elevates power hungry conscienceless men into positions where they can promote the agendas of the Deep State with no remorse or restraint.

The export of military hardware to Middle East countries that hate us is a prime example of how a flailing empire will do anything for a buck, while its corrupt politicians are fellated by the corporate war industry.



Related: Senator Ted Cruz Threatens to Regulate Google, Facebook and Twitter Over Anti-Conservative Bias

Pro-longed warfare has never benefited a nation over the long-term. The American empire had a national debt of $5.7 trillion, with the annual budget virtually balanced in 2000 when our leaders began a pro-longed period of non-stop warfare.

We’ve added $16.3 trillion of debt and are running $1.2 trillion annual deficits as our out of control war mongering has put the country on a path to destruction. Both feckless political parties vote for more war spending, more arms sales to Middle Eastern countries, and continued provocation of nuclear powers – Russia and China.

As trillions are wasted on the violent overthrow of countries who refuse to buckle to American power, our basic infrastructure crumbles, our government-controlled healthcare system is an expensive joke, our educational system is a disaster, and the rich get richer while the poor die fighting for empire.

Dwight D. Eisenhower, a military man through and through, warned the nation what would happen if we allowed the unholy alliance of government and the military industrial complex to dominate our society.

We didn’t heed his warning and allowed our country [The West] to be taken over by evil Deep State oligarchs who realized war is good for their bottom line.

They use faux displays of patriotism, create enemies when there are none, lure easily manipulated young men as cannon fodder, spread the war machine factories across congressional districts to ensure votes for more war spending, and compensate the corporate media to support war and spread propaganda.



Related: The Strange and Unexplained Coincidences in the Mueller Report Continue to Pile Up

Whenever the government and media are in lockstep regarding an issue, like Russia throwing our elections or Julian Assange being a traitor, you know it’s a false narrative designed to misinform the public.

War is a racket designed to enrich the Deep State and their pliable acolytes. It’s only the average person who suffers.

The question Tim McIlrath wants answered is whether we as a people can end the violence and war. The truth is the only way to put an end to the never-ending global war is through a violent overthrow of the Deep State who firmly control the levers of power over our government, financial systems, corporations, and media.

Ironically, violence initiated by the good law-abiding people of this country against the corrupt, powerful, rich, deceitful oligarchs is the only chance for reversing the downward moral spiral we currently face.

Believing change will be achieved through the ballot box is a fool’s errand. Just observe the extremists, imbeciles, and craven narcissists we are currently stuck with in Washington D.C. by falsely believing change can be achieved through the ballot box.

We are being manipulated and managed, just as Edward Bernays taught his disciples, and how Ray Bradbury described in his dystopian novel about the future.


If you don’t want a man unhappy politically, don’t give him two sides to a question to worry him; give him one. Better yet, give him none. Let him forget there is such a thing as war.

If the government is inefficient, top-heavy, and tax-mad, better it be all those than that people worry over it. Peace, Montag.

Give the people contests they win by remembering the words to more popular songs or the names of state capitals or how much corn Iowa grew last year. Cram them full of noncombustible data, chock them so damned full of ‘facts’ they feel stuffed, but absolutely ‘brilliant’ with information.

Then they’ll feel they’re thinking, they’ll get a sense of motion without moving. And they’ll be happy, because facts of that sort don’t change.”


- Ray Bradbury, Fahrenheit 451



Related: 2019: The Year Deep State Gets Demolished

Our overlords have been successful in creating generations of non-thinking automatons who have been socially engineered through government education and TV programming to feel (not think critically) and be easily manipulated through their techno-gadgets, the boob tube, and now social media.

We are drowning in trivialities, mindless entertainment, gossip, and propaganda, unable to decipher truth from falsehood. The “truth” is whatever suits the purposes of those in power. Observe how the Deep State promotes their war machine through sporting events and the local news.

You have Air Force flyovers at every football game. The military uses your tax dollars to pay the professional sports leagues for those “touching” tributes to military personnel during every sporting event.

Those “heart-warming” stories of military personnel surprising their kids at school are nothing but propaganda narrative fed to the public to support never ending war. How many millions of your tax dollars are used on those flashy recruiting commercials promoting the lie our military is protecting us by blowing up brown people in distant countries.

Hemingway recognized the truth about the war machine, decades ago.


They wrote in the old days that it is sweet and fitting to die for one’s country. But in modern war, there is nothing sweet nor fitting in your dying. You will die like a dog for no good reason.”

- Ernest Hemingway

As this Fourth Turning has reached its midway point, it has become evident to those awoken to the truth of a world run and controlled by a relatively small cadre of powerful men and their paid off disciples, a reckoning is at hand, with violence and bloodshed an inevitable outcome.




Left-wing media uses misleading headlines to bash President Trump





Related: Report: Trump to Declassify FISA Docs in Coming Weeks



The election of Donald Trump has functioned as the catalyst, forcing those in the shadows to reveal their true purpose and nature.

The Deep State attempted coup of a sitting president based upon a false Russian narrative has blown up in their faces, but they will not admit defeat, because to do so would mean loss of their power, wealth and control.

They will be willing to risk world war with nuclear powers or create the atmosphere for a civil war rather than cease their sociopathic thirst for controlling the world. With the arrest of Julian Assange on bogus charges, they push the country ever closer to civil chaos. Truth is treason in an empire of lies.

It appears the oligarchs are losing control of the narrative and are reacting in a desperate manner to retain their ill-gotten riches and unconstitutional control over the levers of government power.

We have entered an era of extremism which will surely lead to more violence. We have elected politicians pushing extreme positions like open borders, socialism for all, infanticide, going to war with Russia and China, prosecuting patriots who revealed misdeeds by our government, cheering for terrorists, and supporting a surveillance state coup of a sitting president.

We have a president promoting a stock market bubble, vilifying the money printers at the Federal Reserve for being too tight when they have kept real interest rates at zero or negative for the last ten years, encouraging coups in other countries while fighting off a coup against himself, and running deficits of $1.2 trillion after campaigning on balancing the budget.

Additional: Read about the Alliance that has been working behind the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.

Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing everything within it's power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the Illuminati down once and for all.

Related Articles:

Who Is QAnon? An Introduction To The QAnon Phenomenon #QAnon #GreatAwakening

Global Alliance Moving For A Checkmate Versus The Deep State




Related: FBI Confirms Hillary Clinton Emails Found in Obama White House

The magnitude of extreme positions, policies, proposals, and politicians is off the charts, making me feel like I’m living in a new country called Extreme-istan.

Our daily existence is nothing more than a frustrating crusade through a blizzard of lies, in search of the truth. Extremism dominates our financial markets, our foreign policy, our politics, our media, and interaction on social media platforms.

Extreme positions are not met with calls for moderation, but contrary extreme positions. This is how it rolls during Fourth Turnings. There will be no compromise solutions domestically or internationally. As the extreme positions solidify and become entrenched, violent conflict becomes the only form of resolution, with clear victors and losers.

When the extreme multiple financial bubbles burst simultaneously and create the global financial crisis to end all financial crises, the anger and vengeance likely to be doled out against those identified as being responsible for the trillions in losses and collapse of debt laden corporations and governments will be blood curdling.

With desperate politicians trying to pacify their angry constituents, they will go to their old standby – start a war and try to appeal to the patriotism of an ignorant populace who they have successfully manipulated in the past.

This is when the “deplorables” are likely to push back. This is when the true enemies will be identified and those firearms they have been trying to confiscate will be put to use.



Related: US Military Use IMF, World Bank as “Unconventional” Weapons

Joseph Heller understood generals and politicians supposedly on our side could be the enemy. The Deep State is our enemy. Until they are violently defeated, they will continue to treat us as nothing more than cattle and cannon fodder.

Steinbeck thought war was a failure of thinking men; while Hemingway thought all war was a crime; Voltaire thought war was murder and those declaring war were the murderers; and Smedley Butler thought war was a racket.

They were all right. Rich old men send young poor men to their deaths to feed the coffers of corporate arms dealers. War is a means for arrogant hubristic men to wield power in a violent display of egotistical criminality, using innocent citizens as cannon fodder in their vain endeavor at historical glory.

Tim McIlrath’s final lyrics capture the essence of human history. We are a book without an end because human history is cyclical and we start at chapter 1 every eighty years or so.

He calls for something new, but he doesn’t grasp that the existing social order is always overturned during a Fourth Turning and something new arises.

Whether that is good or bad is up to the victors. But, sadly, the elimination of violence is not in the cards and is likely to be ratcheted up to new highs during the next ten years.



Related: A Deeper Understanding Of Technocracy & Seven Things I Would Do If I Wanted To Keep Poor People Poor

Violence is in our nature, but good men and women only resort to it when pushed to their breaking point. That point is rapidly approaching.

The hubris of the ruling class has led them to brazenly reveal their true purpose in pillaging the wealth of the nation, while impoverishing the middle class, creating global disorder, promoting civic decay and ensuring global financial chaos through creating trillions of unpayable debt.

The attempted coup of Trump, the arrest of Assange, rigging of financial markets and the continued provocation of Russia have pushed the country to the brink.

The two captured political parties are bereft of courageous patriots, while being infested with corrupt extremist imbeciles. Sworn enemies, domestically and internationally, are standing waist deep in gasoline striking matches.

Anyone not realizing the direness of our situation is either dependent upon the Deep State for their sustenance, a lackey for the establishment, choosing to be willfully ignorant, or is too dumbed down and distracted by their techno-gadgets to care.

The war has begun and the storm gathers, but nobody knows when the conflagration will erupt. The Deep State is already at war with average Americans, but they haven’t acknowledged that fact.

When they do, things will get interesting. Get ready.


The war had begun and nobody saw it. The storm was lowering and nobody knew it.”

- Neil Gaiman, American Gods

Read more from Jim Quinn at TheBurningPlatform.com.


Related Articles:

Pres. Trump: media barely mentioning Mueller report showed no collusion

Giuliani: No Argument Russia Interfered, but Mueller Report Biased Against Pres. Trump

Two months after de-platforming the Health Ranger, Twitter bans James Woods for exposing the treason of the deep state coup against Trump


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Green Gestapo Says You're Mentally Ill If You Challenge Climate Change + Over 30,000 Scientists Say 'Catastrophic Man-Made Global Warming' Is A Complete Hoax And Science Lie
May 3 2019 | From: Infowars / NaturalNews

Any opposition to the party line constitutes "culpable insanity."



Dr. Roy Spencer of the University of Alabama at Huntsville annoyed the climate-extremist establishment a couple of years ago by describing them as “climate Nazis.”

Related: Climate Swindle - Who wants to be a carbon trillionaire?

Recently several of these creatures wrote a supposedly “learned” paper in an obscure journal, saying that anyone who, like Roy and me, raises legitimate questions about the magnitude of Man’s influence on climate or the disproportionate cost of making largely non-existent global warming go away, must be suffering from a psychiatric disorder.

These climate Nazis said that those who dare to question the Party Line on the weather should be regarded as suffering from “identity-protective cognition” and “conspiracist ideation.” I was among those they named.

In Communist Russia, before its defeat at the hands of the triumvirate of liberty – Ronald Reagan, Margaret Thatcher and Pope John Paul II – opponents of the regime whom the dictators had not executed were instead flung into psychiatric institutions, on the ludicrous ground that any opposition to the Party Line constituted culpable insanity.



Lord Christopher Monckton (Author if this article)

Related: The Ultimate Scam: How Al Gore Became The World’s First Carbon Billionaire” By Profiting Off Irrational
Climate Fears


The intellectual pygmies who are the inheritors of the dictators, conveniently forgetting the 250 million people whom communist and fascist socialism sent to their deaths in the 20th century, are now whining that we who have exposed their climate scam should be locked away in state psychiatric prisons, there to be “re-educated” to cure us of the wicked notion that science, not politics, is the way to determine the magnitude (if any) and cost (if any) of the climate problem (if any).

Well, I’ve had enough.

I’ve written to the editor of the obscure journal, to the president of the editor’s university and to the presidents of the universities that provide nests for two of the paper’s authors, to warn them that in Europe, to ensure that the arrogant and un-self-critical totalitarianism that killed so many in the last century will kill none in this, we now have hate-speech laws that make the publication of the offending paper falsely accusing us of lunacy an imprisonable criminal offense.

One of the co-authors, one Cook, recently appointed to a third-rank university in the United States, falsely stated in an earlier paper that 97% of climate scientists had said recent global warming was mostly man-made, when his own records – now in the hands of the fraud police – show he knew the true figure was not 97% but 0.5%.



Related: All The Biggest Lies About Climate Change And Global Warming Debunked In One Astonishing Interview

Lest you should think that my comparing these wretches with the totalitarians of old is unjust, I have obtained a picture of Cook dressed up in his favorite uniform, a parody of a Nazi SS uniform. The photograph bears the self-describing caption Reichsführer-SS J. Cook.

I have sent copies of this photograph to the president of Cook’s new “university,” together with a request that I should be permitted to set straight the crooked record of poisonous and criminal hate-speech that Cook and his ghastly co-authors have published to my detriment.

Watch this space!

Footnote: My recent speech to the London climate conference exposing a huge error at the heart of the climate models – an error without which no one will ever worry about our effect on the climate – is causing major concern among the ranks of the ungodly. It’s unusual for a mathematical presentation to gather 10,000 hits in a week, but it’s happened. If you haven’t seen it yet:

 


Don’t miss the speech that makes the climate Nazis squirm.

If you like Classical music, you’ll enjoy a recording of the piece I played onstage in the conference hall during the closing-night party. It’s Schubert’s Sechs Ecossaisen der Ehemaligen, six little Scottish dances played as an oran talaidh or lullaby in the dreamy Highland style. If baby won’t sleep, play this resonant recording and all will be well. Enjoy!

Just click to listen: Lord Monckton Plays Schubert

Lord Christopher Monckton is a well-known journalist, public speaker, UKIP activist and “global warming” skeptic who also invented the mathematical puzzle Eternity. You can find him at the Lord Monckton Foundation.



Over 30,000 Scientists Say 'Catastrophic Man-Made Global Warming' Is A Complete Hoax And Science Lie

The highly-politicized climate change debate rages on as we approach the crucial 2016 U.S. presidential election, despite an ever-growing body of evidence revealing the fact that "catastrophic man-made global warming" is nothing more than an elaborate hoax.



And the November election may prove to be a victory for the hoaxers, according to experts who happen to be among those who dare to challenge the spurious climate change narrative.

[Note:
David Wilcock, within his vast body of research and writings has pointed out that: "[He] used official NASA sources to prove that the Sun, planets, and satellites [moons, asteroids etc.] in our system are becoming brighter, hotter, and more magnetic at a remarkable speed."]

Related: When Plutocrats Own The Weather & Nobody Is Buying The “Climate Change” Hoax Anymore

One of these experts is Weather Channel founder John Coleman, who is now warning that the election could prove to be a "tipping point" in favor of people like Al Gore, who continues to amass vast fortunes based on the global warming scam.

In a recent interview with Climate Depot, Coleman said:


Al Gore may emerge from the shadows to declare victory in the 'global warming' debate if Hillary Clinton moves into the White House. Yes, if that happens and the new climate regulations become the law of the land, they will be next to impossible to overturn for four to eight years."

Climate change proponents remain undeterred in their mission, ignoring numerous recent scientific findings indicating that there has been no warming trend at all for nearly two decades.



Related: Meteorologists And Climate Engineering Denial: Perpetuating The Lie For A Paycheck And A Pension + Why The "Chemtrail Conspiracy" Is Real

Al Gore's dire predictions of the melting of polar ice on a massive scale have proved to be completely false. In fact, in 2014 - a year that was touted as being "the hottest ever" in the Earth's history - there were record amounts of ice reported in Antarctica, an increase in Arctic ice, and record snowfalls across the globe.



Debunking the "97 Percent" Lie

On top of those "inconvenient truths," the White House's assertion that 97 percent of scientists agree that global warming is real has been completely debunked. Several independently-researched examinations of the literature used to support the "97 percent" statement found that the conclusions were cherry-picked and misleading.

More objective surveys have revealed that there is a far greater diversity of opinion among scientists than the global warming crowd would like for you to believe.



From the National Review:


"A 2008 survey by two German scientists, Dennis Bray and Hans von Storch, found that a significant number of scientists were skeptical of the ability of existing global climate models to accurately predict global temperatures, precipitation, sea-level changes, or extreme weather events even over a decade; they were far more skeptical as the time horizon increased."

Other mainstream news sources besides the National Review have also been courageous enough to speak out against the global warming propaganda - even the Wall Street Journal published an op-ed piece in 2015 challenging the Anthropogenic Global Warming (AGW) pseudoscience being promulgated by global warming proponents.

And, of course, there are the more than 31,000 American scientists (to date) who have signed a petition challenging the climate change narrative and 9,029 of them hold PhDs in their respective fields. But hey, Al Gore and his cronies have also ignored that inconvenient truth, as well.



Related: Hollywood Sci-Fi Filmmakers Tapped To Dramatize Fictional Climate Change To Scare Everybody Into Voting For Climate Totalitarians

Many of those scientists who signed the petition were likely encouraged to speak out in favor of the truth after retired senior NASA atmospheric scientist John L. Casey revealed that solar cycles are largely responsible for warming periods on Earth - not human activity.



Al Gore and Cronies Continue Getting Richer from the Global Warming Hoax

But the global warming crowd continues to push their agenda on the public while lining their pockets in the process. If you're still inclined to believe what Al Gore has to say about global warming, please consider the fact that since he embarked on his crusade, his wealth has grown from $2 million in 2001 to $100 million in 2016 - largely due to investments in fake "green tech" companies and the effective embezzlement of numerous grants and loans.



You might want to take all of this information into serious consideration before casting your vote in the November election.


Related: Al Gore Sued By 30,000 Scientists For Global Warming Fraud


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Remember The Pandemic That Was Going To Wipe Out Humanity? We’re Still Here
May 2 2019 | From: JonRappoport

Every few years, a new virus shows up that, experts tell us, can wipe out half the world in six months... and then it doesn’t happen.




I could give you several examples. In this piece, let’s harken back to SARS, the vague flu lookalike that suddenly showed up in 2003 and was going to decimate the Earth.

Related: Has everyone forgotten? The massive “Zika scare” was a fake science HOAX pushed by the entire establishment media… not a single retraction ever published

When SARS hit, the World Health Organization (WHO) put the world on notice not to fly into Toronto. The city lost billions of tourism dollars.

The fabled “coronavirus,” touted as the cause of SARS, was evil and covert and unique. So said ten WHO labs, which took over all official research on the “plague.”

But on May 1, 2003, Dr. Frank Plummer, head of the WHO lab in Winnipeg, issued a blockbuster to a SARS summit in Canada. He was now finding the coronavirus in ZERO percent of SARS cases.

Weeks before, Plummer had said eighty percent of patients showed the virus, then that had dropped to sixty, forty, thirty, and now it was ZERO.



Related:
Who’s Behind The Zika Virus Outbreak & Fearmongering?

You have to understand that even eighty percent is not sufficient to call the virus the cause of any disease condition.

But ZERO?

Yes, they all have the disease, the same disease, and we have the virus behind it all. The virus is present in ZERO percent of cases.

And the doctor saying this is a consummate insider, the chief honcho at Canada’s WHO lab. WHO being the agency, along with the CDC, that is in charge of all research on SARS.

Understand, given the fact that SARS is supposedly composed of a list of vague symptoms - cough, fever, fatigue, lung infection - the coronavirus is the only thing that is tying these cases together - AND WHEN THAT VIRUS PROVED TO BE MEANINGLESS, all the cases were set adrift, so to speak, joining the ranks of regular old flu and lung infection.

And the SARS death rate was low, so low the whole thing turned out to be a dud. A phony dud.



Related:
Deconstructing The Ebola Agenda & Is the Bilderberg Group Behind Ebola? + The Effective Treatment For The Bioweapon That Is Ebola

Of course, no one at the CDC or WHO admitted this. These people are experts at “moving on.” And they’re adept at writing history to revise facts and cover their backsides.

But a whole parade of fake pandemics - and attendant dire warnings - does, over time, achieve one objective: it conditions people to accept the lie that vaccines are the best solution to illness.

And that’s no small feat. It’s especially important when you consider the fact that the CDC, which is tasked with overseeing vaccine safety and efficacy, buys and sells $4 billion worth of vaccines a year. This is BUSINESS we’re talking about, and in order to promote business, PR people cook up all sorts of schemes.

Pandemics, even if they don’t pan out, are clever propaganda.

Also, the horror story of GERMS that can cause plagues anywhere in the world at the drop of a hat - the ceaseless drumbeat of germs, germs, and more germs - obscures all sorts of environmental causes of illness and death.



Related:
How To Kill a Whole Lot of People: Scripps Scientists Publish How They Made H7N9 Virus More Transmissible

For example, toxic chemicals produced by major and favored corporations.

“It’s the virus” is the greatest cover story on planet Earth.

Don’t forget that one.

Oh - you want to know the official figures on SARS? 8,000 cases worldwide, 774 deaths, between 2002 and 2003. No cases on the record since 2004.

By any standard, that’s a DUD. But go ahead, read the official accounts and histories. See if you can find one clear admission that the whole thing was nonsense. Good luck.

Remember, it’s not the pandemic that’s important. It’s the warning about the pandemic. That’s what moves product off the shelves…


Related Articles:

A Quick Review Of Fake Medical Diagnostic Tests + Author Exposes The “Vaccine Deep State”- A Massive Criminal Fraud And Embezzlement Ring Inside The CDC

CDC “Spider” Scientists Attack The CDC, Blow The Lid Off & Robert F Kennedy Jr: CDC An “Edifice Of Faud”

Conspiracy: This Is Why Brazil Is Ground Zero For The Latest Bio-Engineered Pandemic


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Three Trigger Terms Being Used To Stop Critical Thinking
May 1 2019 | From: WakingTimes

It’s a strange world of newspeak we live in. What was once a society devoted to logic and progress is now being herded in echo chambers of thought control and anti-critical thinking.




Without the ability to examine an issue impartially and completely there is little hope of maintaining liberty and freedom, as history repeatedly demonstrated.

Related: How To Become A Freethinker: A Practical Guide + 7 Lessons You Should Learn Early In Life

Today, we find that thinking is a diminishing art, and in its place, sound bites and stop-thought terms are used to put the brakes on the mind. These terms are widely used as signals to prevent minds from looking too deeply at a topic or issue.


""Thinking critically means making reasoned judgments that are logical and well thought out. It is a way of thinking in which one doesn’t simply accept all arguments and conclusions to which one is exposed without questioning the arguments and conclusions.

It requires curiosity, skepticism and humility. People who use critical thinking are the ones who say things such as, “How do you know that?”

“Is this conclusion based on evidence or gut feelings?” and “Are there alternative possibilities when given new pieces of information?"" 

- Source

The three terms most widely used today to this avail are detailed below.


1. Conspiracy Theorist

This term is so overused that it really is devoid of any practical meaning.

If you were to examine it at face value, though, it describes a person who is looking to understand injustices in our world and is willing to look at uncomfortable facts in search of negative influence… of which there is plenty in our world today.

However, ‘conspiracy theorist’ has literally become a derogatory term that is attributed to anyone who refuses to accept mainstream narratives at face value.



Related: American Pravda: How The CIA Invented "Conspiracy Theories"

It doesn’t matter that there is overwhelming evidence to indicate that mainstream media does not value objectivity or report on important issues thoroughly or truthfully.

Now we find this term applied as a prefix to well-known journalists and media personalities, almost as we use the term Doctor.

It’s an adjective that precedes them everywhere, so that before you even know what issue is being discussed, you know that the issue is coming from someone considered to be fringe and unacceptable.


2. Alt


We see the label ‘alt’ being applied more and more frequently as an adjective for sentiments that supposedly do not fit in with the accepted status quo. Ideas outside of the box.

Alt-Media. Alt-Right. Alt-Left. Alt-News. Alt-Health. And so on.

The signal here is that the mainstream is the safe space, and that any segment of ideas or thought given this prefix is outside of that mainstream, and therefore not something ordinary people would want to associate with.



Related: Here’s How You Stop Internet Censorship

It takes complex ideas and sensitive issues and benches them, so that when the hive mind stumbles upon something ‘alt’ they immediately react with fear, disdain and feigned outrage.

There is no ‘alt’ in our world. We are one, and any faction of ideas is really just a spinoff of the shared reality we all live in.

If segments of this shared space are off-limits and labeled as so, we all lose.


3. Hate Speech

This term is one of the all-time favorites of politicians and tyrants. After all, what could more dangerous than hate?

Newsflash: Hate speech is not the same thing as a hate crime.

Speech is just that, speech. It is literally vibrating air moving through space, and unless we’re talking about and LRAD crowd control cannon, sound really can’t cause people physical harm.

It is fascinating to watch how people use this term so freely as if speech itself can be criminal.

American [Western] society is founded on the idea of freedom of speech and self-expression, which at its core is the recognition that as human beings we do not and never will all see the world in the same way.



Related: Tyranny And Free Speech

It is an acknowledgement of the fact that different people have different ideas about how the world is and should be. That these differences shouldn’t be used as a basis for discrimination.

The term hate speech is one of the most loaded and ambiguous terms in the political lexicon. Beware.


Final Thoughts

Next time you see or hear these terms being used, ask yourself what it is about the story that you’re not supposed to think too deeply about.

Allow both sides of the argument to share equal time in your mind, and honor the independent, sovereign being within yourself that deserves a chance to make up its own mind about how it wishes to view the world.


Related Articles:

Four Things Globalists Think You’re Too Stupid To Understand

If You Limit ANY Free Speech, This Is What You Get

The Real Inconvenient Truth & A Call For Critical Thinking By The 99%

The Emergence Of Orwellian Newspeak And The Death Of Free Speech

Censored, Surveilled, Watch Listed And Jailed: The Absurdity Of Being A Citizen In A Police State

It's Official: This Is Straight Out Of Orwell's 1984...


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Tables Have Turned: Here Comes The Real Story Of Collusion And Corruption
April 30 2019 | From: InsideScoopPolitics

The Mueller report came as a big thud for Democrats and NeverTrumpers who’ve been frothing at the mouth for a big indictment of collusion, treason, obstruction…anything they could get their hands on to punish Trump for winning the election in 2016.



It didn’t happen. It’s over for them. It’s also just the beginning for them.

Related: The Strange and Unexplained Coincidences in the Mueller Report Continue to Pile Up

The Witch hunt is over but the real investigation is getting its wings. The 400+ page report of junk and wasted money is available for anyone to read.

For most of us, over the last couple of years, we've known this whole investigation was a sham and an illegal hunt for a crime. What we are about to see now is an unfolding of a planned coup attempt on a democratically elected President.



“What will unfold is investigation into what historians will consider one of the greatest political ‘witch-hunts’ in U.S. history. If justice is served, those responsible will be outed and prosecuted.”

Americans deserve to know the truth about this investigation and the abuses of power that our corrupted officials have been using. It's been ongoing for many years but came to a head when they tried to oust our President. Will they face justice? Sarah Carter seems to think so.


“Those officials who weaponized the intelligence community, approved unauthorized surveillance on American citizens based on unvalidated information and targeted a sitting president should fear the wrath of ‘lady justice.”

America does need to heal and recover from this brutal investigation and propaganda effort by the left and their media allies. However, if they're not held accountable and brought to stiff justice, there can be no healing.



Related: Russia Gate Goes Down In History As A Remarkable Display Of American Stupidity + Barr ‘Right’ To Say
‘Spying’ Occurred On Trump Campaign


We know that it would just happen again. The same thing that happens when you tell a child they shouldn't do something and then reward them for doing it.


“Transparency and justice is the only way we can regain the trust in the institutions that make our great nation the envy of those around the world.”

America needs to know the truth, and soon we will.


Related Articles:

Report: Trump to Declassify FISA Docs in Coming Weeks

Left-wing media uses misleading headlines to bash President Trump

Pres. Trump: media barely mentioning Mueller report showed no collusion

Giuliani: No Argument Russia Interfered, but Mueller Report Biased Against Pres. Trump


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Dangerous Products That We’re Unknowingly Using In Our Day-To-Day Life
+ The Cancer Risk To People Who Drink Chlorinated Water Is 93% Higher Than Those Who Don’t
April 29 2019 | From: NewEasternOutlook / EnvirowatchRangitikei / Varous

In today’s highly controversial and aggressive world, virtually anything can present a threat to the life of a human being, not just wars, climate change, or short-sighted and often criminal actions of certain politicians.



As it has been shown by a number of scientific studies, the activities of a number of American corporations present a very real threat the well-being of the population mainly due to the use of genetically modified substances in their products while manufacturing substandard health and beauty aids.

The truth is that it’s the people of developing countries that are being affected by these fraudulent business practices the most, since Western corporations try to suppress any information about the health effects of their products to obtain maximum profit.

At the end of the twentieth century British scientists have come to a sensational conclusion that parabens are capable of penetrating the skin barrier and are being accumulated in the tissues of the body, causing cancer, hormone system failures, endocrine system suppression, and skin diseases.



Related: Johnson & Johnson Hid Talcum Powder Link to Ovarian Cancer for 40 Years

Research made this finding while studying malignant tumor
s in breast tissue, all of which contained parabens, Later on, these findings were confirmed by Canadian and French scientists.

Parabens are artificial preservatives that are often used in the pharmaceutical and cosmetic industry by a number of Western corporations.

Even though they are effectively increasing the shelf life of a product, while remaining relatively cheap to use, parabens pose a serious threat to human health and well-being.

From time to time one can come across articles on the harmful effects of parabens in Europe and the United States, forcing certain companies to replace parabens with less harmful preservatives. However, the markets of developing countries, especially those with hot and humid climates, are flooded with Western cosmetic products that contain the dangerous substance.

In order to attract international attention to this danger, the French Le Monde went as far as to publish a list of the 400 Western pharmaceutical products containing parabens and that are, therefore, dangerous for use or consumption.



Related: A New Study Links Benadryl to Serioud Mental Health Diseases Such as Dementia

In this list one may find the baby cream Biafine, such cough medicines as Clarix, Codotussyl, Drill, Hexapneumine, Humex, Pectosan, and Rhinathiol, stomach relief medicine such as Maalox, Gaviscon, Josacine, and antibiotic Zinnat, along with a list of other drugs produced by Western corporations and actively advertised for mass consumption.

As it has been pointed out by French journalists, numerous studies have shown that drugs from this list compromise the functioning of the hormone system, especially the reproductive ability of men and women, and may result in cancer.

At the same time, scientists are stressing the danger of hydro-alcoholic gels which were brought to the market in the wake of the artificially created hysteria around the “danger” of the so-called “bird flu,” the H1N1. These gels are advertised as the ultimate solution for sanitizing hands and body in the absence of soap.



Related: Hydrogen Peroxide Or Soap And Water To Clean Your Wound? + Why You Should Think Twice Before Using Antibacterial Soap

A study carried out by the University of Missouri and published in the Plos ONE journal shows that hydro-alcoholic gels make a person more susceptible to Bisphénol-A.

In 2010, the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) officially recognized that Bisphénol-A is harmful to human health due to the negative effect it has on brain functions and the reproductive system. It also causes a number of cancers (in both women and men) – in particular, prostate cancer, breast cancer as well as autism, depression, reproductive and endocrine systems failure, delays in brain development, diabetes, obesity, and cardiovascular disease.

Yet another study conducted in Argentina showed that 85% of the women’s hygienic pads presented a serious threat to women since they contain the chemically hazardous substance known as glyphosate.



This fact was revealed by researchers of the National Argentine University of La Plata at a recent congress of physicians in Buenos Aires, upon examining sanitary towels and sanitary pads produced with the use of genetically-modified cotton that was grown using Roundup herbicide of the American company Monsanto-Bayer.

As we learn from this study,after the use of this herbicide, all cotton products contain this carcinogenic substance. For this reason, there’s been a massive movement in many countries through the collection of signatures to force such producers as Tampax or Always to state the composition of their products.


Related: Why Are These 25 Carcinogens Still Being Sold?




The Cancer Risk To People Who Drink Chlorinated Water Is 93% Higher Than Those Who Don’t

This information is from well known Dr Mercola. If you go to the link you can download his free ebook, an excellent resource that will show you how to protect yourself and your loved ones from health risks by choosing the best water to drink and bathe in.

Need I repeat? We need to be vigilant in what we expose ourselves to today because corporate interests are such that they will focus on profits not on your health. Be vigilant and be informed.

Related: 'Brockovich' carcinogen found at unsafe levels in tap water supplies of 218mn Americans – report

What if that clear, clean-looking liquid you use every day – to quench your thirst, to bathe and shower in, and to wash your dishes and laundry in contributed to dozens of everyday ailments, including…heart attacks, tiredness, sinus problems, sperm count, risk of miscarriage, a weakened immune system and many more.

Truth is, the water we use in and around our homes is far from the fresh, pure resource you might assume. And the worst part is…

Americans are ingesting from 300 to 600 times what the Environmental Protection Agency considers a “safe” amount while chlorine itself is relatively benign, and was created to help keep us free from infectious diarrheas, it reacts with organic materials which already dissolve in water, forming chemicals (known as DBP’s) that are over 100 times more toxic than chlorine…


According to the U.S. Council of Environmental Quality, the cancer risk to people who drink chlorinated water is 93 percent higher than among those whose water does not contain chlorine.

The residents of a small town in Pennsylvania who ate diets rich in saturated animal fats and milk had no heart attacks – until they switched from mountain spring water to fluoridated water.

Research from the University of Nijmegen in the Netherlands discovered that people who swam in chlorinated pools or polluted waters as children had 2.2 to 2.4 times the risk of developing melanoma compared to those who did not swim in chlorinated waters.

Male smokers who drank chlorinated tap water for more than 40 years had double the risk of bladder cancer as smoking males who drank non-chlorinated water.


Related: Get this FREE report "Is Your Water Safe? How Modern Water Sanitation Can Damage Your Health and How To Protect Yourself"


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Great Transition: The Shadow Ruling Force Behind The Central Banks Secrecy Is Repugnant In A Free And Open Society
April 28 2019 | From: FinalWakeUpCall

Monolithic and Ruthless Conspiracy: The Central Bankers’ crimes are legendary and more than can be listed here.



By providing large-scale loans to practically all countries and people, those have become dependent of the hidden ruling power. Governments that want to remain independent are vigorously addressed and enforced; their leaders are unseated, or murdered

Related: A Central Banker’s Plan For Your Money

If this is not possible through means of political propaganda, or being economically sanctioned, the CIA, Mossad, or otherwise military force will achieve their objective to submit them to the NWO-regime.

The bloodline Archon families want to control the world, which required the joining of forces of the 13 influential bloodline families.

Professor Adam Weishaupt drafted a plan in 1773, on request of Mayer Amschel Rothschild to make that happen.

The ultimate goal was, and still is, to create a world dictatorship with one leader at the top, located in Jerusalem - Israel.

As a matter of fact, even China’s government is ultimately run by a - Nazi-Rothschild- central bank, which dictates and controls the flow of money all over the world in every nation in which central banks are located.

They obtained full control, and have 100% – 5 eyes support that makes their authority unquestioned and unchallenged.



Related: Democracy Is A Front For Central Bank Rule & Financial Starvation In A Fiat Debt Slavery Financial System

Anyone involved in this buy and bribe scheme knows that it is in their own interest to participate in agreement to the given instructions. It really is a world-wide spread epidemic, and much worse than anyone can imagine.

The structure it is condoned under the current legal system of admiralty law. Defeating the truly evil enemy, should be people’s key priority! Let’s target the shadow controlling forces behind these central banks and put an end to this global corruption once and for all.

The real rulers in Washington DC are the invisible Luciferian Khazarians, they exercise their power from behind the scenes. Today the path to total dictatorship in the Western World can be laid by strictly legal means, unseen and unheard by Congress or Parliament, even the President, nor the people.

Officially, Constitutional Governments are implemented. But within our governments and political systems, another body is representing another form of these governments, it is the bureaucratic elite which believes that Constitutions are useless, as they are sure being on the winning side of the game.



Related: The Khazarian Mafia’s System Of Cartels

All the strange developments in policy agreements like the refuge crisis, may be traced back to this group who are going to make us over to suit their desire. The harm done to all people on our planet will take generations to correct. But all will be corrected, if we the people wake up and take back control!


Secrecy is Repugnant in a Free and Open Society

Trump is threatening to disturb the Deep State’s control game as no other modern President before him ever has done, except President John F. Kennedy who was murdered for his opposition against the Deep State. He said on April 27th, 1961 in an address to newspaper publishers;


“The very word ‘secrecy’ is repugnant in a free and open society, and we are as a people, inherently and historically, opposed to secret societies, secret oaths, and secret proceedings…

For we are opposed around the world by a monolithic and ruthless conspiracy that relies primarily on covert means for expanding its sphere of influence. It depends on infiltration instead of invasion, on subversion instead of elections, on intimidation instead of free choice.

It is a system which has conscripted vast human and material resources into the building of a tightly knit, highly efficient machine that combines military, diplomatic, intelligence, economic, scientific, and political operations. Its preparations are concealed, not published, its mistakes are buried, not headlined, its dissenters are silenced, not praised, no expenditure is questioned, no secret is revealed…

I am asking your help in the tremendous task of informing and alerting the American people… The high office of President has been used to foment a plot to destroy the American’s freedom, and before I leave office I must inform the citizen of his plight.”



Related: JFK At One Hundred

Unfortunately, the news media was and still is owned by the very foes President Kennedy was trying to defeat and those foes killed the President two and a half years later.


Unaware of the Risks

Even today, people are so unaware and have no idea of the risks President Trump is taking by challenging the Deep State, specifically the US military industrial complex MIC.

The mainstream media still do their utmost to discredit the President of the United States and try to overthrow him in order that the utterly corrupt elite that rule the western world can continue to hold on to power and to protect the massive budget of the MIC- complex, that along with the Israel Lobby, funds the elections of those who rule us.

They also tried multiple times to start a nuclear world war using Syria, North Korea, Iran, and other hotspots.

 It is important to remember and that cannot be repeated often enough: these people try to kill you and your family, and are still doing so.



Related: Deep State? What About Elite Television News Anchors?

The Asian secret societies learned of the Deep State Nazi plans to murder 90% of humanity by successfully eavesdropping on their secret meetings. In 2003, the cabal were spreading the engineered SARS disease – a bioweapon designed specifically to target the Asian race, which became their call to arms.

The Europeans, particularly the Germans, are doing some serious chess moves that will make Mr. Trump’s job ahead easier. The powers that are feeling resentful of Mr. Trump are also moving in a healthy direction for all of us.

Mr. Trump is doing a great job that isn’t understood by the public at large and probably not known by himself, as the whole operation is scripted by the Alliance.

Comment: Read about the Alliance that has been working behind the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.

By helping through Q-ANON notifications and observing the skirmishes that are forever going on.

This has become part of the whole scenario: it represents the undercurrent that is behind everything. It’s a crowd together of folks trying to keep this at bay. As, many of us wake-up and join the patriot crowd.

Where we go one, we go all. The Deep State won’t succeed; their turning point may have been passed.




Related: An Objective Analysis Of The QAnon Phenomenon


The Central Banking Control

The Central Banking system is currently owned by the Archon bloodline families that control more wealth than the better off 3.5 billion of the world’s population. Inequality is a drastic understatement.

The BIS – Bank for International Settlements – is a privately owned bank that oversights 60 Central banks including: The Bank of England, the Federal Reserve the European Central Bank and the Bank of Japan.

The BIS controls 95% of global wealth. The BIS was created as a control bank that would supervise the damage reparation settlements of Germany and its allies after WW1. It then morphed into the demon financial control center that it is today.

The monetary system from its inception till today is privately owned by the Rothschild and a few other families.

The Governments pay Central Banks with taxpayers’ monies to compensate for the interest of their counterfeit debt money, which they could have issued themselves free of any interest charge.



Related: Banks Are Stealing Our Future? How To Put An End?

Moreover, taxpayers’ contributions fund the Vatican Bank, Queen’s Bank of England, and all other Central Banks across the globe instead of their own government. People’s energy money makes it possible that Central Banks can charge again interest on the reimbursed tax funds.

Evidently, this corrupt system is also funding international child trafficking, including all black terrorist operations, etc.


No Need for Central Banks

Moreover, there is no need for Central banks, as the people controlled governments can issue the money themselves free of interest, without debt! – There is no anchor against the ever-increasing money supply that is destroying the world’s reserve currency.

New out of air-printed money is constantly created to fight deflation to avoid a depression. The world Central banks cannot accept deflation; they are trying to offset this by printing money to generate inflation. And, so have the populace since 1972 two third of their savings lost.



Related: Central Banks Are Trojan Horses, Looting Their Host Nations

As there is no velocity in the money circulation, they cannot generate the outcome they want. The Central Bankers have no power to turn this around, but resort to continuously printing money that no one spends, so the money has little effect on the economy.

If they don’t find a way to increase the velocity of money, there will be no inflation and higher prices, if money velocity keeps slowing down, the world will be mired in a deflationary trap that scares the hell out of the central bankers, as debt burdens go up in real terms. Tax revenues decrease. Banks fail. When the role of complication is ignored, they are putting the system at risk of collapse.

It is still an open question whether the world needs a reserve currency and it certainly does not when money is linked to something tangible.

There is no need for central banks to create money without limits either – as has been proven during the era 1870 – 1914 when the gold standard acted independently and effectively.


Unsustainable Debt

IMF says, “debt is unsustainable”, but central banks don’t solve the problem. They like to keep the world in a limbo of debt, so that countries and people need to take on more debt.

The Central Bankers business model is to putcountries and people in more debt, it is a pattern and they know this, but most of the people don’t know that.



Related: Unless We Kick Our Addiction To Growth, We’re Heading Towards A Debt-Fuelled Dystopia

The puppet governments and politicians are bought and paid for to do these things. The only way around this is to get rid of the central banks.

Look at Greece, it is in trouble again, the central bank’s fix was not a fix, it was a band aid and it was only meant to last for a couple of years, then the country would need more debt.

Another noticeable aspect is housing appreciation that is beginning to slow, prices are coming down which means those who purchased at the height of the market will be underwater and those who purchased during the last financial crisis will be worse off. Even, the pension systems are in trouble and there are noticeable signs of this. Once the market, real estate, and the rest crashes it will be game over.

And, that is why the economy is rapidly falling apart. And here comes the narrative battle, either Trump or the FED-Central Bank is going to be in charge to tell this story.

What you have to do is to prepare for the transition and make sure you have sufficient food in store as there is a life-size possibility that supplies will be disturbed.



Related: Governments Are Corporations & The Gold Standard Will Break Up The Banking Cartel

Be assured that this great transition is coming for which most people aren’t prepared; they will go through a very difficult period of time.

The Alliance with the patriots do there best to make the transition easy as possible. Let’s hope that Trump will have the narrative, as the central banks don’t care about the people, the more we suffer the better they like it.

Eventually, the Deep State players and agendas will dissolve under the upcoming transparency with equality for all. Everyone has to know how to fix the system, where the risks are hidden, and how with the least intrusive means possible can be changed.

Amongst others, it will be by asset backed currencies, then everything else could start to be fixed. How and what is explained in the next issue. Stay tuned!


Related Articles:

Rothschild worried about new world economic order

Deep State Desperation At All-Time High - Here’s Why

Economic Contagion? Central Banks Are the Real Culprit

Survival of the Richest - The wealthy are plotting to leave us behind

Trillion Dollar Inheritance: The World’s Biggest Family Fortunes

The Money Usurers: Money made on the backs of the people is being sanctioned by their government!

Rothschild Bank caught up in money-laundering scandal

The Truly Most Evil Enemy: The Deep State’s Traitors

The Banksters control the world: The trap is set to bring the economy down - The truth is about to come out

Allen Dulles was Swiss Family Mallet-Prevost Sleeper Agent of CIA OSS; Octogon rules over Pentagon


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Recent Events Suggest Something Big Is Coming
April 27 2019 | From: Geopolitics

A combination of geopolitical movements is pointing to a highly coordinated plan of action to end the rule of negative forces that have ruled the planet for millennia.



These events are scheduled evidently for maximum impact, like so:

Related: The Fall And Rise Of Truth, Trust And Society’s Capacity For Wisdom

Just a few hours ago, the train carrying North Korean leader Kim Jong Un arrived at the Vladivostok terminal without incident. He was welcomed by Putin’s representatives and honor guards.





We cannot speculate about the covert objectives of his summit with Vladimir Putin, but satellite data are said to indicate that North Korea is rebuilding a nuclear testing site for a possible first missile test in 15 months.

Yesterday, the 8th Moscow Conference of International Security [MCIS], or global security summit against Deep State terror, begun its 3-day discussions on “arms control systems.”

Yes, the flow of arms to terror cells worldwide must be monitored and mitigated before another catastrophic events endangering the lives of civilians could happen.








Topics for discussion include security for Asia, Africa and Latin America, the suspended Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces Treaty (INF) between Russia and the United States, terrorism and illegal migration in Northern Africa as well as reconstruction and the return of refugees in Syria and Iraq.

What is very significant about the MCIS summit is that it is expanding in size and influence around the globe.

According to Russian Defense Minister Sergei Shoigu, delegations from 95 countries, as well as 30 defense ministers, 15 general staff chiefs and deputy defense ministers are attending the event.



Related: More Undeniable Signs That The Global Criminal Cabal Is Going Down + Obama, Hillary Clinton Both
Supported Trump’s Plan To Stop Migrants At Border

This means that no longer are countries afraid to express their desire for a more constructive engagement, in a clear defiance of the aggressive rhetorics coming from the US State Department.

It is reported that high-profile participants include Chinese State Councilor and Defense Minister Wei Fenghe, Iranian Defense Minister Amir Hatami, Indian Defense Minister Nirmala Sitharaman, Pakistani Defense Minister Khurram Dastgir Khan, Vietnam’s Defense Minister Ngo Xuan Lich, Singapore’s Minister for Education and Second Minister for Defense Ong Ye Kung, and South African Defense Minister Nosiviwe Mapisa-Nqakula.

“A thing to note is that the forum’s popularity has been growing with every year,” Shoigu said on Monday.

The conference is so effective that it has prevented any new regime change efforts, and false flag operations of the same magnitude as the WTC 911, since its establishment in 2012.

Remember, it was in September 30, 2015, or a little more than 2 years after the first MCIS summit, when the Russian forces started bombing ISIS/ISIL controlled territories in Syria and today’s MCIS summit is the first one to happen post-ISIS/ISIL era.

Adding to this is the recent advances of Gen. Haftar’s Army into the Libyan capital of Tripoli to force the UN Security Council to recognize a bigger force that will have the biggest change of reuniting Libya under one government, all against the wishes of the Central Intelligence Agency and MOSSAD ISIS terrorists.

A year ago, Libyans showed their preference for Gen. Haftar to be the new leader, instead of the Deep State appointed president of Tripoli.





Here’s why…





In celebrating the founding of the Chinese Navy, Chinese President and Chairman of the Central Military Commission Xi Jinping attended a multinational fleet review in Qingdao on Tuesday to mark the 70th anniversary.

Heads of over 60 naval delegations inspected the fleet together.





The annual One Belt One Road Summit will also happen this week, so we can expect more positive surprises from that event.

Exercises and summits like these send a very strong message to the West that peaceful cooperation is the new normal, and hegemonic tendencies are shunned by the rest of the world and even by Western citizens alike.

What this all means is that both Russia and China are not isolated from the rest of the world, nor is Iran, as Western media would like to portray.

In fact, South Korea, one of two East Asia-based high financiers of the Criminal Cabal, is sending a delegation to the United States to seek an extension of waivers which Washington ended on Monday with the aim of bringing Iran’s oil exports to zero.




Related: How The US Became A Warmonger Police State

Iran is not backing down either…


We believe that Iran will continue to sell its oil. We will continue to find buyers for our oil and we will continue to use the Strait of Hormuz as a safe transit passage for the sale of our oil,” Zarif said, speaking in New York on Wednesday at the Asia Society.

“If the United States takes the crazy measure of trying to prevent us from doing that, then it should be prepared for the consequences. If the US wants to enter the Strait of Hormuz, they will have to talk to the IRGC forces protecting it,” Iranian Foreign Minister Javad Zarif has said.

The US military has been at war 222 years of its 239-year existence, solely for plunder of sovereign resources. That’s more than enough to prove one’s sense of misguided patriotism.

Unless all of the US forces are pulled out from countries that rejected them, we can consider the two-party quarrel as a mere continuation of the vaudeville that’s fooled generations of American voters.

But it’s highly laudable that the Yellow Vest Movement is pushing on until their noble objectives are achieved, in spite of the recent Notre Dame distraction.





Related: France’s Yellow Vest Protesters: Unleash Chaos By Withdrawing All Money From Banks & How The 1% Profit Off Of Racial Economic Inequality

The first round of geopolitical battle in Venezuela has ended with 0 to 1 score for the Alliance. The timely intervention by Russian forces and allies prevented the economic hitmen’s access to more oil and gold, which could have been used to finance terror mercenaries as they fatten themselves up even more.

What could possibly come next from the Deep State’s camp?

More earthquakes?



Related: Christchurch Earthquake: Remember September?

More false flag attacks perhaps, to start a Muslim-Christian worldwide conflict, as the main goal of the recent Sri Lanka “tit for tat” attack in retaliation for the shooting of Muslims in New Zealand a few weeks ago, would like to suggest?

Finally, Philippines’ Duterte is “declaring war” against Canada for failing to pick up its smuggled garbage, which includes hospital wastes and other highly toxic materials now rotting in the Port of Manila, but most have already reached landfills in Tarlac, North of Manila, prior to Duterte’s term.





Help bring down the Deep State criminal cabal by boycotting Big Pharma for good.

Related: 2019: The Year Deep State Gets Demolished


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Is Psychiatry Bullshit? + Fourteen Lies That Our Psychiatry Professors Taught Us In Medical School
April 26 2019 | From: Sott / GlobalResearch

Some Psychiatrists View The Chemical-Imbalance Theory As A Well-Meaning Lie.



In the current issue of the journal Ethical Human Psychology and Psychiatry, Australian dissident psychiatrist Niall McLaren titles his article, "Psychiatry as Bullshit" and makes a case for just that.

Related: The Myth Of Mental Illness: Psychiatry Is A Fraud And It Is All About Control + “Opposition Defiant Disorder” - Non-Conformity And Anti-Authoritarianism Now Considered An Illness

The great controversies in psychiatry are no longer about its chemical-imbalance theory of mental illness or its DSM diagnostic system, both of which have now been declared invalid even by the pillars of the psychiatry establishment.

In 2011, Ronald Pies, editor-in-chief emeritus of the Psychiatric Times, stated;


In truth, the 'chemical imbalance' notion was always a kind of urban legend - never a theory seriously propounded by well-informed psychiatrists."

And in 2013, Thomas Insel, then director of the National Institute of Mental Health, offered a harsh rebuke of the DSM, announcing that because the DSM diagnostic system lacks validity, the: "NIMH will be re-orienting its research away from DSM categories."

So, the great controversy today has now become just how psychiatry can be most fairly characterized given its record of being proven wrong about virtually all of its assertions, most notably its classifications of behaviors, theories of "mental illness" and treatment effectiveness/adverse effects.

Among critics, one of the gentlest characterizations of psychiatry is a "false narrative," the phrase used by investigative reporter Robert Whitaker (who won the 2010 Investigative Reporters and Editors Book Award for Anatomy of an Epidemic) to describe the story told by the psychiatrists' guild American Psychiatric Association.

In "Psychiatry as Bullshit," McLaren begins by considering several different categories of "nonscience with scientific pretensions," such as "pseudoscience" and "scientific fraud."

"Pseudoscience" is commonly defined as a collection of beliefs and practices promulgated as scientific but in reality mistakenly regarded as being based on scientific method. The NIMH director ultimately rejected the DSM because of its lack of validity, which is crucial to the scientific method.



In the DSM, psychiatric illnesses are created by an APA committee, 69 percent of whom have financial ties to Big Pharma.

The criteria for DSM illness are not objective biological ones but non-scientific subjective ones (which is why homosexuality was a DSM mental illness until the early 1970s).

Besides lack of scientific validity, the DSM lacks scientific reliability, as clinicians routinely disagree on diagnoses because patients act differently in different circumstances and because of the subjective nature of the criteria.

"Fraud" is a misrepresentation, a deception intended for personal gain, and implies an intention to deceive others of the truth - or "lying." Drug companies, including those that manufacture psychiatric drugs, have been convicted of fraud, as have high-profile psychiatrists (as well as other doctors).

Human rights activist and attorney Jim Gottstein offers an argument as to why the APA is a "fraudulent enterprise"; however, the APA has not been legally convicted of fraud.

To best characterize psychiatry, McLaren considers the category of "bullshit," invoking philosopher Harry Frankfurt's 1986 journal article "On Bullshit" (which became a New York Times bestselling book in 2005).



Defining Bullshit

What is the essence of bullshit? For Frankfurt, "This lack of connection to a concern with truth - this indifference to how things really are - that I regard as of the essence of bullshit."

Frankfurt devotes a good deal of On Bullshit to differentiating between a liar and a bullshitter. Both the liar and the bullshitter misrepresent themselves, representing themselves as attempting to be honest and truthful. But there is a difference between the liar and the bullshitter.



The liar knows the truth, and the liar's goal is to conceal it.

The goal of bullshitters is not necessarily to lie about the truth but to persuade their audience of a specific impression so as to advance their agenda. So, bullshitters are committed to neither truths nor untruths, uncommitted to neither facts nor fiction. It's actually not in bullshitters' interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge can hinder their capacity to bullshit.

Frankfurt tells us that liar the hides that he or she is "attempting to lead us away from a correct apprehension of reality." In contrast, the bullshitter hides that "the truth-values of his statements are of no central interest to him."



Are Psychiatrists Bullshitters?

Recall establishment psychiatrist Pies' assertion:


In truth, the 'chemical imbalance' notion was always a kind of urban legend - never a theory seriously propounded by well-informed psychiatrists."

What Pies omits is the reality that the vast majority of psychiatrists have been promulgating this theory. Were they liars or simply not well-informed? And if not well-informed, were they purposely not well-informed?


If one wants to bullshit oneself and the general public that psychiatry is a genuinely scientific medical specialty, there's a great incentive to be unconcerned with the truth or falseness of the chemical imbalance theory of depression.

Bullshitters immediately recognize how powerful this chemical imbalance notion is in gaining prestige for their profession and themselves as well as making their job both more lucrative and easier, increasing patient volume by turning virtually all patient visits into quick prescribing ones.

Prior to the chemical imbalance bullshit campaign, most Americans were reluctant to take antidepressants - or to give them to their children.



Related: Big Pharma Caught Manipulating Antidepressant Drug Trials Putting Teenagers in Grave Danger

But the idea that depression is caused by a chemical imbalance that can be corrected with Prozac, Paxil, Zoloft and selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor antidepressants sounded like taking insulin for diabetes.

Correcting a chemical imbalance seemed like a reasonable thing to do, and so the use of SSRI antidepressants skyrocketed.

In 2012, National Public Radio correspondent Alix Spiegel began her piece about the disproven chemical imbalance theory with the following personal story about being prescribed Prozac when she was a depressed teenager:



My parents took me to a psychiatrist at Johns Hopkins Hospital. She did an evaluation and then told me this story: "The problem with you," she explained, "is that you have a chemical imbalance. It's biological, just like diabetes, but it's in your brain.

This chemical in your brain called serotonin is too, too low. There's not enough of it, and that's what's causing the chemical imbalance. We need to give you medication to correct that." Then she handed my mother a prescription for Prozac. "



Related: 7 Facts About Depression That Will Blow You Away

When Spiegel discovered that the chemical imbalance theory was untrue, she sought to discover why this truth had been covered up, and so she interviewed researchers who knew the truth.

Alan Frazer, professor of pharmacology and psychiatry and chairman of the pharmacology department at the University of Texas Health Sciences Center, told Spiegel that by framing depression as a deficiency - something that needed to be returned to normal - patients felt more comfortable taking antidepressants.

Frazer stated;



“If there was this biological reason for them being depressed, some deficiency that the drug was correcting, then taking a drug was OK."

For Frazer, the story that depressed people have a chemical imbalance enabled many people to come out of the closet about being depressed.

Frazer's rationale reminds us of Edward Herman and Noam Chomsky's book Manufacturing Consent, the title deriving from presidential adviser and journalist Walter Lippmann's phrase "the manufacture of consent" - a necessity for Lippmann, who believed that the general public is incompetent in discerning what's truly best for them, and so their opinion must be molded by a benevolent elite who does know what's best for them.



There are some psychiatrists who view the chemical imbalance theory as a well-meaning lie by a benevolent elite to ensure resistant patients do what is best for them, but my experience is that there are actually extremely few such "well-meaning liars." Most simply don't know the truth because they have put little effort in discerning it.

I believe McLaren is correct in concluding that the vast majority of psychiatrists are bullshitters, uncommitted to either facts or fiction. Most psychiatrists would certainly have been happy if the chemical-imbalance theory was true but obviously have not needed it to be true in order to promulgate it.

For truth seekers, the falseness of the chemical imbalance theory has been easily available, but most psychiatrists have not been truth seekers.

It is not in the bullshitters' interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge of what is a fact and what is fiction hinders the capacity to use any and all powerful persuasion. Simply put, a commitment to the truth hinders the capacity to bullshit.


About the Author

Bruce E. Levine is a practicing clinical psychologist. His latest book is Get Up, Stand Up: Uniting Populists, Energizing the Defeated, and Battling the Corporate Elite.


Psychotropic Drugs, Are They Safe?

Fourteen Lies That Our Psychiatry Professors Taught Us In Medical School.




Myth # 1:

“The FDA (US Food and Drug Administration) tests all new psychiatric drugs”

False. Actually the FDA only reviews studies that were designed, administered, secretly performed and paid for by the multinational profit-driven drug companies.

The studies are frequently farmed out by the pharmaceutical companies by well-paid research firms, in whose interest it is to find positive results for their corporate employers. Unsurprisingly, such research policies virtually guarantee fraudulent results.

Myth # 2:

“FDA approval means that a psychotropic drug is effective long-term”

False. Actually, FDA approval doesn’t even mean that psychiatric drugs have been proven to be safe – either short-term or long-term! The notion that FDA approval means that a psych drug has been proven to be effective is also a false one, for most such drugs are never tested – prior to marketing – for longer than a few months (and most psych patients take their drugs for years).

The pharmaceutical industry pays many psychiatric “researchers” – often academic psychiatrists (with east access to compliant, chronic, already drugged-up patients) who have financial or professional conflicts of interest – some of them even sitting on FDA advisory committees who attempt to “fast track” psych drugs through the approval process.



For each new drug application, the FDA only receives 1 or 2 of the “best” studies (out of many) that purport to show short-term effectiveness. The negative studies are shelved and not revealed to the FDA. In the case of the SSRI drugs, animal lab studies typically lasted only hours, days or weeks and the human clinical studies only lasted, on average, 4- 6 weeks, far too short to draw any valid conclusions about long-term effectiveness or safety!

Hence the FDA, prescribing physicians and patient-victims should not have been “surprised” by the resulting epidemic of SSRI drug-induced adverse reactions that are silently plaguing the people.

Indeed, many SSRI trials have shown that those drugs are barely more effective than placebo (albeit statistically significant!) with unaffordable economic costs and serious health risks, some of which are life-threatening and known to be capable of causing brain damage.



Myth # 3:

“FDA approval means that a psychotropic drug is safe long-term”

False. Actually, the SSRIs and the “anti-psychotic” drugs are usually tested in human trials for only a couple of months before being granted marketing approval by the FDA. And the drug companies are only required to report 1 or 2 studies (even if many other studies on the same drug showed negative, even disastrous, results).

Drug companies obviously prefer that the black box and fine print warnings associated with their drugs are ignored by both consumers and prescribers. One only has to note how small the print is on the commercials.



Related: Key Factors To Overcoming Depression Without Drugs

In our fast-paced shop-until-you-drop consumer society, we super-busy prescribing physicians and physician assistants have never been fully aware of the multitude of dangerous, potentially fatal adverse psych drug effects that include addiction, mania, psychosis, suicidality, worsening depression, worsening anxiety, insomnia, akathisia, brain damage, dementia, homicidality, violence, etc, etc.

But when was the last time anybody heard the FDA or Big Pharma apologize for the damage they did in the past?

And when was the last time there were significant punishments (other than writs slaps and “chump change” multimillion dollar fines) or prison time for the CEOs of the guilty multibillion dollar drug companies?



Myth # 4:

“Mental ‘illnesses’ are caused by ‘brain chemistry imbalances’”

False. In actuality, brain chemical/neurotransmitter imbalances have never been proven to exist (except for cases of neurotransmitter depletions caused by psych drugs) despite vigorous examinations of lab animal or autopsied human brains and brain slices by neuroscientist s who were employed by well-funded drug companies.

Knowing that there are over 100 known neurotransmitter systems in the human brain, proposing a theoretical chemical ”imbalance” is laughable and flies in the face of science.



Related: Low-Serotonin Depression Theory Challenged

Not only that, but if there was an imbalance between any two of the 100 potential systems (impossible to prove), a drug – that has never been tested on more than a handful of them – could never be expected to re-balance it!

Such simplistic theories have been perpetrated by Big Pharma upon a gullible public and a gullible psychiatric industry because corporations that want to sell the public on their unnecessary products know that they have to resort to 20 second sound bite-type propaganda to convince patients and prescribing practitioners why they should be taking or prescribing synthetic, brain-altering drugs that haven’t been adequately tested.


Myth # 5:

“Antidepressant drugs work like insulin for diabetics”

False. This laughingly simplistic – and very anti-scientific – explanation for the use of dangerous and addictive synthetic drugs is patently absurd and physicians and patients who believe it should be ashamed of themselves for falling for it.

There is such a thing as an insulin deficiency (but only in type 1 diabetes) but there is no such thing as a Prozac deficiency.

SSRIs (so-called Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitors – an intentional mis-representation because those drugs are NOT selective!) do not raise total brain serotonin.

Rather, SSRIs actually deplete serotonin long-term while only “goosing” serotonin release at the synapse level while at the same time interfere with the storage, reuse and re-cycling of serotonin (by its “serotonin reuptake inhibition” function).

(Parenthetically, the distorted “illogic” of the insulin/diabetes comparison above could legitimately be made in the case of the amino acid brain nutrient tryptophan, which is the precursor molecule of the important natural neurotransmitter serotonin.

If a serotonin deficiency or “imbalance” could be proven, the only logical treatment approach would be to supplement the diet with the serotonin precursor tryptophan rather than inflict upon the brain a brain-altering synthetic chemical that actually depletes serotonin long-term!



Myth # 6:

“SSRI ‘discontinuation syndromes’ are different than ‘withdrawal syndromes’”

False. The SSRI “antidepressant” drugs are indeed dependency-inducing/addictive and the neurological and psychological symptoms that occur when these drugs are stopped or tapered down are not “relapses” into a previous ”mental disorder” - as has been commonly asserted - but are actually new drug withdrawal symptoms that are different from those that prompted the original diagnosis

The term “discontinuation syndrome” is part of a cunningly-designed conspiracy that was plotted in secret by members of the psychopharmaceutical industryin order to deceive physicians into thinking that these drugs are not addictive.



Related: Dr. Kelly Brogan's Takedown Of Big Pharma's SSRI Anti-Depressant Drug Lies Hits Bestseller Lists

The deception has been shamelessly promoted to distract attention from the proven fact that most psych drugs are dependency-inducing and are therefore likely to cause “discontinuation/withdrawal symptoms” when they are stopped.

The drug industry knows that most people do not want to swallow dependency-inducing drugs that are likely to cause painful, even lethal withdrawal symptoms when they cut down the dose of the drug.



Myth # 7:

“Ritalin is safe for children (or adults)”

False. In actuality, methylphenidate (= Ritalin, Concerta, Daytrana, Metadate and Methylin; aka “kiddie cocaine”), a dopamine reuptake inhibitor drug, works exactly like cocaine on dopamine synapses, except that orally-dosed methylphenidate reaches the brain more slowly than snortable or smoked cocaine does.



Related: Nutrition And Mental Health + ADHD Is A Fabricated Disease, Says Reputed Neurologist

Therefore the oral form has less of an orgasmic “high” than cocaine.

Cocaine addicts actually prefer Ritalin if they can get it in a relatively pure powder form.

When snorted, the synthetic Ritalin (as opposed to the naturally-occurring, and therefore more easily metabolically-degraded cocaine) has the same onset of action but, predictably, has a longer lasting “high” and is thus preferred among addicted individuals.

The molecular structures of Ritalin and cocaine both have amphetamine base structures with ring-shaped side chains which, when examined side by side, are remarkably similar. The dopamine synaptic organelles in the brain (and heart, blood vessels, lungs and guts) are unlikely to sense any difference between the two drugs.



Myth # 8:

“Psychoactive drugs are totally safe for humans”

False. See Myth # 3 above. Actually all five classes of psychotropic drugs have, with long-term use, been found to be neurotoxic (ie, known to destroy or otherwise alter the physiology, chemistry, anatomy and viability of vital energy-producing mitochondria in every brain cell and nerve). They are therefore all capable of contributing to dementia when used long-term.



Related: The Shocking Truth About Antidepressant Drug Studies + Peter Breggin MD: How Do Psychiatric Drugs Really Work?

Any synthetic chemical that is capable of crossing the blood-brain barrier into the brain can alter and disable the brain. Synthetic chemical drugs are NOT capable of healing brain dysfunction, curing malnutrition or reversing brain damage.

Rather than curing anything, psychiatric drugs are only capable of masking symptoms while the abnormal emotional, neurological or malnutritional processes that mimic “mental illnesses” continue unabated.



Myth # 9:

“Mental ‘illnesses’ have no known cause”

False. The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual (DSM, published by the American Psychiatric Association, is pejoratively called “the psychiatric bible and billing book” for psychiatrists.

Despite its name, it actually has no statistics in it, and, of the 374 psychiatric diagnoses in the DSM-IV (there is now a 5th edition) there seem to be only two that emphasize known root causes.

Those two diagnoses are Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Acute Stress Disorder. The DSM-V has been roundly condemned as being just another book that laughingly pathologizes a few more normal human emotions and behaviors.

In my decade of work as an independent holistic mental health care practitioner, I was virtually always able to detect many of the multiple root causes and contributing factors that easily explained the signs, symptoms and behaviors that had resulted in a perplexing number of false diagnoses of “mental illness of unknown origin”.

Many of my patients had been made worse by being hastily diagnosed, hastily drugged, bullied, demeaned, malnourished, incarcerated, electroshocked (often against their wills and/or without fully informed consent).

My patients had been frequently rendered unemployable or even permanently disabled as a result – all because temporary, potentially reversible, and therefore emotional stressors had not been recognized at the onset.



Because of the reliance on drugs, many of my patients had been made incurable by not having been referred to compassionate practitioners who practiced high quality, non-drug-based, potentially curable psychotherapy.

The root causes of my patient’s understandable emotional distress were typically multiple, although sometimes a single trauma, such as a rape, violent assault or a psychological trauma in the military would cause an otherwise normally-developing individual to decompensate.

But the vast majority of my patients had experienced easily identifiable chronic sexual, physical, psychological, emotional and/or spiritual traumas as root causes – often accompanied by hopelessness, sleep deprivation, serious emotional or physical neglect and brain nutrient deficiencies as well.

The only way that I could obtain this critically important information was through the use of thorough, compassionate (and, unfortunately, time-consuming) investigation into the patient’s complete history, starting with prenatal, maternal, infant and childhood exposures to toxins (including vaccines) and continuing into the vitally important adolescent medical history (all periods when the patient’s brain was rapidly developing).

My clinical experience proved to me that if enough high quality time was spent with the patient and if enough hard work was exerted looking for root causes, the patient’s predicament could usually be clarified and the erroneous past labels (of “mental illnesses of unknown origin”) could be thrown out.

Such efforts were often tremendously therapeutic for my patients, who up to that time had been made to feel guilty, ashamed or hopeless by previous therapists.

In my experience, most mental ill health syndromes represented identifiable, albeit serious emotional de-compensation due to temporarily overwhelming crisis situations linked to traumatic, frightening, torturous, neglectful and soul-destroying life experiences.

My practice consisted mostly of patients who knew for certain that they were being sickened by months or years of swallowing one or more brain-altering, addictive prescription drugs that they couldn’t get off of by themselves.

I discovered that many of them could have been cured early on in their lives if they only had access – and could afford – compassionate psychoeducational psychotherapy, proper brain nutrition and help with addressing issues of deprivation, parental neglect/abuse, poverty and other destructive psychosocial situations.



Related: Officials Declare ‘Eating Healthy’ A “Mental Disorder”

I came to the sobering realization that many of my patients could have been cured years earlier if it hadn’t been for the disabling effects of psychiatric drug regimens, isolation, loneliness, punitive incarcerations, solitary confinement, discrimination, malnutrition, and/or electroshock.

The neurotoxic and brain-disabling drugs, vaccines and frankenfoods that most of my patients had been given early on had started them on the road to chronicity and disability.



Myth # 10:

“Psychotropic drugs have nothing to do with the huge increase in disabled and unemployable American psychiatric patients”

False. See Myths # 2 and # 3 above. In actuality recent studies have shown that the major cause of permanent disability in the “mentally ill” is the long-term, high dosage and/or use of multiple neurotoxic psych drugs – any combination of which, as noted above, has never been adequately tested for safety even in animal labs.



Related: Neuroscientist Shows What Fasting Does To Your Brain & Why Big Pharma Won’t Study It

Many commonly-prescribed drugs are fully capable of causing brain-damage long-term, especially the anti-psychotics (aka, “major tranquilizers”) like Thorazine, Haldol, Prolixin, Clozapine, Abilify, Clozapine, Fanapt, Geodon, Invega, Risperdal, Saphris, Seroquel and Zyprexa, all of which can cause brain shrinkage that is commonly seen on the MRI scans of anti-psychotic drug-treated, so-called schizophrenics – commonly pointed out as “proof” that schizophrenia is an anatomic brain disorder that causes the brain to shrink! (Incidentally, patients who had been on antipsychotic drugs – for whatever reason – have been known to experience withdrawal hallucinations and acute psychotic symptoms even if they had never experienced such symptoms previously.)

Of course, highly addictive “minor” tranquilizers like the benzodiazepines (Valium, Ativan, Klonopin, Librium, Tranxene, Xanax) can cause the same withdrawal syndromes. They are all dangerous and very difficult to withdraw from (withdrawal results in difficult-to-treat rebound insomnia, panic attacks, and seriously increased anxiety), and, when used long-term, they can all cause memory loss/dementia, the loss of IQ points and the high likelihood of being mis-diagnosed as Alzheimer’s disease (of unknown etiology).


Myth # 11:

So-called bipolar disorder can mysteriously ‘emerge’ in patients who have been taking stimulating antidepressants like the SSRIs”

False. In actuality, crazy-making behaviors like mania, agitation and aggression are commonly caused by the SSRIs. That list includes a syndrome called akathisia, a severe, sometimes suicide-inducing internal restlessness – like having restless legs syndrome over one’s entire body and brain.

Akathisia was once understood to only occur as a long-term adverse effect of antipsychotic drugs (See Myth # 10). So it was a shock to many psychiatrists (after Prozac came to market in 1987) to have to admit that SSRIs could also cause that deadly problem.



Related: Antidepressants Aren’t Needed Most Of The Time

It has long been my considered opinion that SSRIs should more accurately be called “agitation-inducing” drugs rather than “anti-depressant” drugs.

The important point to make is that SSRI-induced psychosis, mania, agitation, aggression and akathisia is NOT bipolar disorder nor is it schizophrenia!


Myth # 12:

“Antidepressant drugs can prevent suicides”

False. In actuality, there is no psychiatric drug that is FDA-approved for the treatment of suicidality because these drugs, especially the so-called antidepressants, actually INCREASE the incidence of suicidal thinking, suicide attempts and completed suicides.



Related: The Roots Of Mental Health - Maybe They’re Not In Our Heads + Rising Rates Of Suicide: Are Pills The Problem?

Drug companies have spent billions of dollars futilely trying to prove the effectiveness of various psychiatric drugs in suicide prevention.

Even the most corrupted drug company trials have failed! Indeed what has been discovered is that all the so-called “antidepressants” actually increase the incidence of suicidality.

The FDA has required black box warning labels about drug-induced suicidality on all SSRI marketing materials, but that was only accomplished after over-coming vigorous opposition from the drug-makers and marketers of the offending drugs, who feared that such truth-telling would hurt their profits (it hasn’t).

What can and does avert suicidality, of course, are not drugs, but rather interventions by caring, compassionate and thorough teams of care-givers that include family, faith communities and friends as well as psychologists, counselors, social workers, relatives (especially wise grandmas!), and, obviously, the limited involvement of drug prescribers.



Myth # 13:

America’s school shooters and other mass shooters are ‘untreated’ schizophrenics who should have been taking psych drugs”

False. In actuality, 90% or more of the infamous homicidal – and usually suicidal – school shooters have already been under the “care” of psychiatrists (or other psych drug prescribers) and therefore have typically been taking (or withdrawing from) one or more psychiatric drugs.

SSRIs (such as Prozac) and psychostimulants (such as Ritalin) have been the most common classes of drugs involved. Antipsychotics are too sedating, although an angry teen who is withdrawing from antipsychotics could easily become a school shooter if given access to lethal weapons. (See www.ssristudies.net).

The 10% of school shooters whose drug history is not known, have typically had their medical files sealed by the authorities – probably to protect authorities such as the drug companies and/or the medical professionals who supplied the drugs from suffering liability or embarrassment.

Important Comment: It should be noted that in most cases such 'False Flag' shooter events, that Mind-Controlled assets are used in order to carry out events pushing Cabal-driven agenda's such as gun control. In virtually EVERY case the 'perpetrators' are on multiple prescription drugs for mental health issues.

This is not a comfortable subject but it is one that you will need to confront sooner or later, as the truth will become common knowledge at some point. Interspersed with the rest of this section are details of the reality which hides behind the prescription drugs and their side effects -




Related: Monarch Mind Control & The MK-Ultra Program

The powerful drug industry and psychiatry lobby, with the willing help of the media that profits from being their handmaidens, repeatedly show us the photos of the shooters that look like zombies.

They have successfully gotten the viewing public to buy the notion that these adolescent, white male school shooters were mentally ill rather than under the influence of their crazy-making, brain-altering drugs or going through withdrawal.

Contrary to the claims of a recent 60 Minutes program segment about “untreated schizophrenics” being responsible for half of the mass shootings in America, the four mentioned in the segment were, in fact, almost certainly being already under the treatment with psych drugs – prior to the massacres – by psychiatrists who obviously are being protected from public identification and/or interrogation by the authorities as accomplices to the crimes or witnesses.



Related: CIA MKULTRA: They Intended To Use Drugs For “Everything”

Because of this secrecy, the public is being kept in the dark about exactly what crazy-making, homicidality-inducing psychotropic drugs could have been involved.

The names of the drugs and the multinational corporations that have falsely marketed them as safe drugs are also being actively protected from scrutiny, and thus the chance of prevention of future drug-related shootings or suicides is being squandered.

Such decisions by America’s ruling elites represent public health policy at its worst and is a disservice to past and future shooting victims and their loved ones.



Related: Confession Of A Human Programmer: Illuminati Mind Control

The four most notorious mass shooters that were highlighted in the aforementioned 60 Minutes segment included the Virginia Tech shooter, the Tucson shooter, the Aurora shooter and the Sandy Hook shooter whose wild-eyed (“drugged-up”) photos have been carefully chosen for their dramatic “zombie-look” effect, so that most frightened, paranoid Americans are convinced that it was a crazy “schizophrenic”, rather than a victim of psychoactive, brain-altering, crazy-making drugs that may have made him do it.

Parenthetically, it needs to be mentioned that many media outlets profit handsomely from the drug and medical industries.

Therefore those media outlets have an incentive to protect the names of the drugs, the names of the drug companies, the names of the prescribing MDs and the names of the clinics and hospitals that could, in a truly just and democratic world, otherwise be linked to the crimes.



Related: Are You A Mind-Controlled CIA Stooge? + The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories

Certainly if a methamphetamine-intoxicated person shot someone, the person who supplied the intoxicating drug would be considered an accomplice to the crime, just like the bartender who supplied the liquor to someone who later committed a violent crime would be held accountable.

A double standard obviously exists when it comes to powerful, respected and highly profitable corporations.

A thorough study of the scores of American school shooters, starting with the University of Texas tower shooter in 1966 and (temporarily) stopping at Sandy Hook, reveals that the overwhelming majority of them (if not all of them) were taking brain-altering, mesmerizing, impulse-destroying, “don’t give a damn” drugs that had been prescribed to them by well-meaning but too-busy psychiatrists, family physicians or physician assistants who somehow were unaware of or were misinformed about the homicidal and suicidal risks to their equally unsuspecting patients (and therefore they had failed to warn the patient and/or the patient’s loved ones about the potentially dire consequences).



Related: Censorship Shock: Amazon.com Bans Investigative Book ‘Nobody Died At Sandy Hook’ Because It Disagrees With Government Version Of What Happened

Most practitioners who wrote the prescriptions for the mass shooters or for a patient who later suicided while under the influence of the drug, will probably(and legitimately so) defend themselves against the charge of being an accomplice to mass murder or suicide by saying that they were ignorant about the dangers of these cavalierly prescribed psych drugs because they had been deceived by the cunning drug companies that had convinced them of the benign nature of the drugs.


Myth # 14:

“If your patient hears voices it means he’s a schizophrenic”

False. Auditory hallucinations are known to occur in up to 10% of normal people; and up to 75% of normal people have had the experience of someone that isn’t there calling their name. (www.hearing-voices.org/voices-visions).

Nighttime dreams, nightmares and flashbacks probably have similar origins to daytime visual, auditory and olfactory hallucinations, but even psychiatrists don’t think that they represent mental illnesses.

Indeed, hallucinations are listed in the pharmaceutical literature as a potential side effect or withdrawal symptom of many drugs, especially psychiatric drugs.

These syndromes are called substance-induced psychotic disorders which are, by definition, neither mental illnesses nor schizophrenia.



Rather, substance-induced or withdrawal-induced psychotic disorders are temporary and directly caused by the intoxicating effects of malnutrition or brain-altering drugs such as alcohol, medications, hallucinogenic drugs and other toxins.

Psychotic symptoms, including hallucinations and delusions, can be caused by substances such as alcohol, marijuana, hallucinogens, sedatives, hypnotics, and anxiolytics, inhalants, opioids, PCP, and the many of the amphetamine-like drugs (like Phen-Fen, [fenfluramine]), cocaine, methamphetamine, Ecstasy, and agitation-inducing, psycho-stimulating drugs like the SSRIs).

Psychotic symptoms can also result from sleep deprivation, sensory deprivation and the withdrawal from certain drugs like alcohol, sedatives, hypnotics, anxiolytics and especially the many dopamine-suppressing, dependency-inducing, sedating, and zombifying anti-psychotic drugs.



Examples of other medications that may induce hallucinations and delusions include anesthetics, analgesics, anticholinergic agents, anticonvulsants, antihistamines, antihypertensive and cardiovascular medications, some antimicrobial medications, anti-parkinsonian drugs, some chemotherapeutic agents, corticosteroids, some gastrointestinal medications, muscle relaxants, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory medications, and Antabuse.

The very sobering information revealed above should cause any thinking person, patient, thought-leader or politician to wonder:


“How many otherwise normal or potentially curable people over the last half century of psych drug propaganda have actually been mis-labeled as mentally ill (and then mis-treated) and sent down the convoluted path of therapeutic misadventures – heading toward oblivion?”

In my mental health care practice, I personally treated hundreds of patients who had been given a multitude of confusing and contradictory mental illness labels, many of which had been one of the new “diseases of the month” for which there was a new psych “drug of the month” that was being heavily marketed on TV.

Many of my patients had simply been victims of unpredictable drug-drug interactions (far too often drug-drug-drug-drug interactions) or simply adverse reactions to psych drugs which had been erroneously diagnosed as a new mental illness.

Extrapolating my 1,200 patient experience (in my little isolated section of the nation) to what surely must be happening in America boggles my mind.

There has been a massive epidemic going on right under our noses that has affected millions of suffering victims who could have been cured if not for the drugs.

The time to act on this knowledge is long overdue.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Occult Holidays And Sabbats: Why Holidays Are Satanic Rituals
April 25 2019 | From: Omnithought

As we have repeatedly stated, the Satanist believes that numbers contain inherent power.



Thus, they literally order their lives by occult numerology – such numerology also is a key component in astrology, another system of divining that Satanists observe very closely. The occult calendar is divided into four (4) segments of 13 weeks each.

Related: Why Sun Worship is Satan Worship

The number, “13” is considered divine by the occultist for a couple of reasons:
  1. The Bible assigns ‘13‘ the meaning of “rebellion against constituted authority”, plus the depravity that caused Satan to rebel against God.
  2. The occultist assigns ‘6‘ to represent the number of man, and the number ‘7‘ to represent the number of divine perfection. Thus, as a person climbs that “Jacob’s Ladder” toward self-perfection in the realm of the occult, the number ‘13‘ represents the state of divine perfection, self-achieved perfection, and Illumination (6+7 = 13).

Thus, the occult calendar is comprised of four periods of 13 weeks each. We list these periods for you, below.



Note all timings are based on Northern hemisphere seasons

Related: The Occult Meanings of Birthday: Why You Should Stop Celebrating Your Birthday

Then, after listing them, we shall come back to talk about each of them in detail.


1. Winter Solstice – 13 Weeks – Minor Sabbath

a. December 21 – Yule
b. December 21-22 – Winter Solstice/Yule.
One of the Illuminati’s Human Sacrifice Nights
c. February 1 and 2 – Candlemas and Imbolg, a.k.a.
Groundhog’s Day. One of the Illuminati’s Human Sacrifice Nights
d. February 14 – Valentine’s Day



2. Spring Equinox – 13 Weeks – Minor Sabbath But Does Require Human Sacrifice

a. March 21-22 – Goddess Ostara – Note: Easter is the first Sunday after the first new moon after Ostara. March 21 is one of the Illuminati’s Human Sacrifice Nights
b. April 1 – All Fool’s Day, precisely 13 weeks since New Year’s Day!
c. April 19 – May 1 – Blood Sacrifice To The Beast.
Fire sacrifice is required on April 19.
d. April 30 – May 1 – Beltaine Festival, also called Walpurgis Night. This is the highest day on the Druidic Witch’s Calendar.



May 1 is the Illuminati’s second most sacred holiday. Human sacrifice is required


3. Summer Solstice – 13 Weeks – When The Sun Reaches Its Northernmost Point In Its Journey Across The Sky

a. June 21 – 22 – Summer Solstice
b. June 21 –
Litha is one of the Illuminati’s Human Sacrifice Nights
c. July 4, America’s Independence Day, is 13 days after Day of Litha and 66 days from April 30
d. July 19 – 13 days before Lughnasa
e. July 31 – August 1 – Lughnasa, Great Sabbat Festival. August –
One of the Illuminati’s Human Sacrifice Nights


4. Autumnal Equinox – 13 Weeks – Minor Sabbath But Does Require Human Sacrifice

a. September 21 – Mabon – one of the Illuminati’s Human Sacrifice Nights
b. September 21 -22 – Autumnal Equinox
c. October 31 – Samhain, also known as Halloween, or All Hallows Eve. This date is the Illuminati’s highest day of human sacrifice

Isn’t it interesting how the “profane” – you and me – are led like a flock of sheep to observe the important festival days of the Mysteries’ Religion?

You may not understand that you are ordering your year after pagan holidays, but you are! The annual calendar for the entire Western world is ordered by these Satanic festival times and days.



Related: The Occult (Hidden) Messages in Leonardo Da Vinci’s “Last Supper”

Now that we have seen the entire occult calendar, let us go back to the significant holidays to see how the Western world has slipped into a worship of the same pagan holidays and are using many of the same pagan symbols that are so important to the pagan worshipper.

The human sacrifice required during many of these occult dates needs to contain the following elements, each one of which is exaggerated to the highest possible degree:

1. Trauma, stress, and mental anguish, sheer terror

2. The final act in the drama should be destruction by a fire; preferably a conflagration.

3. People must die as human sacrifices, especially children, since Lord Satan looks upon a younger human sacrifice as his most desirable


Specific Dates Within the Occult Calendar

1. Winter Solstice – 13 weeks

a. December 21- 22

Yule – When the sun begins its northward trek in the sky, and days began to grow longer again, pagans celebrated the Winter Solstice by burning the Yule log.

Since the sun had reversed itself and was now rising in the sky, pagans believed this was a sign that the human sacrifices carried out in Samhain (Halloween) had been accepted by the gods.

We continue to sing:


"Deck the halls with boughs of holly… troll the ancient Yuletide carol… See the blazing Yule before us. Fa la la la la la la la.”

- “Pagan Traditions of the Holidays”, David Ingraham, p. 71

The Roman Catholic Church later changed the day of celebration to December 25, calling it Christmas.

Consider the pagan roots of our popular symbols of Christmas:

(1) Christmas Tree – The sacred tree of the winter-god; Druids believed the spirit of their gods resided in the tree. Most ancient pagans knew the tree represented Nimrod reincarnated into Tammuz! Pagans also looked upon the tree as a phallic symbol.

(2) Star – Pentalpha, the five-pointed star. The pentalpha is a powerful symbol of Satan, second only to the hexagram. The star is the sacred symbol of Nimrod, and has nothing whatsoever to do with Christianity.

(3) Candles represent the sun-gods’ newly-born fire. Pagans the world over love and use candles in their rituals and ceremonies. Certain colors are also thought to represent specific powers. The extensive use of candles is usually a very good indication that the service is pagan, no matter what the outward trappings might be.

(4) Mistletoe is the sacred plant of the Druids, symbolizing pagan blessings of fertility; thus, kissing under the mistletoe is the first step in the reproductive cycle! Witches also use the white berries in potions.

(5) Wreaths are circular, and so they represent the female sexual organs. Wreaths are associated with fertility and the “circle of life”.

(6) Santa Claus – Former Satanists have told me that “Santa” is an anagram for “Satan. In the New Age, the god, “Sanat Kamura“, is most definitely an anagram for “Satan“. The mythical attributes and powers ascribed to Santa are eerily close to those possessed by Jesus Christ.

(7) Reindeer are horned animals representing the “horned-god” or the “stag-god” of pagan religion! Santa’s traditional number of reindeer in his team is eight (8); in Satanic gematria, eight is the number of “new beginnings”, or the cycle of reincarnation. The Illuminati views the number “eight” as a symbol of their New World Order.

(8) Elves are imp-like creatures who are Santa’s (Satan’s) little helpers. They are also demons.

(9) Green and Red are the traditional colors of the season, as they are the traditional pagan colors of winter. Green is Satan’s favorite color, so it is appropriate it should be one of the traditional colors for Christmas; red is the color of human blood, Satan’s highest form of sacrifice – for this reason, Communism adopted red as it main color!

(10) December 25 is known as the “nativity” of the sun. This date is the birthday of Tammuz, the son, the reincarnation of the sun god. Traditionally, December 21 is known as Yule. The Roman Catholic Church moved the celebration of Yule to December 25.

(11) December 25 is also known to the Romans as “Saturnalia“, a time of deliberate debauchery. Drinking through repeated toasting – known as ‘wassail’ – was a key to the debauchery of this celebration. Fornication was symbolized by the mistletoe, and the entire event was finished with a Great Feast, the Christmas Dinner.



Related:
The Occult Origins Of Christmas

(12) Even the name, “Christmas” is pagan! “Christi” meant “Christ“, while “Mas” meant Mass. Since all pagan Masses are commemorating “death”, the name, “Christmas” literally means the “death of Christ“. A deeper meaning lies in the mention of “Christ” without specifying Jesus. Thus, Antichrist is in view here; the pagans celebrate “Christmas” as a celebration of their coming Antichrist, who will deal a death blow to the Jesus Christ of Christianity.

Early American Christian Pilgrims refused to celebrate this day.

b. February 1 and 2

Candlemas and Imbolg, popularly called Groundhog’s Day.

The popular “Punxsutawney Phil” groundhog comes out of his burrow to divine the next few weeks of weather. If he sees his shadow, we will have 6 more weeks of bad weather until Spring finally arrives; if he does not see his shadow, the next 7 weeks before Spring will be good weather. Notice this pagan tradition features both the number ‘6’ and ‘7’, which when added, equals ’13’.

What most people do not realize is that the pagan view of Groundhog’s Day (Imbolg) represents the Earth Mother.

Consider these uncanny parallels between the Groundhog and the Earth Mother:

1. As the Earth goddess sleeps inside the earth during the winter season, so does the Groundhog

2. Both the Earth goddess and the Groundhog bridge the two time periods: Winter and Spring

3. Both the goddess and the Groundhog are “earth” creatures

4. Both the goddess and the Groundhog “awaken” in Springtime

5. Both the Earth goddess and the Groundhog complete the “cycle of reincarnation”

6. Annually, both the Earth goddess and the Groundhog represent the cycle of “rebirth” and “renewal”

The name, “Groundhog” was substituted for the Satanic name of the holiday, Imbolg, a night requiring human sacrifice.

c. February 14

Valentine’s Day – is a pagan festival that encourages love and physical lust.

It is celebrated precisely 13 days after Imbolg, thus imprinting upon it the number ’13’, Satan’s number of extreme rebellion. While most people view this day as the day to honor your wife or your lover, this celebration is steeped in paganism.

Consider the camouflaged occult gods in Valentine’s Day:

1. Cupid, the son of Venus, is really Tammuz, son of Semiramis

2. Venus, daughter of Jupiter, is really Semiramis herself. Jupiter is the head deity, a sun god – Nimrod, Semiramis’ husband, is considered a sun god in the Babylonian Mysteries.

Listen to a pagan author describe February, the month in which Valentine’s Day falls.


"The name of this month comes from the Roman goddess Februa and St. Febronia (from Febris, the fever of love). She is the patroness of the passion of love … Her orgiastic rites are celebrated on 14 February – still observed as St. Valentine’s Day – when, in Roman times, young men would draw billets naming their female partners…

This is a time of clear vision into other worlds, expressed by festivals of purification. On 1 February is the celebration of the cross-quarter day, or fire festival (Imbolc) a purificatory festival. It is followed on the 2nd by its Christian counterpart, Candlemas, the purification of the Virgin Mary.”

- “The Pagan Book of Days”, Nigel Pennick

Valentine’s Day is a day of “orgiastic rites” in which the pagans encouraged the flow of lustful passion.


2. Spring Equinox – 13 weeks

Minor Sabbath but does require human sacrifice.

a. March 21-22

Goddess Ostara (Ishtar, also spelled, “Eostre”), for whom “Easter” is named – March 21 is one of the Illuminati’s Human Sacrifice Nights.

Easter is a shifting date using the common practice of Astrology; it is celebrated on the first Sunday after the first new moon after Ostara.



Naughty chickens

This date also has nothing to do with the resurrection of our Lord Jesus Christ! Rather, this day in the pagan tradition celebrates the return of Semiramis into her reincarnated form of the Spring Goddess. The pagans even have an equivalent to our Good Friday!

It is “Easter Friday”, and has historically been timed to be the third full moon from the start of the year. Since the marrying of pagan Easter to Jesus’ resurrection, Good Friday is permanently fixed on the Friday prior to Easter.

Easter is steeped in the Babylonian Mysteries, the single most evil idolatrous system ever invented by Satan!

All throughout the prophetic Scriptures, we see God declaring His final judgment upon wicked Babylon! Yet, every year, Christian pastors intone “Easter” as though it were Christian. Many Independent Baptist preachers have begun referring to this day celebrating Jesus‘ resurrection as “Resurrection Sunday”, in order to separate the day from the pagan celebration.

The Babylonian goddess, Ishtar, is the one for whom Easter is named; [“Pagan Traditions of Holidays”, p. 9] in reality, she was Semiramis, wife of Nimrod, and the real founder of the Satanic Babylonian Mysteries.



After Nimrod died, Semiramis created the legend that he was really her Divine Son born to her in a Virgin Birth. She is considered to be the co-founder of all occult religions, along with Nimrod.

Easter – the day of Ishtar – is celebrated widely among various cultures and religions on earth.

1. Babylon – Ishtar (Easter) also called the Moon Goddess
2. Catholics – Virgin Mary (Queen of Heaven)
3. Chinese – Shingmoo
4. Druids – Virgo Paritura
5. Egypt – Isis
6. The Pagan Ephesians – Dianna
7. Etruscans – Nutria
8. Germans (Ancient) – Hertha
9. Greeks – Aphrodite/Ceres
10. India – Isi/Indrani
11. Ancient Jews – Ashtaroth (Queen of Heaven)
12. Krishna – Devaki
13. Rome – Venus/Fortuna
14. Scandinavians – Disa
15. Sumerians – Nana

- “America’s Occult Holidays“, Doc Marquis and Sam Pollard

The Babylonians celebrated the day as the return of Ishtar (Easter), the goddess of Spring.

This day celebrated the rebirth, or reincarnation, of Nature and the goddess of Nature. According to Babylonian legend, a huge egg fell from heaven, landing in the Euphrates River.

The goddess, Ishtar (Easter) broke out of this egg. Later, the feature of an egg nesting was introduced, a nest where the egg could incubate until hatched. A “wicker” or reed basket was conceived in which to place the Ishtar egg.

The Easter Egg Hunt was conceived because, if anyone found her egg while she was being “reborn”, she would bestow a blessing upon that lucky person! Because this was a joyous Spring festival, eggs were colored with bright Spring colors. [Ibid.]


The Easter Bunny


"The Goddess’ totem, the Moon-hare, would lay eggs for good children to eat… Eostre’s hare was the shape that Celts imagined on the surface of the full moon…”

- “Pagan Traditions of Holidays”, p. 10.

Do not bother to tell me that bunnies do not lay eggs, for I know that; we are dealing with a legend here, and an occult legend at that. These types of legends traditionally play loose and fast with facts.

Thus, “Easter” – Eostre, or Ishtar – was a goddess of fertility. Since the bunny is a creature that procreates quickly, it symbolized the sexual act; the egg symbolized “birth” and “renewal”. Together, the Easter Bunny and Easter Egg symbolizes the sex act and its offspring, Semiramis and Tammuz.

Thus, it is a very serious spiritual matter, indeed, when christian churches incorporate “Resurrection Eggs” as part of their Easter celebration.

At the very least, these churches are confusing the minds of their precious young children, by blurring the dividing line between pagan symbols and their meanings and Christian meanings of Resurrection Day.



Young children who participated in “Resurrection Eggs” in church will be conditioned later in their life to accept the fullness of the pagan tradition revolving around the same symbols.

At worst, a church participating in the pagan Easter tradition by promoting “Resurrection Eggs” and perhaps an Easter Egg Hunt, is guilty of combining Christianity with paganism, the very lethal cocktail the Lord Jesus will always reject!

Remember our key verse:


"Wherefore come out from among them, and be ye separate, saith the Lord, and touch not the unclean thing.”

If your church has “Resurrection Eggs”, that is a church you should consider leaving immediately; if the Senior Pastor is Liberal enough to use “Resurrection Eggs” in his Resurrection Day celebrations, he is probably Liberal in Doctrine and Theology, but may not be far enough along for you to see it yet.


Other Pagan Ingredients

Easter Offerings are derived from the tradition where the priests and priestesses would bring offerings to the pagan temples for Easter.

They brought freshly-cut Spring flowers and candies to place on the altar of the idol they worshipped. They would also bake Hot Cross Buns, decorating them with crosses symbolizing the cross of Wotan, or some other pagan god; these crosses were not originally the cross of Jesus Christ.

This is another instance where Satan counterfeited a pagan tradition that could later be passed off as “Christian” in a church seriously compromised by Syncretization.

In fact, the first instance of Hot Cross Buns can be traced back to about 1,500 BC, to Cecrops, the Founder of Athens [Marquis, p. 18] Later pagans used not just the shape of a Pentalpha star, but also the Hot Cross Bun.

Another popular Easter offering were freshly made or purchased clothes! The priests would wear their best clothes, while the Vestal Virgins would wear newly-made white dresses.

They would also wear headgear, like bonnets, while many would adorn themselves in garlands of Spring flowers. They would carry wicker baskets filled with foods and candies to offer to the pagan gods and goddesses.

Easter Sunrise Services were originated by the priest serving the Babylonian Ishtar to symbolically hasten the reincarnation of Ishtar/Easter. Once again, we see how Satan knew that Jesus’ rising from the grave would be discovered in the early sunrise hours, and that the Christian Church would want to hold Sunrise Services to celebrate.

Satan and his demons know and believe God’s Word and its prophecies literally, and they are allowed a certain amount of foreknowledge. Just as Satan counterfeited the Divine birth of a male child to a Virgin Mother fully 1,000 years before Jesus was actually born, so he counterfeited this Sunrise Service.

Lent is purely pagan, and yet has been accepted by the Roman Catholic Church and apostate christian churches as “christian”.

If the church you are attending celebrates Lent, you need to inform the Senior Pastor of the pagan roots of this tradition; if he will not listen you should leave that church, for if they will accept Lent as “Christian”, you can bet they are very Liberal in critical Biblical areas as well.

Lent is a commemoration of Tammuz’ death; the legend of his death says that he was killed by a wild boar when he was 40 years old. Therefore, Lent celebrates 1 day for each year of Tammuz’ life. [Marquis, “America’s Occult Holidays”] Participants are to express their sorrow over Tammuz’ untimely death by weeping, fasting, and self-chastisement.

Lent was commemorated for exactly 40 days prior to the celebration of Ishtar/Esotre and other goddesses by the following cultures: Babylonians, Roman Catholics, Koordistan, Mexicans, Ancient Israel, and today, Liberal, apostate Protestant churches.

We can see God’s anger over this commemoration of Lent in Ezekiel 8:14-18; God’s judgment for this commemoration is described in Ezekiel 9, a chapter we suggest you read carefully, for God has stated that He will similarly punish any nation who does not “hear and obey” His commands (Jeremiah 12:17).

b. April 1

– All Fool’s Day, precisely 13 weeks since New Year’s Day!

c. April 19 – May 1

Blood Sacrifice To The Beast, a most critical 13-day period. Fire sacrifice is required on April 19.

April 19 is the first day of the 13-day Satanic ritual day relating to fire – the fire god, Baal, or Molech/Nimrod (the Sun God), also known as the Roman god, Saturn (Satan/Devil). This day is a major human sacrifice day, demanding fire sacrifice with an emphasis on children. This day is one of the most important human sacrifice days, and as such, has had some very important historic events occur on this day.

Remember, the Illuminati considers war to be a most propitious way to sacrifice, for it kills both children and adults.

Some of the very important historic dates that were staged according to this blood sacrifice day are:

(1). April 19, 1775 – Battle of Lexington & Concord, which made the Masonic-led Revolutionary War inevitable

(2). April 19, 1943 – After trapping the last Jewish Resistance Fighters in a storm drain in Warsaw, and holding them for several days, Nazi Storm Troopers began to pour fire into each end of the storm drain, using flame-throwers. They continued pouring the fire into the drain until all fighters were dead. Blood sacrifice brought about by a fiery conflagration.

(3) April 19, 1993 – 50 years later, to the day, government troops, tanks, and other military equipment stormed the compound of David Koresh and his followers at Waco, Texas. Certainly, this operation fulfilled the basic requirements for a human sacrifice: trauma, fire, and young sacrificial victims.

(4) April 19, 1995 – Oklahoma City bombing – Once again, many young children were killed this day

April 19 of any year in the 20th Century is a day of fearful contemplation, for it seems that, as we head into the final stretch of time, Satan is becoming more and more bold, and is using April 19 more often.

d. April 30 – May 1

– Beltaine Festival, also called “Walpurgis Night“.

This is the highest day on the Druidic Witch’s Calendar, while May 1 is the Illuminati’s second most sacred holiday.

Human sacrifice is required.

Since the celebration officially began the night before Beltaine, the tradition has developed among occultists to celebrate Beltaine as a 2-day ceremony. This tradition was strong enough that Adolf Hitler decided to kill himself [as the cover story goes] on April 30 at 3:30pm, thus creating a “333” and placing his suicide sacrifice within the Beltaine time frame.

Great bonfires are lit on the Eve of Beltaine, April 30, in order to welcome the Earth Goddess. Participants hope to gain favor with this goddess so she will bless their families with procreative fertility.

We find it interesting that the Royal House of Windsor lights a Beltaine “Balefire” every year [“America’s Occult Holidays”, Doc Marquis, p. 30]

The “Maypole” originated from the celebration of Beltaine. Since fertility is being asked of the Earth Goddess, the Maypole is the phallic symbol and the circular dance around the pole forms the circle that is symbolic of the female sex organ.

Four six-foot alternating red and white ribbons were connected to the pole; the men would dance counterclockwise, while the ladies danced clockwise. The union of the intertwining red and white ribbons symbolized the act of copulation – remember, this is a “fertility” celebration day!

To demonstrate their occult, Illuminist ties, Communists have always celebrated “May Day”. If you have not been taught how the Illuminati created Communism, and for which purpose, you need to hear our Seminar 2, “America Determines The Flow of History”.


3. Summer Solstice – 13 Weeks

When the sun reaches its northernmost point in its journey across the sky.

a. June 21 – 22 – Summer Solstice
b. June 21 – Litha is one of the Illuminati’s Human Sacrifice Nights
c. July 4, America’s Independence Day, is 13 days after Day of Litha and 66 days from April 30
d. July 19 – 13 days before Lughnasa
e. July 31 – August 1 – Lughnasa, Great Sabbat Festival. August – One of the Illuminati’s Human Sacrifice Nights



4. Autumnal Equinox – 13 Weeks

Minor Sabbath but does require human sacrifice.

a. September 21

Mabon – one of the Illuminati’s Human Sacrifice Nights.

b. September 21 -22 – Autumnal Equinox

From this date through Halloween, occultists believe the veil separating the earthly dimension from the demonic realm gets progressively thinner, with the thinnest night being October 31; this thinning of the separating veil makes it easier for the demonic realm to enter the earthly dimension.

Thus, on Halloween, evil spirits, ghosts, witches, hobgoblins, black cats, fairies, and demons of all sorts were believed to be running amok across the land. They had to be back in their spiritual dimension before midnight, Halloween, for the separating veil would then get thicker.

Once again, I reiterate, this is occult belief, not mine! October is a most propitious month to the Illuminati.

c. October 31 – Samhain

Also known as Halloween, or All Hallows Eve as designated by the Catholic Church. This date is the Illuminati’s highest day of human sacrifice.

Halloween has been changed over the past 30 years in two important ways. First, children have been encouraged to participate by donning such inoffensive costumes as Barbie, Wonder Woman, Batman and Superman. Secondly, adult costuming and parties have reached a tremendous apex and has become a most macabre day of celebration.

Historically, Halloween is the deadliest holiday ever celebrated in human history. This Satanic night is dedicated to the Celtic Lord of the Dead, also symbolized by the Horned-god and the Stag-god.

The Druids celebrated Samhain as a 3-day fire festival, building huge bonfires, thought to ward off demons that roamed around; additionally, the fires provided the means by which the required human sacrifice would be presented to the sun god. In enormous wicker baskets, the priests caged both human and animal sacrifices, which they then lowered into the flames.

The priests would carefully watch the manner in which the victim died in order to predict whether the future held good or evil. [“Pagan Traditions of the Holidays”, p. 71]


Origin of Popular Halloween Traditions

Sweets and Trick or Treat

This pagan practice is over 2,000 years old. For the sake of their safety and well-being, people put outside their home sweets, the best mutton legs, vegetables, eggs, and poultry, honey and even wine, so the wandering evil spirits would consume them on their way back to the netherworld.



Related: 18 Reasons Why I Don’t Celebrate Halloween

Failure to “treat” these evil spirits might result in a curse being put on the home! The people literally believed that, when these spirits came to your door, they would trick you if you did not treat them.


"The American version of Halloween came from Ireland … The potato famine in 1840 brought thousands of immigrants from the Emerald Isle. With them came goblins, jack-0-lanterns, bonfires, apples, nuts, and pranks…

The Irish are also responsible for bringing trick or treating to great popularity in America. In Ireland on October 31, peasants went from house to house to receive offerings to their Druid god, Muck Olla. This procession stopped at each house to tell the farmer his prosperity was due to the benevolence of Muck Olla … or else misfortune might befall the farmer and his crops.

Few farmers risked any such displeasure of the pagan deity, so the procession returned home with eggs, butter, potatoes, and in some cases, coins … To the Irish farmers this was no joke; they greatly feared the Celtic god might destroy their homes and barns … Trick or treat is part of this pagan heritage.”

- “Pagan Traditions of the Holidays”. p. 78-79



Horrifying Costumes

People would also take burning wisps from the bonfire and wave them around to frighten the many evil spirits roaming the earth; in case the burning wisp alone would not work, revelers clothed themselves in the most hideous and terrifying costumes.

These people believed that, if you dressed in a terrifying costume and went trooping around with the spirits all night, they would think you were one of them and would leave you alone.
[“Halloween and Satanism”, Phil Philips, p. 26-27]



Huge Bonfires

Satan’s obsession with fire has produced human obsession with building huge bonfires. As we stated earlier, these bonfires were practical, in that they provided the means by which the priests sacrificed the human and animal sacrifices so crucial to Halloween.

When the last fires died out, people would race each other down the hills shouting;


"The Devil gets the last one down”.

- Philips, p. 27-28


Divinations

Samhain (Halloween) was also the time to engage the Devil’s assistance in divining the future. Questions concerning marriage, luck, health, and the time of one’s death were most popular subjects of divination.

In Scotland, young people assembled for games and pulled shoots out of the ground to ascertain which of them would marry during the coming year, and in what order the marriages should occur.


Snap Apple Night

Apples have long been a token of love and fertility. At Halloween parties, people bobbed for apples in tubs of water. If a boy came up with an apple between his teeth, he was assured of the love of his girl. The Snap Apple game was one in which the boys delighted. Each boy, in his turn, would spring up to attempt to bite an apple that was being twirled on the end of a stick; the first boy to succeed would be the first to marry.

Apple seeds were also used to tell fortunes. Peeling an apple in one long piece was supposed to tell a young girl about her future. The girl would swing the apple peal three times around her head, then throw it over her left shoulder.

If the peeling fell unbroken, the girl would examine the shape into which it fell to see if she could ascertain the initials of her future husband!


Witch’s Familiar Spirits

Owls, bats, cats and toads are an essential part of Halloween, and for a very good reason: they are known as “the witch’s familiars”.

A divining familiar was the species of animal whose shape Satan would assume to aid the witch in divining the future. A witch would closely watch the animal’s movements – whether slow or fast – and she would see the direction in which the animal moved and the kinds of sounds it made, in order to foretell the length of life and/or an impending illness.



It's okay bro, you're not possesed

Other “familiar spirit” shapes include hens, geese, small dogs, rats, butterflies, wasps crickets, and snails. Witches considered these creatures to be demon-possessed and controlled.

If you look closely at most Halloween decorations, you will see these animals, but now you know they represent demon possessed creatures! [“Pagan Traditions of Holidays”, p. 75-76]


Jack-O-Lantern and Trick-or-Treat

Various names for Jack-O-Lantern were ‘Lantern Men’, ‘Hob-O-Langer’, and “Will-O-The-Wisp”.


"The ‘Lantern Men’ got their name from pale eerie lights that appeared over bogs and marshes in England. These ghostly lights, which bobbed along like a lantern in someone’s hand, were called ‘Corpse Candles’. Candles were said to be signals from the souls of men lost at sea."


- “Halloween and Satanism”, Philips, p. 33-34




"Celts often hollowed out a turnip and carved a grotesque face on it to fool demons. They carried such lanterns to light their way in the dark and to ward off evil spirits… While the turnip continues to be popular in Europe today, the pumpkin has replaced it in America. ‘Jack’ is a nickname for ‘John’, which is a common slang word meaning ‘man’. Jack-O-Lanterns literally means ‘man with a lantern’."

- Pagan Traditions of the Holidays”, p. 79-80


Druid Trick-or-Treat

The Druids originated the practice of hollowing out the Jack-O-Lanterns and filling them with human fat.

Whenever a raiding party came to a home to demand of the husband that someone inside be surrendered as a human sacrifice, they would light a Jack-O-Lantern filled with human fat; if the husband relented and provided one of his loved ones as a sacrifice, the Druid party would leave Jack-O-Lantern on the porch.

This lantern would be tell the other raiding parties and the demonic host that this party had surrendered a human for sacrifice and that the remaining people inside were to be left alone. Guaranteeing that no one else in the house would be killed that night was the “Treat”.

If the husband refused to surrender one of his loved ones, a “Trick” would be placed upon the house. The members of the raiding party would draw a large hexagram using human blood on the front door; they got the blood for the hexagram from a dead body they dragged around with them using a cabletow.

The demonic host would be attracted to this hexagram and would invade the house, causing one or more of the inhabitants to either go insane or die from fright. [“America’s Occult Holidays”, p. 20]

This is the true origin of “Trick-or-Treat” and the Jack-O-Lantern. Do you really want to take your kids “Trick-or-Treating”?


Forbidden Practices Specially Associated With Halloween

God lists Satanic practices that He absolutely forbids, on the pain of death!

Every one of them is uniquely associated with Halloween!

1. Enchantment – Act of influencing by charms and incantation using the practice of magical arts.

2. Witchcraft – Dealing with demonic spirits, using their prescribed methods, commonly called rituals and the “magick arts”. The Bible forbids it, as in Galatians 5:19-20. Today, thanks to “Harry Potter and The Lord of the Rings, witchcraft is skyrocketing in popularity. TV shows that depict witches are “Bewitched” and “Buffy The Vampire Slayer”, to just mention a couple. Go to a video store sometime and walk down the “Horror” aisle, where you will see the popularity of Witchcraft in America today.

3. Sorcery – Use of power gained from the prescribed rituals demanded by the demonic host. Once the witch or wizard performs the particular ritual correctly, the demonic host is required to provide the power to accomplish that action desired by the witch.

4. Divination – Fortune telling and seeing into the future. God wants us to trust in Him and His power, and not worry about tomorrow. Satan, on the other hand, loves to get people consumed by the idea that they can know what lies ahead of them.

5. Wizardry – The art or practices of a wizard, sorcery. A wizard or witch is one skilled in the magick arts, a sorcerer.

6. Necromancy – Communication with the dead. Specifically, conjuring up the spirits of the dead for purposes of magically revealing the future or influencing the course of events.

7. Charm – The practice of putting a spell on someone in order to change or control their mind and/or behavior. Wizards love to get their enemies “one-on-one” because they can “charm” them through the use of ritual done before the meeting, and by the demonic host residing within him.

Adolf Hitler followed this practice closely as he dealt with the leaders of Europe, Britain, and Russia. British Prime Minister Chamberlain was totally charmed by Hitler as he sought to appease the German dictator in Munich in 1938; Chamberlain was so totally “charmed” by Hitler, he enthusiastically proclaimed after returning from Munich that he had achieved “peace in our time”.

When dealing with a powerful member of the Illuminati, do not attempt to meet with him, nor place any confidence in the testimony of people who have met with him. A “charm” ritual is easily performed and results in the leader exuding confidence, character, and sincerity they most assuredly do not possess.

8. Stargazing or Astrology – Divination of the supposed influence of the stars and other heavenly bodies upon human lives and the affairs of nations. Occultists literally order their lives according to Astrology and numerics.

9. Soothsaying – foretelling events and prophesying through a spirit other than the Holy Spirit.

10. Prognostication – To foretell from signs and symptoms, also prophesying without the Holy Spirit.

11. Magic – Tapping into the power of the demonic realm through the use of prescribed ritual so that the action carried out is accomplished through demonic power.

All these activities are uniquely associated with the activities and traditions of Halloween!

Christians have no business participating in Halloween. To do so is to act against a great number of Scriptures in which God uses the strongest possible language to forbid it. In fact, in most instances, God decreed that people practicing these activities be put to death!

Yet, we see many churches having Halloween parties in which many of these pagan practices are followed! The Apostle Paul gave us strong warning that should stop us dead in our tracks. Listen:


"Let no one delude and deceive you with empty excuses and groundless arguments for these sins, for through these things the wrath of God comes upon the sons of rebellion and disobedience.”

- Ephesians 5:6

Stop listening to people giving you “empty excuses and groundless arguments for these sins”, for if you go ahead and participate in this most evil holiday, God shall surely not look away.

One final note on Halloween: if you have been paying attention, you will know that these practices form the heart and soul of the Harry Potter novels and movies.



Harry Potter is a wizard, and he comes from a family of witches and wizards [Generational Witchcraft].

His entire existence within these novels revolves around the Hogwarts School of Wizardry and Witchcraft, where Harry and his friends learn all of these 11 forbidden practices.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

New Zealand False Flag By Zionist Israel With Police & Freemason Complicity
From: PhiBetaIota / Various

All done, according to the “manifesto” in the name of “Donald Trump” and, if one were to read between the lines, the now pseudo-legally designated “Jewish Only” State of Israel.

April 24 2019 | From: NaturalNews / Various



Odd modifications, no flash suppressor, strange stock, none of which is required by New Zealand law. We have never seen a weapon like this piece of junk.The New Zealand mass killer trained in Israel in 2017 and 2018 then visited Turkey and the Balkans, this is confirmed.

Related: Suspect for Christchurch mosque shootings told officers he was one of nine

When automatic fire broke out barely a mile from a police station, the Freemason ridden police waited, waited, waited and finally, 17 minutes later, showed up. 

We saw this in Columbine and in nearly every shooting since, with few exceptions

On November 7, 2018 in Thousand Oaks, California, a police officer, gun drawn, ran into a bar to stop a mass killing (attributed to a 28 year old Marine veteran named Ian Long).  The officer was murdered, at the scene, by his own men. 

He didn’t know the rules.

Our story begins in 1948 where an impoverished Jewish family leaves Palestine for Britain and then Australia, where in 1970 they gain citizenship.  Five years later, a son is born, who in the succeeding 42 years only ages 28. 





The NZ Mosque Attack Doesn't Add Up - Here's Why





Related: There's something about Jacinda? Professor Ed Dutton on The Vinny Eastwood Show





Related: The Luciferian Vatican Empire Is Imploding & As Many As 8 Million Children Are Kidnapped And Trafficked
Into Sex Slavery Every Year By Global Pedophile Networks – Of Which Many Politicians Are Members






With the family now living in Australia, dad dies of mesothelioma (asbestos) and “Brenton” suddenly inherits enough money to travel the world though, as holocaust survivors, no living relatives exist. 

Whatever world travels are on the list, and we are getting feedback every hour, a considerable sojourn in Israel is part of it, followed by Turkey and then a tour of neo-Nazi / Freemason training camps, the same facilities that prepared Anders Brevik.

We remember Brevik and his tiny Opel sedan and the fuel oil/fertilizer bomb whose output equaled 50 tons of explosive in a vehicle that is rated by Hertz and “two passenger and one suitcase.”



Related: New Zealand Police Confiscate Airsoft Pellet Guns, Crossbow from Man Because He Supports Trump

The lies are piling up and the planning and execution of the mass shooting in Christchurch goes from Australia and New Zealand into Israel and the Balkans. 

Everything about Brendon Tarrant is a lie, and the lies are piling up. 


Police complicity is confirmed, over and over, not just in New Zealand and Australia, but the fake Brendon Tarrant has traveled the world as a terrorist with the aid of some very powerful people, just like Anders Brevik, the “Norwegian” mass killer.



Related:
Max Igan Analysis Of New Zealand False Flag Event In Christchurch & New Zealand False Flag – What They Don’t Want You To See

Structural damage to reinforced concrete over 700 meters away from less than 200 pounds of TNT?

We are already faced with conflicting stories, disappearing videos but the lies have only begun.  Intelligence sources, angry at another patsy sent out to butcher the innocent, are flowing their own data into VT.

The information below came in today in Hebrew and Arabic (similar) and awaits confirmation. The planning group included 4 women who are currently in New Zealand as part of a tour group.  No, we can’t say where they come from because we dont’ know and aren’t going to make something up.








Related: Christchurch - How They Did It



There are multiple confirmation of advance notification and involvement by members of the New Zealand police authority who belong to Freemasonry. 

This is identical to the Norway shooting under Anders Brevik, which was also a Freemason “sponsored” event. 

As you remember, Brevik was allowe to buy fertilizer, own an assault rifle, attend training with neo-Nazi and pro-Zionist (now one in the same) organizations in Europe, which our “caught” shooter, Brenton Tarrant has done also.

Tarrant was assured a “free ride” after the killings, as with Brevik, who lives in a private apartment and gets regular outings.  New Zealond had abolished the death penalty in 2007, Australia in 2005.

28 year old “Brenton Tarrant’ is 42 years old. (confirmed). Here is the bio of the fake “Brenton Tarrant” from the UK Telegraph


“The young Brenton Tarrant had just celebrated his birthday.

He would go on to enjoy a normal upbringing in the rural town of Grafton, New South Wales, alongside his parents and sister.

Little, if anything, pointed towards the horror that he would go on to unleash.

Indeed, he describes himself as an “ordinary, white man”, born into a working class, low income family of Scottish, Irish and English decent."



Related: Anonymous: Will The Internet Get Real? A Manifesto On False Flags, Big Lies, And The Loss Of Integrity By
All Law Enforcement Agencies And The Media


"
By all accounts, his life was unremarkable, leaving school to become a fitness instructor at a local gym. He had “no interest” in education or anything that university had to offer.

But in 2010, his father Rodney, an athlete, died of an asbestos-related cancer and shortly afterwards, having acquired some inheritance, Tarrant left the family home to travel the world.

During the years that he was away, his mother, an English teacher, wrote online about how much she missed her “incredible son” although she said she “understood his wanderlust”.

She wrote fondly of her “Brento” and appeared blissfully unaware of how his world had turned.

Tarrant’s travels took him through much of Europe, North Korea, India and Japan.

Last year, he described Pakistan as “an incredible place filled with the most earnest, kind hearted and hospitable people in the world”.

“The beauty of hunza and nagar valley in autumn cannot be beat,” he wrote online, according to the Sydney Morning Herald.


The 28-year-old, fake, 42-year-old boy of two British parents of Jewish origin who fled his family from the occupied territories after the 1948 war to Britain and then to New Zealand and stayed for 11 years and then settled for residency in Australia and obtained Australian citizenship in 1970.

Brenton went to the occupied territories in 2017 and 2018 with visits lasting six months.

He is a member of the Masonic Forum in Canberra, capital of Australia, listed as something very much other than a social organization.

Before the attack, 12 bombs were planted in the same area surrounding the mosque and connected to the explosion via Mobil, which was dismantled by the authorities after all the houses were taken out of the population.






Related:
Christchurch Mosque Shooting, The Bigger Picture, Vinny Eastwood & Ben Vidgen

An automatic weapon will release the entire contents of the safe in one push without pressing the trigger for each shot of Israeli weapons. The bullets and shots were made in Israel.

The shooting took 17 minutes and 4 seconds long enough for the police to quickly find that the police station was only 2 kilometers away from the mosque, which marks question marks about the New Zealand authorities. New Zealand is a country that fights Islam and most of its officials are Masonic.

From the rite of offering offerings that the event is filmed to offer a sacrifice to the devil and this ritual of Freemasonry such as photographing the Razila at the foot of the pyramid and the killing of children and the Ethiopian plane etc etc.




Robert Steele

For those who do not know me, I am a former US spy and I ran a false flag operation for CIA in the 1980’s. I spoke with Gordon Duff about this and with his permission have posted a full replay of his original article.

I am not going to spend any time on this, it is very clearly a mind-controlled false flag operation with complete local complicity.

I hesitate to speculate on the insanity of all of this, other than to note that I fully anticipate Syria making good on its declared plans to retake the Golan Heights illegally occupied by Israel (as Palestine is illegally occupied by Israel). 

The US Government is in enemy hands - from Pompeo and Bolton to King Kushner, our President’s ability to control the forces that want all out war between the Zionists and the Muslims - the long planned WWIII - is questionable.



Related: Christchurch Terror Attack: Mass Censorship, Mystery Shooters, And The Globetrotting Lone Gunman

Our President has the right instincts. He knows in his heart that he need to back out of the Middle East now, conclude the Koreas deal, and later return to insist on the denuclearization of Israel as well as Saudi Arabia  and iran.

In the meantime, my bottom line is simple: as long as Jared Kushner and John Bolton are officially employed in t he White House, the US Government is in enemy hands.

It’s time for a new Secretary of State (Jon Huntsman has my vote) and a proper Secretary of Defense with combat experience who is not a rabid Zionist or dual citizen or contractor.

The Zionists did 9/11 (and before that the USS Liberty and in between the assassination of JFK Jr. to clear the way for Hillary Clinton).

This is a crucible moment for our President, who is alone

The US secret intelligence community is not only worthless, it is unlikely to have the integrity to tell the President what I and Gordon and perhaps Mike Flynn would tell him if we could: this was a Zionist state-sponsored false flag that should be called out for what it is, and the Embassy of Israel in the USA closed down for this atrocity. 

“Enough already!”


Related Articles:

List of nearly 2000 terrorists used by NZ doesn't include white supremacists - 'The ball's been dropped'

The killing machines and the law

Guess what? Hate speech can be punished using existing laws

Where Elites Travel, Death & Destruction Follow! irish Terror, France Fire, NZ Mosque


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

It’s Time To Tell The Truth About The Global War On Christianity (And The Rise Of Satanism)
April 23 2019 | From: NaturalNews / Various

In case you haven’t heard, Christian churches are being bombed all over the world today by radical Islamic terrorists.




In Sri Lanka alone, there are 207 Christians reported dead so far and 450+ injured in just one day.

Related: Surge in Muslim migration sees spike in attacks on Christians in France

This is just days after the burning down of Notre Dame in France, a fire that the media has gone to desperate lengths to report was not set on purpose by Islamic terrorists. (They are now blaming a computer glitch, if you can believe that.)

Across the Middle East, in places like Syria, Christians are being persecuted by the hundreds of thousands.

They are killed, tortured and run out of their own homes and countries. Even in places like the Philippines, Islamic terrorists have seized entire islands and targeted Christians for slaughter. As stated by The Gatestone Institute International Policy Council:


"The new terrorism in the Philippines is not merely inspired by political or territorial grievances, real or imagined, but rather is imbued with intrinsic hate for the “other” - for the “infidel.”

In May 2017, in the city of Marawi, a civilian bus was stopped by jihadis; when 9 passengers were discovered to be Christian - apparently because they were not able to quote the Koran - they were tied together and shot dead, execution style.

The jihadis who took over Marawi during the uprising forced women into sex-slavery and ordered Christian men embrace Islam or be used as human shields against the Philippine Army.”

In the United States, Christians are being systematically de-platformed off all social media platforms, including Twitter, Facebook and YouTube, all of which are now dominated by Satanists who despise Christianity.



Related: The Opiate Of The Masses: When Religion Becomes An Addiction

At the same time, every single Democrat running for president in 2020 has a record of attacking Christianity and either directly or indirectly supporting the silencing of Christians and Christian principles.

Christianity is under attack like never before, all across our world. Yet the left-wing media pretends it isn’t happening.

Instead, they claim it is gays, minorities or Muslims who are under attack, and that same media now essentially equates belief in God with “white supremacist” beliefs.


There is a Global War on Christianity, and Those Who are Waging it are Quite Literally the Minions of Satan

It’s time to call out the satanists wherever they are found across society: Running universities, media organizations and deep state bureaucracies.

Satanism is endemic in Hollywood and the music industry, and Netflix has even been overtaken by Satanism as is now abundantly clear with its hiring of Satanists as “consultants” for its popular “Sabrina” show that features a “teenage witch” who worships the devil to gain power in modern society.



Related: The New York Times Makes Another Attempt To Normalize Pedophilia & Hollywood Is A Satanic Cesspool

As LifeSiteNews.com reports:


"
In [the Netflix show], the Sabrina character is called to sign her name in the Book of the Beast. There are demons. Evil spells. Orgies.

The show is so satanic in its feel that the Satanic Temple itself is talking about taking legal action against the program for allegedly appropriating the copyrighted monument design of its goat deity Baphomet.

Family Research Council senior fellow Peter Sprigg agrees. “The dark, occult-ish elements in ‘Chilling Adventures of Sabrina’ provide reason enough for parents to keep their children, including teens, far away from this show,” Sprigg told Fox News.

“The show has gone over the top in depicting an actual orgy on screen, and if they think having the teen participants keep their underwear on makes it all right, the writers and producers need to think again.

This content is not appropriate for anyone, but especially not for the teen audience it targets.

Beyond just Netflix, all the big tech giants are run by Satanists, too. Wikipedia, for example, relentlessly attacks Christianity (and natural medicine, by the way) while allowing pro-Satanism content to dominate its pages.

It was founded by Jimmy Wales, a former “porn king” who uses the power of Wikipedia to bury his own past while allowing the platform to function as a smear engine for pastors, healers and journalists who promote GOOD instead of evil.



Related: Is Wikipedia An Establishment Psyop?

Jack Dorsey, CEO of Twitter, is steeped in evil, demonstrating fascist tendencies in every decision he makes regarding the de-platforming of targeted channels.

Those banned from Twitter include people who quote Mother Theresa or Bible scripture. Jack Dorsey personally oversees many of these bans, carrying out literal orders from Satan to silence those who share the word of God.



Related: “Tolerance” Is The Last Gasp Of A Depraved and Dying Society

Jeff Bezos’ Amazon.com bans books and movies that tell people the truth about vaccines, America, God and more. But the same online retailer openly sells satanic books with chapters on “teenage Satanists” and “animal sacrifice.”

As reported by Natural News:


"
Amazon is happily selling books that promote Satanism, including a book titled, “Satanism: A Beginner’s Guide to the Religious Worship of Satan and Demons Volume I: Philosophy,” published by “Devil’s Mark Publishing.” You can see the book at this Amazon.com link.



Google is also pro-Islam and anti-Christian, as is abundantly clear by Google’s celebration of Islamic holidays and its suppression of Christian websites, videos and content.

The people who work at Google hate the very idea of God, with many of them (like Rey Kurzweil) believing that machines are God and hoping to one day merge with those machines by claiming to be able to upload their souls to computer chips (transhumanism).

According to all the dominant tech giants today, even the word “Christmas” is “hate speech.”



Related: The Occult Origins Of Christmas

All the tech giants use the Southern Poverty Law Center - an anti-Christian, left-wing hate group - as the arbiter of “hate.” And the SPLC hates God, Christianity and America.


Planned Parenthood, Satanism and the Abortion Industry

The entire abortion industry functions largely as a child sacrifice temple, allowing worshipers of Satanism to carry out demonic rituals under the cover of “women’s health.” Many Planned Parenthood workers are practicing Satanists, and they pray to Satan as part of their child murder rituals.

One Planned Parenthood director recently admitted to running “a Satanic pedophile ring.” As Newspunch.com reports:


"
A former Planned Parenthood director has admitted that the organization is really a front for a Satanic pedophile ring in which abortions are seen as ‘demonic rituals.’ 

In an interview with the Daily Caller News Foundation, Ramona Trevino revealed that staff members have quotas for abortions so that they can use the aborted fetuses for sick Satanic rituals..

The desire to murder babies in the name of Satan is so prevalent among Leftists / Democrats that the Governor of North Carolina just vetoed a bill that would require health care for babies born alive after failed abortions.

You can almost hear Gov. Roy Cooper screaming, “Let them DIE!” as he licks his lips to lap up the blood of children murdered in the name of Satan.



Related: Black Magic: Satanists Rule The World, Not Politicians, Bankers Or Military Heads [Although They Are
Usually All One And The Same] + Another Illuminati Whistleblower Speaks Out



A Short List of the Institutions Which are Now Run by Satanists Who Despise God and Christ

Satanism has invaded and infected nearly every institution in modern society:

The Democrat party and ALL Democrats running for president.

Hollywood, Netflix, Amazon Prime and all of the dominant streaming content producers.

The pop culture music industry.

Amazon, Google, Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, YouTube and all the tech giants.

Modern medicine, which feeds on baby parts while pushing vaccines that contain aborted human fetal tissue (turning every vaccine into a cannibalism blood ritual).

The Vatican and the Pope, who is a direct servant of Satan.

The LGBTQ activist community, which pushes pedophilia and the destruction of the Church because the Church teaches that homosexuality is unclean. (But don’t you dare mention the epidemic of anal cancer that’s spreading across the LGBT community like wildfire.)

Every level of government, from local city councils to the federal deep state in Washington D.C.

The children’s books industry, including the Harry Potter series.

The global banking cartels, which are all owned and run by pedophiles and child blood harvesters.

The institution of “science,” which has become fanatical in its push to vaccine children with the blood of other children. (Vaccines contain WI-38 and MRC-5 cell lines, which are derived from aborted human babies, as is admitted by this CDC official document).

Universities and public schools.

The open borders advocates who need the borders to stay open so they can continue to traffic human children who are used as sex slaves and child sacrifice rituals by wealthy Democrat donors (and other sickos, like tech elitists and science “skeptics” who push medical child abuse).




Related: Former Satanic Priest Exposes The Four Main Tenets Of Satanic Ideology & Are You A Satanist?


What You Can Do to Stay Informed and Defend the Word of God

Too many churches in America are teaching watered-down scripture that’s afraid to teach the real word of God. If you want to hear a Christian pastor who isn’t afraid to discuss Revelation, the End Times and the attacks on Christianity, connect with Discover Ministries out of Australia, run by pastor Steve Cioccolanti.

Cioccolanti preaches what nearly all U.S. pastors are afraid to say. His Brighteon video channel is found at this link.

There are also many courageous Christian video channels on Brighteon.com, the free speech alternative to YouTube.




Make no mistake: Modern human civilization has been overtaken by demonic forces who are at war with God and humanity.

At least half the population has now been overtaken by demonic influence (probably much more) and are actively working to destroy human life (babies, etc.), individual liberty, national sovereignty, all white people, all Christians, etc.



Related: Religion: How It Was Employed As A Control System To Divide & Conquer

Every person who promotes infanticide and post-birth abortion, for example, is an actual demon in human form. They are quite literally no longer human. They are demons pretending to be human.

Watch my all-important Counterthink episode to learn the full truth about “demons in human form.”


Be prepared, both physically and spiritually. According to some, we have already entered “End Times” scenarios, and we are watching the rise of the demonic Left and soon, the Antichrist.

This Antichrist will pretend to be a global messiah who promises to heal the world and end war and conflict. In truth, he is the embodiment of Lucifer, and he will deceive billions into following him as he leads humanity toward destruction.

Even most Christians will be fooled and will surrender their souls to his influence. Watch for more signs of the emerging Mark of the Beast, the global persecution of Christians and the rise of global government. These are all signs that the end game is approaching.

Related: Fourteen Ways To Protect Yourself From The New World Order (NWO) Agenda


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Notre Dame Cathedral Burning False Flag, Complicity Of Pope, Organized By Macron, Merkel, & May, Goal Of Saving EU & Central Banks
April 22 2019 | From: PhiBetaIota / Various

I was devastated by the total burning of Notre Dame cathedral, a place where I once prayed in thanks for one of my son’s who survived what might otherwise have been a certain death.




The parallels to both the Reichstag Fire and 9/11 loomed.

Related: It Is Not Only Notre Dame Burning, It Is All Of Western Civilization

Then I heard from the shadow foreign minister of France and I believe all of the following to be true and an indictment of Macron, Merkel, May, and the Pope - Notre Dame would not have burned as it did without the explicit complicity of the Church - and key police, fire, and government offices in Paris - in detail, in advance, and into the future.



Related: Surge in Muslim migration sees spike in attacks on Christians in France

Here is what I have been told by a ranking source in France:

1. Canadian intelligence officers who went immediately to the site for a first hand look were prevented from getting close.

2. No electricity in the area where the fire is alleged to have started

3. Two dead within the fire, both evidently murdered (two bullets each)

4. No helicopters brought in to fight the fire

5. Dysfunctional water spraying machine, a mockery of a fire-fighting performance

6. Official narrative pretending it was an accident was immediate and clearly on the shelf and ready to go

7. Timing impossible to dismiss - intended to prevent announcement of Macron’s loss in the national debate inspired by the Yellow Vests

8. Afternote A: anniversary of the Titanic that was precursor to the creation of Central Banks and the subversion of all governments

9. Afternote B: This is intended to save the global financial system owned by the Satanists by saving the European  Election in May, anticipate a call for “financial solidarity” that keeps France trapped in Europe by “EU” agreeing to pay for the renovation of the cathedral.  “EU” and Central Banks are the beneficiaries of this false flag event, along with Macron as the token leader of France on behalf of the Satanic Deep State.

10. Afternote C: This is an intended “death blow” against Western Civilization. Although the Muslims are not being blamed, the sub-text is Frankfurt School / Tavestock Institute fundamental: whites and the West are shit,  hail all illegal immigrants, transgenders, and fat stupid people - the sheep of all sheep.

11. Afternote D: The roof of Notre Dame was original to the 13th century and has survived all wars, all manner of natural hazards. This was the single most precious asset in France, not so much a Catholic religious asset as a national spiritual cultural asset. Final conclusion: the Satanists are DESPERATE.



Related: Occult Holidays And Sabbats: Why Holidays Are Satanic Rituals

Notre Dame burning early on, fire brigades evidently held back

Separately I am told by sources in Asia with access to secret society leaders:

1. This was a Satanic Easter energy sacrifice by Satanists Macron, Merkel, and May, each believed to be an individual Satanist (and pedophile and sacrificer of children in ritual torture ceremonies). Each has their own major secular physical world failures pointing toward their Earthly demise.

2. This was assuredly done with the complicity of the Pope and the Catholic Church hierarchy, the two dead may have been murdered because they would not comply with Satanic instructions.

This was not an accident, this was an inside job with  outside (French national police) complicity in closing the area off and preventing effective responses from being coordinated. For the existing plan to blanket this sacred site with water to not have been executed instantly is the equivalent of Dick Cheney controlling NORAD on 9/11.



Related: Max Igan Analysis Of New Zealand False Flag Event In Christchurch & New Zealand False Flag – What They Don’t Want You To See

3. The coincidence of Steve Bannon setting up shop in an Italian monastery and calling the Pope an enemy with the timing and scope of the fire (total destruction) is considered just that - a coincidence.

4. The Pope’s incentive - apart from being a Satanist for whom God is the enemy and Notre Dame a lovely sacrifice to Satan - is said to revolve around the WikiLeaks dump and the exploding pedophilia scandal that if properly investigated would lead to every single cardinal and most bishops being defrocked, and the arrest of Assange, which has triggered the “dead hand” data dump and will lead to further deeply scandalous revelations about the Catholic Church in relation to Satanism, pedophilia, and financial crime.

5. Commercial insurance fraud is beginning to be discussed. The Church’s income has suffered from the pedophilia scandal, apart from a Satanic sacrifice of epic proportions, the Church (and the owner of the site, the French government) should be investigated for the possible use of the event as a two-fer: Satanic sacrifice and insurance fraud.


Commercial Insurance Fraud:  Alert Reader Sends in  this Paragraph From the Daily Mail:


"Notre-Dame is owned by the state and has been at the centre of a years-long row between the nation and the Paris archdiocese over who should bear the brunt of costs for badly needed restoration work.”

See: Daily Mail: Twenty-three minutes that could have saved Notre Dame? Alarm was raised during mass at 6.20pm but staff could not find the fire until 6.43pm ….when the inferno was raging out of control

The “patsies” for the alleged “gross negligence are likely to be the restoration team, we look for them to be placed under investigation as a means of distracting the public from the real perpetrator, Macron & his Satanic allies.

See: She’s safe in our hands! Young construction boss, 32, at centre of Notre Dame fire probe boasted about his firm’s ability to protect historic sites as his company won £5million contract to repair cathedral’s spire



Related: July 20, 1977: CIA Mind Control Project MKUltra Documents Released For The First Time


Update on Commercial Insurance Fraud from different Alert Reader.

Everything including the candles, statues, and most art appears to have been saved although fraudulent insurance claims are to be expected.  It is as if the roof and only the roof was carefully prepared for cinematique burning.


Scott Bennett, always a good source for Grand PSYOP, says this:



Related: The Opiate Of The Masses: When Religion Becomes An Addiction

If I was a betting man, my guess is this Notre Dame Cathedral fire was a “Kristolnacht” type of psyop event, similar to when the Nazis ignited the 1930’s fire and blamed the communists to win the election.

My guess is this is similar, with Macron benefiting by shutting down the yellow vest protests (which have been destroying him and putting France in civil war.

Who benefits from the fire? Well perhaps Israeli Mossad and / or Shin-bet doubling-down on their “religious war” between Muslims and Chrisitians as may have been the case in the “Chr*st-Ch_rch” NZ event. [Further comment redacted due to innacuracy.]



Related: Christchurch Terror Attack: Mass Censorship, Mystery Shooters, And The Globetrotting Lone Gunman

A renewed religious war is always good for the military industrial complex.

Perhaps they might even try and blame it on Iran - but most likely would have been MEK if it was anyone, working with MI6-CIA. Just another day in the police-state.





See: Notre Dame Cathedral in Paris on Fire, Worker Claims it Was “Deliberately” Started

The official story [Credible false flag reports are being censored]:




See: Macron Vows to Rebuild Notre Dame Cathedral After Devastating Fire


Biblical Quote:


"There is to be a particular insult, which will be inflicted upon My Holy Name, in an effort to desecrate Me, during Holy Week.

This wicked gesture, during Holy Week, will be seen by those who keep their eyes open and this will be one of the signs by which you will know that the imposter, who sits on the throne in My Church on earth, does not come from Me.”


Message of Jesus – Thursday, March 14th, 2013 - from The Book of Truth


Covers on Notre Dame




See: “Nine Centuries Of History Lost” – What Front Pages Said About Notre Dame Inferno


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Helen Clark, Don McKinnon Front NZ Chapter Of US Think-Tank: Aspen Institute
& The Mundane Reality Of Think Tanks

April 21 2019 | From: Scoop / AustralianInstituteOfInternationalAffairs / Various

Former Prime Minister Helen Clark and former Secretary-General for the Commonwealth, Sir Don McKinnon, are throwing their political capital and global profile behind the establishment of the New Zealand chapter of a respected US-based think tank, the Aspen Institute.



Another globalist machination appears in New Zealand

"Based in Queenstown, Aspen Institute NZ is a non-partisan and non-ideological organisation focused on education and policy," said inaugural director, Christine Maiden Sharp.

Related: Up to $5 billion in public funds potentially misused in NZ last year, Serious Fraud Office warns

"Its mission is to foster leadership to contribute to the development of both New Zealand society and globally".

Headquartered in Washington DC and chaired by the Clinton-era US Secretary of State, Madeleine Albright, the institute claims 11 locations globally and operations in 14 countries, of which New Zealand is the latest. Each branch is self-funding but the identities of key donors are not disclosed.

A clue to the calibre of its backing, however, is the presence of NBR Rich Lister and Dunedin commercial big-foot Sir Eion Edgar on the nine-member Aspen Institute NZ board.

Maiden Sharp's LinkedIn profile also carries endorsements from Marc Holtzman, a politically connected, Hong Kong-based American banker who owns property in the Gibbston Valley.



Related: Tavistock Institute

The institute intends to run a programme of "forums to encourage constructive dialogue on critical issues that matter to New Zealanders and for all New Zealanders”, Maiden Sharp said in a statement.

It ran an inaugural seminar for key supporters in Queenstown this week on artificial intelligence. It was moderated by globally recognised AI and robotics expert, Neil Jacobstein, who is joining the board.


"Aspen Institute NZ’s top priority is encouraging young New Zealanders and individuals from diverse backgrounds to participate in and shape meaningful dialogue.

We plan to focus on climate change, technology, and inequality / intolerance in our first three years.

That will include people from all walks of life, as well as New Zealand and international topic experts.”



Related: The Conspiracy to Rule the World: Atlantic Council

Clark, who recently started her own New Zealand-focused policy think tank, the Helen Clark Foundation, said Aspen's local chapter will:


"Help raise the standard of debate on issues that matter most to New Zealanders, provide access to an extraordinary global network and enable current and future leaders to contribute to new ideas on key issues on a world stage".

McKinnon said "there is no forum like it for long-term policy discussions".


"The international name Aspen is a draw card and New Zealand is a well-respected democratic society. This will be a step up for New Zealand’s international engagement."



Related: The Round Table: The Hub Of The CFR, Trilateral Commission, RIIA, Club Of Rome, Bilderberg Group And The UN

In the statement, Albright welcomed the New Zealand chapter to the Aspen fold, saying the country had "inspired us all by showing resilience and a commitment to democratic values in the face of hate", in a clear reference to the March 15 terrorist attacks on mosques in Christchurch.

McKinnon will chair the nine-member board, of which his co-patron, Clark, is not a member.

Other board members include Sir Maarten Wevers, former head of the Office of the Prime Minister and Cabinet during the Clark and Key eras, Federated Farmers chair Katie Milne, Lisa Tumahai, kaiwhakahaere - chair- of the South Island's Ngai Tahu iwi, Sport NZ chair Bill Moran, and Jane Taylor, a barrister and professional director who chairs Christchurch electricity network Orion NZ, the Predator Free 2050 initiative, government science agency Manaaki Whenua Landcare Research, and is deputy chair of Radio New Zealand.


Related Articles:

Scrap NZ Foreign Investment Rules, For Country's Sake – [Globalist] Think Tank

The Rand Corporation: The Think Tank That Controls America

Government Think Tank Calls For Infiltrating Conspiracy Websites



The Mundane Reality Of Think Tanks

Think tanks are a source of fascination for scholars and the media. The reality of influencing policymaking is far more prosaic and think tanks have had to evolve with changing political landscapes and technology.



The term think tank often conjures images of groups of individuals who have secret meetings with governments, organisations that act as secret support or recruitment bases for political parties or those who receive funding from dubious sources to push a certain agenda.

Related: The Royal Institute Of International Affairs (Chatham House)

The activities of right wing British think tanks such as the Adam Smith Institute and Institute of Economic Affairs have come under scrutiny in the past few years; they have been accused of colluding with the media and government to spread a neoliberal agenda.

There are elements of truth in these perceptions about think tanks and what they do but the reality is less cloak-and-dagger and far more transparent.

Comment: Read the links in this article about specific think tanks and quite a different picture emerges

Also see: The Conspiracy to Rule the World

Since the 1960s, think tanks have evolved to adapt to the changing political landscapes around them and to make use of new technology, first with the emergence of the 24-hour news cycle and more recently with the rise of social media.

Scholars have divided think tanks in the Anglophone world into two waves: the first being described by scholars as the old guard institutes or “Universities without Students” and the second wave as being advocacy think tanks or “New Partisans”.



Related: Breaking The Fear Factor - Defeating The Criminal Elite & Neoliberal Dictators


First Wave

The first wave of think tanks were a progression in a longer intellectual tradition that dated back to the 16th and 17th century France where academic groups would assist monarchs with creating and implementing new legislation and policies.

The Fabian Society is considered to be one of the oldest think tanks in the English-speaking world. It began as an organisation in the United Kingdom that advocated for political change through more gradual reforms; its strategies to influence governments lay in publishing pamphlets and holding meetings with intellectuals and members of government.

The first American think tank to emerge was the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace (CEIP) in 1907. Like the Fabian Society, the CEIP held events and published pamphlets to try to influence policymaking

The activities of the Fabian Society and the CEIP would pave the way for a number of other think tanks such as the Brookings Institute, the RAND Corporation and the Institute of Economic Affairs (IEA).



Related: CFR’s RAND Corporation: Terror From “Everywhere” Requires More Surveillance

These think tanks had broad policy agendas and tended to have structures that have been described as resembling universities without students because their staffers tended to have academic backgrounds and favoured longitudinal research published in journal articles or books.

They were elite focused: they produced work that was meant for academics, the civil service and governments. Often their work debated big ideas, such as economic theory, rather than providing specific and instructional policy suggestions.

The first wave of think tanks avoided expressing political biases or aligning themselves with particular political parties.

The creation of the IEA in 1955 signalled an evolution in the development of think tanks. While the IEA favoured academic-style publications that contributed to theoretical debates - and aimed this work at elites in government and academia - unlike its predecessors, the IEA had a very clear ideological bias towards economic liberalisation and free markets.

Its founder, Antony Seldon, set up the think tank to promote neoliberalism as an alternative to the then-dominant Keynesian economic discourse in the UK. The IEA was separate to the Conservative Party, but due to its views found itself closely aligned with the Conservatives.



Related: Committee of 300 [ With related details on the Aspen Institute ]


Second Wave

The second wave of think tanks began to emerge in the 1960s, starting with the Heritage Foundation in the US.

These think tanks were aware of the obstacles faced by their predecessors; although engaging in academic debates may have had some benefits, the reality was that if these think tanks wanted to make greater impacts in policy debates, they needed to broaden their scope.

The emergence of the 24 hour news cycle also had a significant impact on the work of think tanks; think tanks now had to move away from producing longer, academic-style publications and had to start developing work that could be produced quickly, was accessible to a wide audience and could be broken down into soundbites.

Think tanks began to realise that in utilising the media they could save both time and money and also reach a much wider audience.

The second-wave think tank model accepted that direct influence over governments was not possible and, in doing so, created strategies that were designed to generate policy debates in public forums such as television, newspapers and events such as debates and lectures.



Related: The Twenty One Goals Of The Illuminati And The Committee Of 300

The success of the early second-wave think tanks such as the Heritage Foundation lead to a proliferation of think tanks across the Anglophone world, including left-wing think tanks such as Demos and the Institute for Public Policy Research (IPPR) in Britain.

Think tanks play an important role in democracies; they provide the information and ideas that create and contribute to public policy debates. Removed from governments and the civil service, these organisations have the ability to propose ideas that are not hampered by party partisanship and can be radical.

With the rise of social media, think tanks now do not have to rely solely on the media to disseminate their work and ideas; they can do it themselves in a way that has the potential to reach a wider global audience.

While the term “think tank” may create misconceptions about their reach and influence over governments, the reality is that think tanks have had to change their strategies to create public and indirect policy debates with governments as the opportunities to directly influence them in private were limited or non-existent.

This is now especially true as think tanks have to compete with many others, both within their political systems and globally.


Related Articles:


What Data Are We Keeping About You? | Rand Corporation & How Amazon.com Spies On Your Most Private Thoughts, Fetishes And Conversations

Keynes Must Die

The West’s NGO ‘Human Rights’ Scam

Key Says Clark Has 'Skills And Experience' For UN's Top Post


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Mueller Report: Assange Preferred Trump Because Hillary Was A “Sociopath” Who Would Start More Wars + Poll Shows Media Failed To Gaslight Public About Trump Campaign Spying
April 20 2019 | From: SummitNews / Breitbart / Various

“She’s bright, well connected, sadistic”.


Comment: And so the fall of the deep state's house of cards begins to publicly fall. This is just the beginning of a massive public exposure. Whilst at this point it all seems very America-centric, the US was always going to be the trigger point. The Western world and indeed the entire world are going to know the truth about a great many things...



The redacted Mueller report reveals that Wikileaks founder Julian Assange wanted Donald Trump to win the presidency because he thought Hillary Clinton was a “sociopath” who would start more wars.

Related: Robert Mueller Did Not Merely Reject the Trump/Russia Conspiracy Theories. He Obliterated Them

Assange, who was arrested last week and faces extradition to the United States, thought that it would be far harder for Trump to start wars given his platform and opposition from Republicans.


"GOP will generate a lot oposition [sic], including through dumb moves. Hillary will do the same thing, but co-opt the liberal opposition and the GOP opposition.

Hence hillary [sic] has greater freedom to start wars than the GOP and has the will to do so,”
Assange wrote.




Joe diGenova on Collusion Investigation: “It All Started in the Obama White House – The Chickens Are Coming Home to Roost”

Former US Attorney Joe diGenova joined Sean Hannity on the eve of the release of the full Mueller Report by Attorney General Bill Barr.

Joe diGenova accused Barack Obama of being behind the Trump-Russia collusion narrative.





Related: Grassley, Graham Put Bill Barr on Notice – DOJ Can No Longer Use Mueller Probe as Excuse to Dodge Questions on Hillary’s Email Investigation


"Joe diGenova: Barr will conclude, without saying it tomorrow, that it all started in the Obama White House.

Barack Obama knew about this from day one. He authorized it. Brennan and Clapper informed him.

Everybody knows that’s where we’re headed. And it’s about time.

Because a lot of very innocent people have been hurt. Not just Donald Trump who has been absolutely outrageously harmed, by what President Obama authorized. But now “the chickens are coming home to roost.”

Related: An In Depth Analysis of the Simpson – Steele Dossier[s] Proves It Was a Sham and Written by Multiple Individuals – Contrary to Steele’s Original Assertions




He also made it clear that he thought Hillary was a sadistic sociopath who wouldn’t hesitate to engage in military adventurism.


"[W]e believe it would be much better for GOP . . . Dems+Media+liberals woudl [sic] then form a black to reign in their worst qualities. . . .With Hillary in charge, GOP will be pushing for her worst qualities., dems+media+neoliberals will be mute. . . . She’s bright, well connected, sadisitic [sic] sociopath,”
Assange said.

Given these statements, it’s unsurprising that many leftists celebrated Assange’s arrest last week.

Many of Trump’s base have called on the president to pardon Assange.

I posted a tweet asking if this should happen and it received 27,000 retweets.




Related Articles:

Flashback: Trump Asked When Trials for Treason Begin for Dems Involved in Russia Hoax

CNN Discusses Mueller Report With 8 People Who All Completely Agree With Each Other

Trump Says It’s Time To ‘Investigate The Investigators’ Of Russia Hoax

Hillary Calls for War

Rudy Giuliani to Release Trump Rebuttal Within Hours of Release of Full Mueller Report on Thursday

Ultimate Compilation: Dems and MSM Talking Heads Freak Out Over AG Barr’s Impending Spying Investigation

America Must Investigate Obama’s Spying




Poll Shows Media Failed To Gaslight Public About Trump Campaign Spying

Despite the media’s best effort to gaslight the public into believing otherwise, a plurality of voters accurately believe Donald Trump’s 2016 presidential campaign was spied on.



The poll from the far-left Politico and Morning Consult shows that nearly four in ten voters (38 percent) said they believe spying occurred, while only 28 percent said there was no spying.

Related: Donald Trump Jr. Shoots First Arrow at Obama Over 2016 Spying on Opponent’s Campaign

More than a third, 35 percent, didn’t know or had no opinion.





Related: President Trump references OAN story on FBI paying Christopher Steele for dossier


This might be the greatest media fail in the history of media fails. It most certainly is yet one more piece of evidence of an ever-growing pile that the media have lost almost all of their ability to influence public opinion.

During his testimony last week, Attorney General William Barr accurately stated his belief that “spying did occur” on the president’s campaign…

And almost immediately, like the hapless Keystone Cops they now are, every single available person in the establishment media scrambled in a panic to push back against this truth, to scream it was a dirty lie, to pretend the president’s campaign was not spied on, never spied on because their precious Barry Obama would never-ever-ever do such a thing; it just didn’t happen, and if you say it did, you are a creepy, anti-science conspiracy theorist.

But after more than a week of the media unifying in a relentless pushback to gaslight the American people on this subject, only 28 percent are buying it.



Related: Russia Gate Goes Down In History As A Remarkable Display Of American Stupidity + Barr ‘Right’ To Say ‘Spying’ Occurred On Trump Campaign

The media could not even convince all the Democrats to buy into it; a full 24 percent of Democrats accurately believe Trump was spied on, as do 57 percent of Republicans.

On top of the media’s waning-to-nonexistent moral authority, contributing to this media fail are things I like to call The Facts.

The very idea that it is not spying when the Obama administration uses the C.I.A. and F.B.I. to wiretap Trump campaign personnel (and go so far as to lie to obtain those warrants), to employ covert personnel and covert sourcing to gather information, to lure unsuspecting Trump campaign staffers to overseas honey traps meetings, to launch a massive operation to covertly gather information on a presidential campaign and base it on oppo research gathered by the opposing campaign…

To argue this is not spying is like arguing against the wetness of water.

If that is not spying, please tell me what is.



Related: Will Junta-Mastermind, John Brennan, Ever Face The Music? – OpEd

The American people are not stupid. They know what the definition of spying is. They know spying when they see it.

And  when a flaming left-wing nitwit like CNN’s Chris Cillizza says that instead of “spying,” it should be described as “surveillance approved by a FISA court,” that tells you just how dishonest the media are willing to get to protect the villains in this story (Obama, James Comey, James Clapper, John Brennan).

Whether it is the outlawing of “illegal immigrant” or “chick flick” or “bossy” or “spying,” the media have launched a literal Orwellian campaign to stifle debate by making our language less precise, by removing descriptive words from the dictionary only to replace them with Newspeak, with confusing mush like “undocumented immigrant” or “surveillance approved by a FISA court.”

Hey, do you want to know what “surveillance approved by a FISA court” is called…?

It’s called SPYING…

And the people know it.


Related Articles:

VP Mike Pence: ‘American People Have Right to Know if Russia Investigation Lawful’

Top Reasons Why The Trump Dossier Is Not Believable


Annotating Special Counsel Robert Mueller’s Redacted Report

Trump: ‘Dirty Cops’ At FBI Paid ‘Fake Dossier Author’ Steele

Trump Never Used Executive Privilege to Redact From Mueller Report, Barr Says


DOJ: Mueller report to be released Thursday


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Obama's Ex-Border Chief: US Border Crisis ‘Worst In Our History’ & Obama’s DHS Head: Border Problem “Is A Crisis By Any Measure”
April 19 2019 | From: NewsWars / Infowars / Various

The national emergency unfolding at the U.S. Southern border is a “meltdown” of unprecedented scale, according to correlating statements made by a former Border Patrol chief and a current director of Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE).



Mark Morgan, who led Customs and Border Patrol under President Obama, asserts that this is the worst immigration catastrophe in U.S. history.

Related: Obama Border Patrol Head: Crisis Is ‘Worst In The History Of The Country’

Comment: Some people describe InfoWars as controlled opposition. That does seem to be the case in that they only discuss certain matters - but in some matters such as the US border crisis - they are doing a great job of sharing relevant information, albeit a distillation of comments coming out in the mainstream; that definitely back up the fact that such a crisis does indeed exist.


"This is a question that people really need to pay attention to: I am saying, based on 30 years of public service, that the crisis we face right now along the Southwest border is actually the worst we’ve ever experienced in our history - the worst,”
Morgan told Tucker Carlson.

“People want to talk about the numbers back in the 2000s, 1.5 million - it’s the demographics, Tucker. Back then, 90 percent - the overwhelming majority - were Mexican males and we were deporting them. Now it’s family units and unaccompanied minors, and because our laws are broken, we’re allowing them in.”



Related: Trump To Sign Border Security Bill And Declare Emergency Over Wall & A Tale Of Two Walls - One Funded By The US Taxpayer In Israel, One Not Funded By Nancy Pelosi In The USA

Morgan explained that roughly 65% of those who attempt to enter the U.S. illegally or via asylum loopholes end up staying.


"We’re going to reach a million this year - that means we’re going to allow 650,000 into this country, much of which we don’t know who they are and we’ll never hear from them again,”
Morgan said.

Concurrently, acting ICE director Ron Vitiello offered a grim assessment of the status of America’s Southern frontier.


"It’s an absolute crisis down there, it has humanitarian aspects, it has border security aspects - this policy can’t continue,”
Vitiello told Fox News.

“The system is in a meltdown. It’s just getting worse day by day.”

Vitiello revealed that over 130,000 migrant families have been released into the interior of the United States since December alone.



Related: More Undeniable Signs That The Global Criminal Cabal Is Going Down + Obama, Hillary Clinton Both Supported Trump’s Plan To Stop Migrants At Border

Commenting on President Trump’s imminent visit to Calexico to meet with officials, Vitiello said;


"What he is going to see is this unbelievable flow at the border and no way for us to legally address it without Congress acting.”


Obama’s DHS Head: Border Problem “Is A Crisis By Any Measure”

“We have to get away from Democrat vs. Republican, crisis vs. no crisis.”

Barack Obama’s former head of Homeland Security Jeh Johnson warned Thursday that anyone who is still arguing there is no crisis at the border is being purposefully partisan, because the situation is “a crisis by any measure.”

Related: Crisis at border reaches ‘magnitude not seen in modern times’


"This is, in my view, having owned this problem for three years, first, I know what a thousand a day looks like. I saw it myself at border patrol holding stations,”
Johnson said.

“I cannot begin to imagine what 4,000 a day looks like. It must overwhelm the system.” he added.

“I think we have to get away from Democrat vs. Republican, crisis vs. no crisis.” Johnson continued.

“This is a crisis by any measure, and the solution inevitably is bipartisan. It has to be bipartisan. It requires a change in law,” Johnson urged.





Johnson, who served as United States Secretary of Homeland Security from 2013 to 2017, now routinely warns that action needs to be taken over immigration.



Related: Pentagon Finds $12.8 Billion for President Trump’s Border Wall Construction

Last month Johnson told MSNBC “we are truly in a crisis” at the border.





Related: Did The Judges Lie: New Report Finds 72 Terrorists Came From Countries Covered By Trump Ban + State Department Revolts Against Trump For Securing Border


"A little bit of context here. When I was in office in Kirstjen Nielsen’s job, at her desk, I’d get to work around 6:30 in the morning, and there would be my intelligence book sitting on my desk, the PDB, and also the apprehension numbers from the day before,”
 Johnson said.

“My staff would tell you if it was under 1,000 apprehension the day before, that was a relatively good number, and if it was above 1,000, it was a relatively bad number, and I was going to be in a bad mood the whole day.” he continued.

“On Tuesday there were 4,000 apprehensions. I know that a thousand overwhelms the system. I can’t imagine what 4,000 a day looks like. So, we are truly in a crisis,” he urged.

President Trump this week called Democrat attitudes on the border crisis “treasonous”:



Related: President Trump: Violent crime, sexual assault up in border regions amid migrant crisis


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Nigel Farage Launches The Brexit Party With Promise To Fight Back Against 'Betrayal' Of Referendum Result
April 18 2019 | From: BusinessInsider / Various

Former UKIP leader Nigel Farage has launched a new pro-Brexit party ahead of next month's European elections in order to fight back against what he labeled the "betrayal" of the referendum result and Britain's delayed exit from the EU.



The Brexit Party, which launched on Friday morning at a factory in Coventry, central England, has been set up in protest at the United Kingdom's failure to leave the European Union on time.

Related: UK Prime Minister May Sells Out Her Country

Nigel Farage launches a new pro-Brexit political party.

The former UKIP leader unveiled "The Brexit Party" at a press conference in Leave-voting Coventry on Friday morning.

Farage promised a "revolution in British politics" in response to Theresa May's failure to deliver Brexit on time.

He was joined by Annunziata Rees-Mogg - a former Conservative candidate and sister of Jacob Rees-Mogg.

The party is set to contest the upcoming European Parliament elections.


"It became clear pretty early on... that our Remainer parliament, our Remainer cabinet and indeed our Remainer prime minister would do their upmost to delay, dilute and upturn Brexit,"
Farage said.

"And what we hae seen over recent weeks is the wilful betrayal of the greatest democratic exercise in the history of this nation."



Related: Can Brexiters Overcome False Flag Murder & Rothschild UK Collapse Fearmongering? + Soros, Rothschild Warn Of Brexit Doom; Osborne Threatens With "Suspending" Market

Farage pledged to "start putting the fear of God back into our members of parliament," adding that "they deserve nothing less after their betrayal [of the Brexit result]."




Nigel Farage: This is Not Just About Brexit Anymore, It’s About What Kind of Country We Are





Related: British Film Icon Michael Caine Supports Brexit, Says Unelected EU Is “Fascist”




"I'm angry. Lots of people out there are angry."

Farage, a Member of European Parliament who has run unsuccessfully for UK parliament seven times, said the party plans to contest every region in the election on May 23 and has received "just under 1,000" applications from people who wish to stand as candidates for the party.



Related: Farage At Irexit Conference: Brexit And Trump Revolts A "Pivotal Point" In Western History

He was joined by Annunziata Rees-Mogg, who is a former Conservative candidate and sister of the Conservative MP Jacob Rees-Mogg and will stand for the party.


"Our prime minister will not listen to her membership, or the people of this country... I can't sit back and let her do it."
Rees-Mogg said.

The UK was originally scheduled to leave the EU on March 29.

However, Prime Minister Theresa May has delayed the exit date twice in order to avoid leaving without a deal because Members of Parliament have rejected her Brexit plan on three occasions.




The Truth About Brexit





Related:
What They’re Not Telling You About the Brexit Sellout





At an EU summit on Wednesday, May and other EU leaders agreed to delay Brexit until October 31, prompting fury from Brexit-supporting MPs who believed the prime minister should have left without a deal
.

Speaking to The Sun before the launch, Farage said:


"My ambition us to cause a revolution in British politics, and to end the two-party structure as we know it."

"We hope to have a profound effect on the Conservative party and to shift the centre of gravity once more."

He claimed on Friday to have raised over £750,000 from donors.

Farage said he had placed a £1,000 bet on the Brexit party to win the European elections at odds of 3/1.

Farage led the UK Independence Party three times over the course of 20 years and was its best-known representative.



Related: Le Pen: Let’s Frexit, Bring Back National French Currency & Frexit: Le Pen Promises To Take France Out Of EU & NATO

He quit the party last year, claiming it had become too focused on anti-Muslim rhetoric under the stewardship of its current leader, Gerard Batten.

Our Brexit Insider Facebook group is the best place for up-to-date news and analysis about Britain's departure from the EU, direct from Business Insider's political reporters. Join here.


Related Articles:

Bank Of England Warns "No Deal" Brexit Would Lead To Chaos, Crisis "As Bad As 2008 Crash"

Punk Icon Johnny Rotten Cheers Brexit, Calls Trump A “Political Sex Pistol” + Brexit Bill Becomes Law As UK Queen Elizabeth II Gives Royal Assent

Excellent Trump / Farage Speech & Hillary Thinks “Mr. Brexit” Is Just Another “Right-wing, Xenophobic, Sexist, Bigot” That You Should Promptly Ignore

Brexit Is Sending Shockwaves Across The Atlantic

UK Labour MP Jo Cox’s Murder: A Desperate Anti-Brexit Psyop


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Act Leader David Seymour: Kiwis Need To Resist An 'Orwellian Future'
& Zuckerberg Complains About FCC’s Lack Of Free Speech Regulations - Wants More Silencing Of Voices,
But Especially Conservative Voices
April 17 2019 | From: NewZealandHerald / TheGatewayPundit / Various

Act leader David Seymour said creating a "public decency tribunal" would be "the stuff of police states and third world dictators".



New Zealand is at risk of facing an "Orwellian future" if the Government wades too far into what is, and is not, considered hate speech, Act Leader David Seymour says.

Related: Leaked Google Memos Reveal Aggressive "News Blacklist" Used Against Conservative Sites

He said that Justice Minister Andrew Little's comments about what he called an anti-Māori pamphlet suggest that Little thinks the Government should be responsible for shutting down comments it thinks are foolish.

The pamphlet, titled One Treaty One Nation, calls for an end to state partnership with Māori, scrapping the Waitangi Tribunal, Māori electorates and wards and said Māori have benefited from colonisation lifting them out of "a violent stone age existence".

The pamphlet was dropped in people's mailboxes in Auckland and is now the subject of a complaint which has been lodged with the Advertising Standards Authority.

Speaking to the Herald about the pamphlet, Little said it was racist and that its author was "an ignorant fool".


"It peddles myths about pre-European Maori society that historical scholarship does not bear out."

Really?



Related: Disinterest In Pre-Maori History Stuns

He said it was a matter for the Human Rights Commission.

But Seymour said it appears that Little was saying these types of comments should be illegal.


"If people weren't allowed to make stupid and historically inaccurate statements, we'd have to close down Parliament, but that is what Justice Minister Andrew Little seems to be suggesting in his response to a One Law for All pamphlet this weekend."

Seymour said Little was not claiming the pamphlet incites, or threatens violence, or that it was defamatory.



Related: One Treaty, One Nation pamphlet 'racist and stupid', but not hate speech - academic


"Those would be legitimate reasons to curtail speech, but Little is claiming the Government needs the power to shut down speech that is foolish."

Seymour said if the Government was cracking down on speech that was foolish; it would need to take a look at itself.

He used the example of the Reserve Bank Governor Adrian Orr referring to the bank as a Kauri tree, and the Treasury measuring "sun and moon feelings" as examples of this.

He said if the Government was seriously thinking of having a policy against people saying stupid things, these would be areas for it to start.

Late last month, Little said he would fast-track a review of the Human Rights Act, which could see a crackdown on hate speech.



Related: New Zealand's Privacy Commissioner Deletes His Facebook Account + It Begins: Facebook Under Federal Investigation For Use Of Personal Data

He said the current hate speech laws were not strong enough and needed to change.

The review has the support of the National Party but its Leader, Simon Bridges, said free speech should not be limited as a result of any changes that may be made.

Seymour said any form of a Government censor that had the ability to make "arbitrary judgments" of what is and isn't a reasonable opinion would go against the Bill of Rights Act.

That Act says:


"Everyone has the right to freedom of expression, including the freedom to seek, receive, and impart information and opinions of any kind in any form".

Creating a "public decency tribunal" – as has been mooted by former United Future Leader Peter Dunne – would be "the stuff of police states and third world dictators".



Related: Censored, Surveilled, Watch Listed And Jailed: The Absurdity Of Being A Citizen In A Police State


"That Orwellian future is one that must be resisted by every free-thinking New Zealander at all costs."


Related Articles:

'Totalitarian-style' new online code that could block websites and fine them £20million for 'harmful' content will not limit press freedom, Culture Secretary promises

Leaked emails suggest Google is a leftist cult

Vladimir Putin Calls For Defending Internet Free Speech



Zuckerberg Complains About FCC’s Lack Of Free Speech Regulations - Wants More Silencing Of Voices, But Especially Conservative Voices

Everyone’s favorite self appointed world speech policeman, Mark Zuckerberg, recently took part in a long form sit down interview with leftist hack “journalist” George Stephanopoulos on ABC, where they talked about user’s privacy on Facebook, putting “strong data controls in place” for policing speech. 

Zuckerberg also complained that there’s too much free speech, especially “divisive” political speech, even suggesting that the FCC should regulate speech online.

Related: Texas Senator takes aim at Big Tech, proposes Sec. 230 reform and antitrust action against extreme censorship

Facebook has been shutting down traffic to conservative websites since the 2016 election.

Conservatives dominated social media in 2016 where they were able to get the truth uncensored.  Facebook ended that in 2017 and 2018.

The Gateway Pundit spoke with two of the top conservative publishers in America.

Floyd Brown is a conservative author, speaker and media commentator. In 2008 Floyd launched Western Journal which quickly became one of the top conservative websites in America.



By 2016 Floyd’s organization of Western Journal and other conservative websites under his umbrella had more than a billion page views. Since 2016 Floyd’s organization lost 75% of its Facebook traffic.

Likewise, we spoke with Jared Vallorani from Klicked Media. Jared traveled to Washington DC with The Gateway Pundit and website owners at 100%FedUp in June to discuss Facebook targeting against conservative publishers with Republican lawmakers.




Cruz Hearing Exposes Big Tech Censorship of Conservatives





Related: Leaked memos prove Google is a massive criminal enterprise engaged in felony election meddling and racketeering





Jared told The Gateway Pundit his organization Klicked Media, which hosts over 60 conservative websites, lost 400 million page views from Facebook in the last six months if you compare the traffic to a year ago. 

Jared said, “We lost 70% to 80% of our traffic if you compare January to May 2017 vs Jan to May 2018.”

If you combine the total number of page-views lost by just these two conservative online publishers you are looking at a loss of over 1.5 billion page-views from Facebook in one year.

These are numbers from just two of the top conservative publishers in America. This does not include the thousands of other conservative publishers across the country who lost all of their traffic coming from Facebook

Here at The Gateway Pundit our Facebook traffic has been effectively eliminated after we were ranked as the 4th most influential conservative publisher in the 2016 election.

The fact that Facebook is targeting conservative publishers should not be a surprise to Gateway Pundit readers.



Related: UK To Censor PRIVATE Messaging Apps, All Social Media Platforms

We have been reporting on this for several months now.

In July we released a study where we looked at several top conservative websites and discovered that the publishers had lost an average of 93% of their Facebook traffic.

In February James O”Keefe and Project Veritas published proof from a whistle-blower that Facebook plotted and planned to remove conservative content from their platform.

The information describes how Facebook engineers planned and went about policing political speech.

So when Facebook says they want to crack down on speech, they mean conservative speech.

Stephanopoulos framed the discussion by claiming that Facebook isn’t “doing more to police fake news and hate speech,” before they go on to describe exactly what Zuckerberg doesn’t like and what the answers should be.

Somehow it’s all the Russians’ fault.

Portions of the interview read:


STEPHANOPOULOS: Let’s talk about the regulation, your call for regulation. As you know, it’s been met with some skepticism, in some corners.

Let’s just tick through some of the questions and have you answer them. One of them is some people see this as a smart tactic to block more-dramatic action.

Like, Elizabeth Warren’s called to break up the company. How do you respond to that?

ZUCKERBERG: Well, I’ve spent most of the last few years trying to address these major social issues that we find ourselves at the center of, so everything from policing harmful content, to preventing election interference, to making sure that we have strong data controls in place.

And I’m proud of the progress that we’ve made. There’s a lot more to do. But we’ve made a lot of progress over the last couple of years.

And one of the things that I now have more of an appreciation about is that, in each of these areas there is a question of, what decisions should be left to a private company to make, especially around things like speech and expression for so many people around the world?

And where should we have either industry or more government regulation? And I can give you a few examples of where I think this is really important.

You know, after 2016, when we saw what Russia tried to do, in interfering in the election - we’ve implemented a lot of different measures to verify any advertiser who’s running a political ad to create an archive of all the political ads, so anyone can see what advertisers are running, who they’re targeting, how much they’re paying - any other ads that they say.
[?]

But one of the things that’s unclear is, actually, what is the definition of a political ad, right? And that’s a really fundamental question for this.

STEPHANOPOULOS: Does it have to say, “Vote for,” or, “Vote against,” for example…

ZUCKERBERG: Well, yeah. That’s exactly right.

All of the laws around political advertising today primarily focus on a candidate and an election, right, so, “Vote for this candidate in this election.”

But that’s not, primarily, what we saw Russia trying to do and other folks who were trying to interfere in elections. And what we saw them doing was talking about divisive political issues.

They’d run, simultaneously, different campaigns on social media trying to argue for immigration or against immigration.

And the goal wasn’t, actually, to advance the issue forward. It was just to rile people up and be divisive. But the current laws around what is political advertising don’t consider discussion issues to be political.

So that’s just one of the examples of where you know, it’s not clear to me, after working on this for a few years now, that we want a private company to be making that kind of a fundamental decision about, you know, what is political speech?

And how should that be regulated?




Related: The Business of Your Face

They go on to suggest ways to involve the FCC:


STEPHANOPOULOS: And how do you respond to someone who says, “But wait a second. That’s your responsibility. It’s your platform. It’s your company?”

ZUCKERBERG: Well, I think, broadly, we would say that setting the rules around political advertising is not a company’s job, right?

I mean, there’s been plenty of the rules in the past. It’s just that, at this point they’re not updated to the modern threats that we face or the modern kinds of nation state trying to interfere in each other’s elections.

We need new rules, right? It’s not, you can’t say that an election is just some period before people go to vote. I mean, the kind of information operations that these folks are trying to do now are ongoing, permanently.

So I just think that we need new rules on this. Now, at Facebook, we’re doing the best that we can on each of these issues.

But I think, ideally, you would have standards that you would want all of the major companies to be abiding by.

STEPHANOPOULOS: You’re already seeing the FCC push back fairly hard against this, two commissioners, I think, saying, “No, we don’t want to get into the business of policing the First Amendment.”

ZUCKERBERG: Yeah. I don’t think that that’s what this is, though, right? I think it’s you can say that kind of any regulation around what someone says online is protected.

But I think that that’s clearly not right today. I mean, we already do have regulations around what you can do, in terms of political advertising.

And even without getting into saying, you know, “Okay, here’s the type of content. And here’s what we’re going to define as, you know, hate speech,” for example - I still think it would be a positive step to demand that companies issue transparency reports around, well, here’s the amount of content on your service or that is every kind of harmful category.

Here’s the amount of hate speech. Here’s the amount of misinformation. Here’s the amount of bullying of children. Because by making that transparent, that puts more pressure on companies in order to be able to manage that. And people, publicly, can see which companies are actually doing a good job and improving and which ones need to do more.

I’m actually - we release our transparency report on how we’re proactively finding all of these harmful kinds of content.

Today, it’s every six months. But I’ve committed that we’re going to get to every quarter. Because I actually think that it’s as important - that kind of a transparency report around content, as the quarterly financial statements that we report.

I mean, this is, like, really critical stuff for society. So I don’t think that anyone would say that having companies have to be transparent about the amounts of harmful content is any kind of First Amendment issue.

STEPHANOPOULOS: So can you drill down in on it a little more? What do you envision when you see this regulation? Who’s doing it? What exactly are they doing?

ZUCKERBERG: Well, it’s different things in each category. For policing harmful content, I think it should start with transparency of every major internet service about - take any - every single category of harmful content.

And I think you should have to, basically, report what the prevalence of that? So what percent of the content on your service is, you know, inciting violence, for example, or hate speech?

And then you should have to report how much of that you identified proactively and built systems to go get and be able to manage - versus how much of it did someone in your community have to tell you about, and you had to deal with it reactively? So that’s the first step, is transparency.


Even FCC commissioner Brendan Carr took exception to this:



Related: Facebook accidentally put hidden messages like 'Big Brother is Watching' and 'The Masons Were Here' in 'tens of thousands' of VR controllers

Here’s the long form of the interview, which, knowing how the far left media works, may or may not have been edited or had multiple takes done of certain answers to protect Zuckerberg from looking too much like an idiot.

A short version of the interview, which aired on Good Morning America, can be found on the ABC YouTube channel.




Related Articles:

Google has been LISTENING and RECORDING everything you say in your own home through secret NEST microphones

Pretty Much the Weakest Argument Against Conspiracy Theories Ever


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

U.S. Department Of Health And Human Services Agency Report Confirms Glyphosate Cancer Risks
April 16 2019 | From: NRDC / Various

EPA Official Once Tried to Kill It, But the Nearly-Dead ATSDR Report Returns to Haunt Monsanto and Bayer.



Last week a public health agency of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS), the Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry (ATSDR), released the long-awaited Draft Toxicological Profile for Glyphosate. And, it supports and strengthens the 2015 cancer assessment of another health agency, the International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC).

Related: Monsanto Loses Lawsuit And $289 Million & Bayer Needs More Than An Aspirin To Cure Its Monsanto-Sized
Headache


For many years, glyphosate - more widely known under its trade name, Roundup - has been the world’s most widely used herbicide.

GMO products from Monsanto - now owned by Bayer - like Roundup-Ready corn, soybeans, wheat, and cotton are specifically designed to be grown using glyphosate-based herbicides, which has driven its use and sales to about 300 million pounds annually in the US, with about 90% of that on farm fields, and about 10% on non-agriculture uses like lawns, gardens, golf courses, and parks and playgrounds.

The EPA Pesticide Office had succeeded in holding this report back for several years while it promoted its “no cancer risk” position.



Related: A peek behind the (toxic) curtain: Here’s why glyphosate is sprayed on food crops before harvest

In April 2015, now-retired EPA Pesticide Office official, Jess Rowland, tried to bury the ATSDR study, reportedly on Monsanto’s behalf.

Rowland told Monsanto’s Dan Jenkins, If I can kill this I should get a medal”, according to internal Monsanto emails that have now been made public.

Jenkins subsequently emailed his Monsanto colleagues:


“I doubt EPA and Jess can kill this; but it’s good to know they are going to actually make the effort now to coordinate due to our pressing and their shared concern that ATSDR is consistent in its conclusions w EPA.”

Unfortunately, ATSDR did temporarily back-burner its work on glyphosate, agreeing instead to pay close attention to the EPA’s 2015 cancer assessment, according to court documents (see US RTK Monsanto Papers).

Now, almost exactly two years later, the ATSDR’s Draft Toxicological Profile for Glyphosate has risen from the near-dead and is out for public comment.



Related: Bombshell Secret Documents Show Monsanto Knew About Glyphosate Link To Cancer Over 35 Years Ago + How You Can Have Yourself Tested For Glyphosate Contamination

At an impressive 257 pages, the fully-referenced report comprehensively covers both the cancer and non-cancer health effects linked to glyphosate exposure, the latter including adverse effects on reproduction and child development, and organ toxicity.

Bravo, ATSDR!

A pattern is emerging: non-industry experts (Zhang et al 2019) and health agencies IARC and ATSDR are finding a link with glyphosate and cancer; whereas, regulatory agencies are lining up with Monsanto and Bayer that it does not cause cancer, even when reviewing the same scientific evidence (see ATSDR Fig 2-13). 

More on the regulatory loopholes and failures in my companion blog, "Regulatory Failures = Superweeds and Glyphosate Cancers"



Related: Let's talk about the truth about Roundup


Glaring Cancer Risks

The most important thing to realize about the ATSDR report is how clearly it lays out the vast array of scientific evidence linking both pure glyphosate (rodent studies) as well as formulated glyphosate-containing products (in human epidemiologic studies) like Roundup as they are sold on the shelf to cancer.


Here are the major takeaway points:

The association with non-Hodgkin Lymphoma (NHL) cancer risk is stronger when the study is adjusted for more days of glyphosate use, longer study latency period (time since exposure for cancer to develop), which strengthens the confidence in the results;

All three meta-analyses (evaluation of many studies together) show a statistically significant link with NHL cancer (positive confidence intervals), with narrow confidence intervals which strengthens our confidence in the link with cancer. This is true even of the Monsanto-sponsored analysis (Chang and Delzell, 2016), which is almost exactly the same result as the conclusions of the World Health Organization’s global cancer experts (IARC 2016).

Most studies are strongly positive for cancer (non-Hodgkin’s Lymphoma), even if they are not statistically significant at a 95% confidence level. All would likely show a statistically significant link with cancer at a 90% confidence level.





Related: EPA Contradicts Its Own Research, Claims Roundup Poses No Risk To Humans & More

Since the ATSDR analysis, a more recent meta-analysis that includes the most recent update of the Agricultural Health Study (AHS) along with five case-control studies reported a statistically significant 45% (95% CI: 1.11–1.91) increase in risk of NHL cancers people most highly exposed to glyphosate-based herbicide products (Zhang et al 2019). (See image below, ATSDR Fig 2-4)




Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window

Related: Dying Man’s Lawsuit Claims Monsanto Hid The Cancer Dangers Of Roundup For Years

For Multiple Myeloma, ATSDR reports similar findings across available studies (See ATSDR, Fig 2-5, p 87).

Given ATSDR’s lucid and comprehensive review of the available epidemiology information, which evaluates the glyphosate-based products that people are exposed to under real-world conditions, it seems to me that anyone not affiliated with the chemical industry or defending the chemical industry would reasonably conclude that these products are linked to cancer.

One could argue how strong the link is, under what exposure conditions, or other aspects, but anyone should be able to see that there is a link.

Yet, regulatory agencies in the US and worldwide all seem to have adopted Monsanto’s position that there is no link, largely by dismissing studies that don’t meet the 95% confidence standard - a threshold that is not required by law and is rejected by experts:

"It is ludicrous to conclude that the statistically non-significant results showed ‘no association’, when the interval estimate included serious risk increases"  (See recent article by over 800 signatories published in Nature 2019).



Related: Glyphosate Herbicide And Toxic Heavy Metals Act Like "Binary Weapon" To Destroy Kidneys & Four Popular Companies Who Own The Medical Treatments For The Diseases Their Products Cause

In fact, the only two government agencies that seem to be able to provide an accurate scientific assessment of Monsanto’s carcinogenic products are the non-regulatory health agencies, ATSDR and IARC.

In response to the ATSDR report, a recently-retired EPA official from the Pesticide Office, Tina Levine, was quoted as saying,

“There does seem to be an effect. It’s not a large risk [of NHL] but it’s there based on what ATSDR has found… That said, consumer exposures are likely to be very different from professional applicators”.

Her comments are consistent with the conclusions of the EPA expert Scientific Advisory Panel that rejected EPA’s “not likely to be carcinogenic” classification, with some Panelists favoring the stronger classification of “suggestive evidence of carcinogenic potential” (see SAP report, p. 22).



Related: Heartbreaking Letter From Dying EPA Scientist Begs Monsanto “Moles” Inside The Agency To Stop Lying About Dangers Of RoundUp (Glyphosate) & Monsanto Funneled Money To Front Groups To Attack Anti-GMO Activists, Court Documents Reveal

So, how come the EPA Pesticide Office had all the same studies as IARC and ATSDR, but couldn’t find the cancer risk?

My previous blog details the split among EPA experts - with the Science Office finding cancer risk, and the Pesticide Office finding none.

In addition to many other failings, EPA and other regulatory agencies state that they are only focused on exposures to the general population from food, and specifically are not accounting for routine occupational exposures to pesticide applicators and others (despite the fact that the EPA Pesticide Office is charged with protecting everyone, including farmworkers and pesticide applicators). 


Non-Cancer Effects of Glyphosate and Formulated Products

ATSDR identifies scientific evidence in rodent studies and some human epidemiologic studies linking glyphosate with developmental delays, gastrointestinal effects including nausea and vomiting, kidney and liver toxicity, and eye irritation (ATSDR summary data p. 3-5).



Related: Microsoft Now Conspiring With Pro-Monsanto Front Group “NewsGuard” To Censor All Anti-GMO News On Mobile Devices

Long-term ongoing health studies conducted by the U.S. National Cancer Institute of over 20 thousand pesticide applicators report that human exposures to glyphosate-containing products is linked to an elevated risk of wheezing, chronic bronchitis, and allergic asthma (ATSDR, Table 2-5, p. 36; Ag Health Study)

Developmental risks reported in studies of farm families identify a link between parental use of glyphosate and an increased risk of neural tube defects, miscarriage, preterm delivery, and small for gestational age (ATSDR Table 2-5, p. 40-41).

Although many of these are not statistically significant at a 95% confidence level, they are significant at a 90% confidence level, which should be confident enough to generate regulatory action to protect families wishing to conceive.

ATSDR summarizes a number of animal studies of early-life exposure to glyphosate-based products that report developmental effects including testicular lesions, decreased sperm production, elevated abnormal sperm, decreased testosterone, and skeletal malformations (ATSDR, p. 14).



Related: Proven: Monsanto Knew The Dangers Of Its Chemicals But Kept Selling Them Anyway & Gene Editing Drives
Into Dangerous Unknown Territory



ATSDR Report Likely Underestimates Risks

ATSDR set a Minimum Risk Level (MRL) of 1 mg/kg-day based on a second-hand report from EPA of a Monsanto-sponsored rabbit study that reported gastrointestinal effects following exposure to pure glyphosate.

ATSDR used a standard 100-fold uncertainty factor to extrapolate from an animal study to humans, and to account for inter-human variability (for details, see ATSDR Appendix A).

Despite a mountain of good work, the ATSDR report will almost surely underestimate health risks for a number of reasons, including but not limited to:

Raw data and original studies not provided to ATSDR - Importantly, ATSDR didn’t have access to the animal studies (ATSDR, p. 12).

Instead, it unfortunately had to rely on EPA Pesticide Office summaries (called Data Evaluation Records or Reports, DERs) of Monsanto-sponsored studies.



Related: Monsanto May Soon Face A Flood Of Lawsuits From Cancer Victims Of Roundup Herbicide

That’s two steps removed from having access to the raw data, and two layers of unreliability in my opinion. It is also a reason why the epidemiology data is so important to take seriously.

Formulated Products More Toxic than Pure Glyphosate - Ongoing cell-based toxicity tests of the U.S. National Toxicology Program show that the glyphosate-based formulated products including lawn and garden products are more harmful than pure glyphosate, some by over 100-fold (NTP 2018).

Studies in young rodents conducted by the Ramazzini Institute reported that early-life exposure to both pure glyphosate and formulated Roundup mixtures resulted in modifying the gut microbiome in ways that may impair gastrointestinal health or have other long-term adverse health impacts (Mao et al 2018).

However, most of the rodent studies evaluated by ATSDR were on the pure glyphosate, which ignores all the chemicals in the formulated products like Roundup that people are exposed to in the real world, and that are likely to be more toxic.

Again, a good reason to take the epidemiology studies more seriously, since they are real-world exposures.


Related Articles:

New Zealand authorities ignoring the experts on health risk - report

Water filter glyphosate removal lab test results released by Natural News – see the full video here

Bayer Job Cuts to Include 4,500 Roles in Germany, Sources Say

Bayer AG Is Cutting 12,000 Jobs and Plans to Exit Animal Health Business

Herbicide used in weed killer Roundup is detected in several leading beer and wine brands including Coors Light, Budweiser and Beringer

Bayer shares sag after U.S. jury verdict in Roundup cancer trial

Natural Weed Killer: Get Rid of Weeds the Natural Way

How Will The Natural Health Products Bill Affect Us?

Twelve reasons to reject the Natural Health Products bill


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Russia Gate Goes Down In History As A Remarkable Display Of American Stupidity
+ Attorney General Barr ‘Right’ To Say ‘Spying’ Occurred On Trump Campaign
April 15 2019 | From: HerlandReport / Breitbart / Various

In case anybody wonders, we look like idiots to the Russians, not even being able to stop this embarrassing story of lies before.
Judicial Watch’ president, Tom Fitton even describes Russia Gate as a Deep State coup attempt, an ongoing mutiny against the people’s choice for President in the United States.



Senator Rand Paul demands the investigation of the Obama aides who pushed the Russia Gate conspiracy hoax to the public, and rightfully so, writes historian and founder of The Herland Report, Hanne Herland at Fort Russ News. Also published at The Institute for Political Economy.

Related: Bill Barr Tells Lawmakers the Full Mueller Report Will be Released Next Week with Color-Coded Redactions

Those responsible for spreading the hoax should be held accountable and tried for treason, defaming America’s democratically elected top official and tainting the nation’s reputation all across the globe.

Plus, making the American media outlets look like complete idiots, Europeans too, parroting as we do, whatever we find in the New York Times or Washington Post.

For years, we have been terrorized by CNN and New York Times, at it from morning till night, about president Trump’s “Russian connection” and “election meddling”.

Megyn Kelly even went to Russia to discuss “the meddling” with president Putin, who has been remarkably silent, the poor man, probably thinking that the Americans have gone completely mad.





AG Barr Confirms: Obama Admin Did Conduct ‘Unauthorized Surveillance’ of Trump Campaign




Related: Attorney General Barr reviewing conduct of Russia investigation





After all, Russia has an economy about the size of Italy, struggling internally with numerous issues, corruption for one, suddenly being elevated to “enemy of the world” in a media stunt that only ends up shaming the West so totally.

In case anybody wonders, we look like idiots to the Russians, not even being able to stop this embarrassing story before.

Russia Gate goes down in history as a remarkable display of Western stupidity. And the world is watching our brave new world fall to pieces.

The President of the United States, Donald Trump, has been smeared by the mainstream media for years, for the alleged Russian meddling@ #RussiaGate.



Related:
Trump Slams Dems For “Defrauding The Public With Ridiculous Bullshit” & The Shame Of America: Russia Gate Hoax And Mainstream Media Lies – Hanne Nabintu Herland, WND, Herland Report

As it turns out by the Mueller report, the whole thing was a hoax. Actor Jim Carey stated: “I cannot believe it, how could I have been so wrong about a president?

The answer is media lies. Allegations presented as facts create illusions of truth that faced with facts fall like card stocks.

Are we nothing but conmen, eager tsoroso lie and defame one another, publicly displaying to the rest of the world the lack of national responsibility and accountability that permeates the current American establishment and especially the Democratic party?

As it turns out, the whole Russia Gate and Russian Collusion story was a hoax that the mainstream media so willingly spread into all the corners of the world.

The Democrats’ massive impeachment attempts failed, American treachery and deceitfulness is now on display for all the nations to watch. It is such a shame and a demonstration of the decay of justice in America.

When something like this can be done to a President, what level of justice can ordinary citizens expect?


"In case anybody wonders, we look like idiots to the Russians, not even being able to stop this embarrassing story before. Russia Gate goes down in history as a remarkable display of Western stupidity. 

For years, we have been terrorized by CNN and New York Times, at it from morning till night, about president Trump’s “Russian connection” and “election meddling”.

Megyn Kelly even went to Russia to discuss “the meddling” with president Putin, who has been remarkably silent, the poor man, probably thinking that the Americans have gone completely mad."



Related: Trump Promises Justice Against Deep State: ‘This Was An Attempted Coup’

Even before this new nail in the coffin of the notoriously lying mainstream media, 77 % of the American public believes that the media does not speak the truth.

Wonder what it will drop to now.

How can the media editors live with themselves, knowing that the people fully understand what is going on?

Why are these incompetent editors, so eager to sell out in a system that obviously does not serve the public, not replaced by genuine journalists?

Probably because over 90 % of the mainstream media is owned by only 6 corporations, and the narrative presented serves the maximum profit gain of the multinational companies that own it.

The editors are sad PR puppets in a system that only serves the 0.1 % ultra-rich.



Related: CBS Reporter Calls Mainstream Press ‘Political Activists,’ ‘Propagandists’ + Max Blumental Proves
Western Media A Propagandist For War Criminals

The free press was established to report injustice, the abuse of power, corruption, enlighten the public on the complexities of reality, enhance knowledge and create better understanding between groups, – ideals long gone in the hedonist, extreme liberal New World Order.

Rogue market capitalist owners have turned our once free media into PR companies and propaganda outlets, who now work for the globalist financial capital owners and whatever benefits the hedge fund managers of the world, such as George Soros.

It is high time to question this development which sure is not democratic.

It has been a growing problem. The past years, and especially since the 1990s, we have seen a remarkable thrust of globalist capitalism.

It is an economic system that departs from the traditional, nation based model that was closely knit to the Protestant ethic, with ideals such as trust, dependability, worker’s rights, reinvestment, modesty and so on.




George Soros Donated Millions to Anti-Trump Research Firm Fusion GPS

One of the biggest names behind the Fusion GPS report, which targeted President Trump, turns out to also be one of the most radical leftists in America today.




Related: Barr to Release Mueller Report With Color-Coded Redactions


The new, rogue capitalism has reinforced an international economic model that benefits the ultra-rich in an unprecedented scale.

Globalism has produced a system in which 62 persons now own over 50 % of world assets, only made possible by the transnational business model that is dependent on open borders and refuses to redistribute wealth when outsourcing jobs.

Or pay taxes, for that matter.

Naturally President Trump, who wants to reinforce national borders, strengthen national sovereignty and force the ultra-rich to pay taxes to the US is fought by a media owned by his adversaries.

The battle ground and defamation process against the President was easily channeled through the mainstream press. Alas, it did not end so well.


Related Articles:

Report: Former Obama White House counsel may face prosecution in Mueller probe

Obama White House Counsel INDICTED for Lying to Mueller Team

Ex-FBI Lawyer James Baker Refuses to Answer Rep. Meadows When Asked if Multiple Trump Associates Were Targeted With FISA Warrants

Roger Stone Explains That Under Mueller and Comey the FBI Became a Criminal Organization

New Zealand Police Confiscate Airsoft Pellet Guns, Crossbow from Man Because He Supports Trump



Attorney General Barr ‘Right’ To Say ‘Spying’ Occurred On Trump Campaign.

Wall Street Journal columnist Kimberly Strassel went on Fox News Channel Friday to discuss her op-ed about Attorney General William Barr bringing accountability to questions surrounding the FBI’s behavior in 2016.



Strassel said Barr was “right” to testify that “spying” occurred on the 2016 Trump campaign - a comment the attorney general caught flack for saying.

Related: President Trump touts attorney general’s claim of spying on 2016 Trump campaign


"[Barr] was right to call this what it is. It is spying,” Strassel stated. “This was a party of one persuasion running an administration that was looking at a campaign the other party and that definitely merits the word ‘spying.'”

“There’s still some things in the FBI’s timeline that do not add up. It did not start its counter-intelligence investigation until July 31st, but we know that there were contacts between human informants and Trump campaign members prior to that date. Was any of that authorized? Was it legitimate?” she added.

Strassel went on to say Barr would also look at what leaders of the CIA and National Intelligence were doing at the time.





Related: Nunes Sends Criminal Referral Notification to Bill Barr – ‘Several Potential Violations’ in Russia Investigation


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Mystery: Assange Shouts ‘Resist’ And Yells Message To Trump Administration
& The Patriots Have The Deep State Exactly Where They Want Them, Mother Of All Bombs Incoming
April 14 2019 | From: Infowars / X22Report / Various

Carries copy of Gore Vidal’s “History of the National Security State” while being dragged out.



He was seemingly surrounded by guards for protection (from would-be shooters?) and photographed giving the thumbs up whilst winking... Perhaps all is not as it appears...


Julian Assange shouted “resist” and yelled a message to the Trump administration as he was dragged out of the Ecuadorian embassy by UK police.

Related: WikiLeaks’ Julian Assange Picked Up by UK Police (SERCO Operatives?)

“Resist… they must resist! You can resist! The UK can resist! Is this what the Trump administration has come to? UK must resist!” Assange is heard shouting.

Assange also appeared to be carrying a copy of Gore Vidal’s History of the National Security State.



Comment: This is a very interesting, evolving situation, and the only reason the Infowars article leads this - is that they have pointed out some key initial observations.

Some of the linked articles below could be accurate to a degree - but it seems that so far none of these writers have actually figured out the whole picture. For sure, there remains a lot to play out to this story yet.

However, the following X22 Report which analyses some important points, that this could be being run the the Alliance which is working to take down the Cabal (See below) - and that it has happened at a pivotal time which ties it to other important recent events...


Additional: Read about the Alliance that has been working behind the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.

Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing everything within it's power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the Illuminati down once and for all.

Related Articles:

Who Is QAnon? An Introduction To The QAnon Phenomenon #QAnon #GreatAwakening

Global Alliance Moving For A Checkmate Versus The Deep State





"RNN Senior Editor Paul Jay and the acclaimed essayist, screenwriter and novelist Gore Vidal discuss the historical events that led to the establishment of the massive military-industrial-security complex and the political culture that gave us the Imperial Presidency,”
reads a description of the book.

Furthermore, Goodreads lists the following as the top quote from the book, which may shed light on what message Assange was trying to send during his arrest:


"The Federalist Papers are very clear. Whenever one of the founding fathers and one of the people who was inventing the Constitution, they start to get apoplectic at the mention of Athens, the mention of Pericles, the mention of democracy.

They go on and on about mobs, and we don’t want this, and we don’t want that. We’re an oligarchy of the well-to-do.

We were at the very beginning, when the Constitution was made, and we’re even more so now.”



After Ecuador revoked his asylum status, the Wikileaks founder was arrested by British police on Thursday, apparently at the behest of the United States which charged Assange with computer hacking over a 2010 incident.

However, Assange is facing court in the UK first, but if he’s extracted to the US, he will face charges up to five years of prison unless more serious charges are added.


Trump Must Pardon Julian Assange

Julian Assange's arrest is now being celebrated by the MSM and the deep state. Paul Jospeh Watson exposes those that claim to stand for freedom, yet support the globalist agenda.





Related: Destroying the Illusion: NSA Q Proof / Assange 'Arrest'



The Patriots Have The Deep State Exactly Where They Want Them, Mother Of All Bombs Incoming

Republicans and Democrats are both cheering that Assange was arrested, these people have a lot to lose if he spills the evidence.



Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window - See the Defend WikiLeaks page here

Trump tweets out that Obama's White House attorney has been indicted and this is a big deal, and is the beginning.

Related: Rand Paul suggests granting Assange immunity in exchange for congressional testimony: Report





Related Articles:

Kim Dotcom: Charge Against Assange is a Trick to Make Him Agree to Extradition

Assange Arrest a Warning from History

Analysis: Deep state behind arrest of Julian Assange in last-ditch desperate effort to take down Trump with forced “confessions”

Will Trump Pardon Julian Assange?

How You Can Be Certain That The US Charge Against Assange Is Fraudulent

Jussie Smollett Allowed To Walk Free But Not Manning or Assange

The Gestapo Is Coming for Julian Assange

Julian Assange Arrested / Celebrating 100 Top WikiLeaks on Hillary Clinton Violations of the Law Sufficient to Put Her in Jail for All Eternity

Dem Senator Brags: Assange is “Our Property” Now

Hillary Clinton Laughs & Jokes at Arrest of Julian Assange



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Vaccines For Profit And Destruction & You Cannot Be Pro-Freedom And Pro-Forced Vaccinations At The Same Time
April 13 2019 | From: JonRappoport / Sott

"Whatever else modern medicine has wrought - and it has given birth to some impressive technical fixes and pinpoint trauma care - it has produced an unprecedented transformation of society into a universal hospital. "



"Medicine, Rockefeller motivated, makes disease, and then treats what it has made. There is no other commercial operation on the planet that exceeds its reach or profit. Create an endless problem, and then pretend to solve it: that is the secret mission."

Related: Medical Tyranny: If you question vaccines in Australia, you could be thrown in prison for 10 years

"Make the solution a new problem begging for more answers: that is the strategy. Reduce vitality and life-force: that is the objective. Control of the disabled is far easier than control of the robustly healthy.” (Notes on Vaccines, Jon Rappoport)

I point your attention to a recent riveting article, “Vaccines: Gateway Drugs by Design,” at Robert Kennedy, Jr.’s World Mercury Project. The author of the article is Kristina Kristen.

Kristen lays out a case for drug companies as creators of disease, via their childhood vaccines - which diseases they then treat with their own hugely profitable drugs. A closed circle.

Key quotes from the article:


"The main vaccine producing companies, the ‘BIG 4’, Merck, GSK, Pfizer, Sanofi, who make all our children’s vaccines, list the very illnesses now seen in epidemic numbers in our children, in their own vaccine inserts, as potential adverse effects.”

“The drug ‘treatment’ side of the equation, which is substantially more lucrative than the ‘gateway’ vaccine side the BIG 4 already monopolized, now also increased substantially.

The vaccine manufacturers began to capitalize on the known adverse effects of their vaccines, and have since created drugs for the ‘treatment’ side of the equation as well.

The lack of incentive to make safe products, which created the bloated vaccine schedule, became the gateway to the lucrative drug treatment side for these companies.

Today, the BIG 4 monopolize vaccines as well as the drug ‘treatments’ for chronic illnesses known to be induced by vaccines. First, vaccines push kids off the cliff, and then vaccine makers profit from ‘rescuing’ those they don’t kill.”

It is NOT A COINCIDENCE that the same BIG 4 companies, GSK, Merck, Sanofi and Pfizer, the largest manufacturers of vaccines in the U.S., happen to also produce the top grossing drugs that treat the most common side effects from their own vaccines: Autoimmunity, asthma, anaphylaxis, allergies, ADHD, rheumatoid arthritis, epilepsy, etc.

Vaccines, in fact, make up the foundation of the BIG 4 trillion-dollar drug skyscrapers [companies] built on treating the chronic illnesses they KNOWINGLY create with their vaccines (again, the adverse effects are written in their vaccine inserts).

One example among many: Advair, a drug for asthma, manufactured by vaccine giant GSK, which brought in $4.36 billion in sales, in 2017. Asthma is a common effect of childhood vaccinations.



Related:
Kids got 11 vaccines in 1986 and 53 in 2017… Why? The answer is all about Big Pharma profits

Author Kristen is documenting the charge that medical drug producers are essentially creating the diseases they then “treat” with their own medicines.

From my own experience with hospitals and doctors, I can say that, for the most part, medical personnel are unaware of any possible connection between vaccines, childhood diseases, and drugs purportedly designed to reduce the effects of the vaccines.

These doctors and nurses would never believe there is a closed circle based on profits.

But there is more. The drugs used to treat the adverse effects of vaccines cause their own expanding disease outcomes - and then new drugs are developed to treat these illnesses.



Related:
Facebook Bans All Content On Vaccine Awareness, Including Facts About Vaccine Ingredients, Vaccine Injury And Vaccine Industry Collusion & Mark Zuckerberg Goes All-In With The Deadly Vaccine Industry In Sweeping New Plan To Censor All Posts That Question Big Pharma’s Vaccine Dogma

The federal government, in collusion with media networks, has covered up the disastrous death numbers resulting from medical care. For years I’ve been documenting the research that reveals those numbers.

For instance, see “Is US Health Really the Best in the World?” This review was written in 2000 by Dr. Barbara Starfield, at the time a revered expert at the Johns Hopkins School of Public Health.

It was published on July 26, 2000, in the Journal of the American Medical Association. Starfield concluded that, every year in the US, the medical system killed 225,000 people.

That would be 2.25 million deaths per decade. In a 2009 interview, Starfield told me that 225,000 was a conservative estimate…


Related Articles:

Skyrocketing statistics show vaccine exemptions on the rise – the truth about vaccine dangers is spreading like wildfire

New York Supreme Court overturns Rockland County’s “medical martial law” ban on unvaccinated children; medical fascist Ed Day rebuked by common sense

Secret to Shutting Up Anti-Vaxxers Revealed

Stunning: Vaccines cause 4 to 5 times worse outcomes for measles, scientific study reveals

Arizona SWAT team smashes door, raids mother’s home at gunpoint over child having a fever… medical tyranny gone wild in the USA

Unvaccinated Children Torn From Parents in Horrifying Late Night SWAT Raid

The little fascists of California

Vaccine Crime - The Best Interview

You Cannot Be Pro-Freedom And Pro-Forced Vaccinations At The Same Time

No, you don't have a "right" to demand that others are vaccinated.



It's hard to think of a more fundamental right than the right to determine what happens to one's own body. Forcing someone to undergo medical treatment against their will violates this most basic of rights-the right to be free from physical assault.

Related: The true goal of immunization

Yet even some libertarians have jumped on the mandatory vaccination bandwagon, arguing that one person not taking every possible precaution against contracting a disease constitutes an assault against another. But this line of thinking requires some very tortured logic.


What Rights?

To begin with, nobody has a "right" to a germ-free environment outside of their own property (and good luck establishing one there). Proponents of vaccine mandates assert this "right" as if it is a long-standing social or legal norm, but it is not.

Human beings have been living among each other for millennia, and there has never been a widely asserted right to freedom from any and all pathogens at others' expense
.

There has, historically, been a widely held and asserted expectation of quarantine in the case of exceptionally dangerous illnesses. However, this is not at all what the proponents of mandated vaccines are calling for.

Quarantine is simply the demand that those who are already infected with a disease remain isolated in their homes or elsewhere until they are no longer able to infect others.



Related: Pediatrician Reveals Shocking Autism Discovery

This is profoundly different from what the pro-mandate crowd demands: that those who are not infected undergo a medical procedure to minimize their chances of becoming infected.

This is a much more intrusive demand and a potentially dangerous one.


Seriously? Measles?


Furthermore, measles-the scariest thing the mandate pushers can come up with-is not even on the list of federally quarantinable diseases. And rightly so, as it hardly qualifies as an exceptionally dangerous disease in the developed world.

Long before the vaccine was available, the mortality rate had fallen to around 1 in 10,000 cases, and it was widely considered to be a benign childhood illness that nearly everyone contracted.

So what has changed in the last few years?

How is it that all of a sudden, measles has gone from a disease not even worthy of mandatory quarantine for the infected to one that has generated near-mass hysteria and demands for the far more intrusive forced medical intervention against those who are not infected?



Related:
The Deeper Reason For Drug Ads On Television & The Pharmaceutical Industry Is Largely Run By Leftists, Stunning New Research Finds… Vaccine Mandates, Drugging Of Children, Chemotherapy And More


What About Herd Immunity?

In 2016, then-Libertarian presidential candidate Gary Johnson announced that he had reversed his position on vaccine mandates and now supported them. The reason? Someone told him about herd immunity:


"...I've come to find out that without mandatory vaccines, the vaccines that would in fact be issued would not be effective.

So ... it's dependent that you have mandatory vaccines so that every child is immune. Otherwise, not all children will be immune even though they receive a vaccine. .

Had Johnson looked just a little more deeply, he would have learned that the theory of vaccine-induced herd immunity is not as solid as its proponents would have us believe.

The idea was first put forward by A.W. Hedrich in 1933, based on his observation that measles outbreaks were suppressed when 68 percent of children had contracted the measles virus.

This observation had nothing to do with vaccination, as the measles vaccine had not even been developed yet.



Related: Measles being spread by vaccinated children, research confirms

This is an important distinction for a few reasons. Perhaps most importantly: While the immunity conferred by contracting measles lasts a lifetime, that conferred by vaccination does not.

What this means is that a 90 percent vaccination rate do
es not equate to 90 percent of the population having immunity. As Dr. Russell Blaylock says:


"It was not until relatively recently that it was discovered that most of these vaccines lost their effectiveness 2 to 10 years after being given.

What this means is that at least half the population, that is the baby boomers, have had no vaccine-induced immunity against any of these diseases for which they had been vaccinated very early in life
.

In essence, at least 50% or more of the population was unprotected for decades.

If we listen to present-day wisdom, we are all at risk of resurgent massive epidemics should the vaccination rate fall below 95%.

Yet, we have all lived for at least 30 to 40 years with 50% or less of the population having vaccine protection.

That is, herd immunity has not existed in this country for many decades and no resurgent epidemics have occurred. Vaccine-induced herd immunity is a lie used to frighten doctors, public-health officials, other medical personnel, and the public into accepting vaccinations. ”

The larger point, though, is that even if the idea of vaccine-induced herd immunity did hold up to scrutiny, it would at best be a positive externality-not something that anyone has the right to demand from others at gunpoint.



Related: Adam Schiff, who aggressively pushed “Russian collusion” hoax, is now pushing Big Tech to censor all vaccine truth


But What about Those Who Cannot Be Vaccinated?

Others have written more comprehensively on the fallacy of using medically fragile people as an excuse for forcing everyone to be vaccinated. So I'll just say this: Nobody has an obligation to vaccinate themselves or their children in order to protect the most medically vulnerable among us.

My own daughter is intellectually disabled and suffers from seizures. Much of the outside world is a dangerous and scary place where she could easily be badly hurt or worse.

Yet I would never dream of using force to compel those around me to make the world safe for my daughter. Keeping her safe is my job and my husband's job-not everyone else's.



Related: Top Ten Facts About The Vaccine Industry That The Dishonest Media Refuses To Report

I doubt that those who promote this line of thinking have really thought through the implications of what they are asking for: requiring everyone to alter their lives and actions in order to accommodate the most medically fragile, at all times and in all spaces. What they are demanding has implications far beyond vaccines.


Adults Too?


Why should you and I and the vast majority of all adults in the US be exempt from the requirement to be completely up to date on all of the vaccines the CDC and its pharmaceutical industry cronies have decided we should have?

Are we not also committing aggression every day we go out in public, exposing others to diseases we do not yet have but might possibly contract?

Of course, if disease transmission is really what the proponents of vaccine mandates are worried about, then they should also demand that those recently vaccinated with live-virus vaccines not be allowed in schools or any public spaces. And if they aren't demanding this, then one has to wonder whether the transmission of disease really is their primary concern.

The bottom line, though, has nothing to do with the science behind vaccines, nor with herd immunity, nor competing claims about vaccine safety and vaccine harm. Nor does it have to do with how serious diseases like measles are or are not.

It is simply this: You do not have the right to force a medical procedure on another person.



Related: The great big Autism obfuscation

This is libertarian thinking 101. You are free to do whatever you wish with what is yours-and other people are not yours. You do not own them, and you do not get to make decisions over their bodies and their lives.

You may exclude them from your property if you wish, but you may not force them to undergo medical (or non-medical) procedures against their will.

You don't even have to be a libertarian to understand this.

The right to bodily integrity, to be free from assault, is the most fundamental of all human rights. If it is not protected, then no other rights even matter.



Related Articles:


Herd immunity: Myth or reality?

NYC Mayor De Blasio tells citizens: We own your bodies, and we can force you to be injected with anything we want

More nonsense: Vaccines and "herd immunity"

When it comes to vaccines what is herd immunity?

Herd Immunity: Flawed science & mass vaccination failures

Medical Martial Law rolled out in New York; unvaccinated citizens banned from all public places, including schools, churches, malls, sidewalks, public transit and voting locations



NYC Mandates Vaccination in Brooklyn Amid 'Measles Outbreak' (Fines & Imprisonment for those Who Refuse)

UPS partnering with drug giants to inject you with vaccines in your own home… pilot project a blueprint for nationwide vaccine mandates at gunpoint


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

So, Who Guards The Guardians? & The Enemies Of Free Speech Have Seized The Moment
April 12 2019 | From: GisborneHerald / BreakingViews / Various

The legacy of the Christchurch massacre for the victims? Most of us cannot truly comprehend.



The legacy for New Zealanders per se? Well, that’s a debatable issue. And six hundred pages of new gun control legislation ready to go right on queue?

Related: Late 2018 Jacinda Adern herself oversaw 2018 parliamentary committee that EASED gun laws

Commissioner Mike Bush tells us that the profile of armed police is a response to a terror threat alert which is at a high level.

Two heavily armed police have patrolled a dairy shop complex in Pt England where the local population is overwhelmingly Polynesian. Hundreds of kids walk past these officers, on their way to Tamaki College.

This police profile of vigilance is not far from the gymnasium I and many denizens of St Heliers and Kohimarama attend, so there is a double whammy so to speak: Police can impress the white population too.

Question is: To whom is this belated display of overaction to a one-off lunatic, a reassuring initiative by our guardians?




Max Igan: Censorship and the Christchurch Massacre

Max Igan joins me to discuss recent restrictions placed on his Youtube channel.

We get into why he got censored & what it means for all of us going forward.






Related: New Zealand Prime Minister: Gun Confiscation ‘Just The Beginning’ Of Things To Come



How often have we viewed, on foreign fields, excessive displays of armed police wandering the streets after a terror event? As I recall, the UK has been very strong on this sort of “show the public how vigilant we are” after the event.

In recent blogs I have confined my contribution to the question of who is to blame for the massacre.

Based on my experience as a former detective, AOS cop and former inspector in charge of Auckland Criminal Intelligence Section and VIP security, it is my opinion that the GCSB (Government Communications Security Bureau) in particular and to a lesser extent, police CIS (Criminal Intelligence Section) in New Zealand and police in Australia, have much to explain.



Related: Christchurch Terror Attack: Mass Censorship, Mystery Shooters, And The Globetrotting Lone Gunman

As the dust of that horrific event begins to settle, my concern is that bureaucrats who should have been aware of Tarrant but either were not, or were and did nothing, must be held accountable.

What concerns me now is that our guardians will make a play for more and more oppressive powers. They will try (and probably succeed in many instances) to convince the more addlepated among our elected representatives, that the way to prevent another Christchurch is to give them more power.

This is a false flag.

As Voltaire wrote:
Beware of the words “internal security”, for they are the eternal cry of the oppressor.

This is a great danger to the rights New Zealanders have enshrined in various pieces of legislation and convention.

In my view, our guardians failed and the level of failure is one of negligence. We don’t fix that with more power bequeathed to foolish people.


Related Articles:

New Zealand Gang: We Won’t Give Up Our Guns To Government

Iranian women's rights activist calls hijab display 'heartbreaking'

Christchurch Mosque Massacre

Eye witness interviews live from Linwood Mosque




The Enemies Of Free Speech Have Seized The Moment

Changes to the gun control laws are a mere trifle compared with what else might come down the legislative pipeline following the Christchurch mosque massacres.

There are an estimated 250,000 New Zealanders with a firearms licence. Of those, we can assume only a small proportion of gun enthusiasts will be directly affected by proposed changes covering military-style semi-automatic weapons.

Related: New Zealand False Flag Possibly 5 Shooters (1 Fake, 4 Real), John Podesta Role?

Changes to what we can say, write, read and hear, on the other hand, could threaten the essential nature and quality of our democracy.

Ultimately they would affect everyone. That’s why we should all be extremely uneasy about the pending review of laws governing so-called “hate speech”.

A review was due this year anyway, but Justice Minister Andrew Little says it will be fast-tracked following the Christchurch atrocities.

I don’t believe that Little is necessarily an enemy of free speech, but no one should be in any doubt that the climate is perversely ripe for a crackdown on freedom of expression.

Authoritarian ideologues on the far Left know that if there’s ever going to be a moment when New Zealanders can be persuaded to accept restrictions on what we can say, it’s now, when the country is looking for ways to atone for the appalling atrocities – although they were not perpetrated by us – on March 15.

Before that happens, we should insist on answers to some crucial questions. Here are a few:


In What Way Are Existing “Hate Speech” Laws Inadequate?

Respected legal academics point out that we already have laws that prohibit statements inciting racial disharmony or hostility against minorities. There is nothing to indicate these laws have failed. In fact they are rarely used, which suggests the problem is not as pressing as hate-speech lobbyists claim.



Related: Max Igan Analysis Of New Zealand False Flag Event In Christchurch & New Zealand False Flag – What They
Don’t Want You To See

The Human Rights Commission is concerned that current laws cover race, colour and ethnicity but not religion, which means they don’t protect Muslims or other religious minorities. But that should be easily fixed without imposing wider restrictions on speech.


How Would Tougher Speech Laws Have Prevented the Killings?

That isn’t clear. They might limit the rights of ordinary New Zealanders while having no effect on fanatics like the Christchurch shooter (who, we shouldn’t forget, was Australian). And they would risk driving potentially dangerous opinions underground, where they are harder to counter.

This latter point was made to me last year by Professor Paul Spoonley when I interviewed him for an article on “hate speech” in The Listener. Spoonley, an authority on extremism, questioned the need for tougher laws and described himself as an ardent proponent of free speech. He now seems to have had a change of heart – as he’s entitled to do, although it seems a sharp about-turn.


How is Hate Speech to be Defined, Especially When One Person’s Hate Speech is Another’s Legitimate Expression of Opinion?

And crucially, who will do the defining?

One person who can be expected to wield influence over the review is the Chief Human Rights Commissioner, Paul Hunt.

Never heard of him? No, many New Zealanders haven’t. He was appointed last October as part of a cleanout that followed a sexual harassment scandal at the Human Rights Commission.



Related UK: Hate Crime Police Investigate Man’s “Thinking” After He Criticized Transgenderism

Hunt was recruited from Britain. He is an academic, a human rights careerist and an activist whose adulatory entry in Wikipedia makes much of his work with the United Nations. He is also aligned with the Corbynite socialist Left of the British Labour Party.

Is he someone we should entrust with the job of influencing what New Zealanders can be permitted to read, hear and say? I don’t think so. Not for a moment.


Could a Review Result in Police Being Given Power to Launch What Would Effectively be Political Prosecutions Against People for Saying the Wrong Things, as Happens in Britain?

That would be a radical extension of police powers and one that New Zealanders must oppose.



Related: NZ Massacre Reveals Mainstream Media’s Double Standard In Covering Religious Attacks & The Christchurch Shooting And The Normalization Of Anti-Muslim Terrorism


Most Important, How is the Notion of Hate Speech to be Reconciled With Freedom of Expression – A Fundamental Tenet of Democracy, and a Right Guaranteed to New Zealanders under the Bill of Rights Act?

New Zealand is internationally admired as a liberal, open democracy. We pride ourselves on respecting freedom of religion, and never more so than in the weeks since the Christchurch shootings.

Freedom of speech is part of the same bundle of rights, but paradoxically we are now being told that one freedom must be restricted to protect another. It doesn’t add up.

The enemies of free speech want to contain political debate within narrow parameters dictated by them, and are prepared to exploit a tragedy to achieve that goal.

They must not be allowed to get away with it
.


Related Articles:

John Podesta Linked To New Zealand’s Jewish Sayanim Gang, Who Control NZ Freemason Police Departments and Nationwide Pedophile Network?

New Zealand - Multiple Players And Identifying the Cointel Narrative

The Consequences of a Tragedy


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Someone Else’s Country - The Neoliberal Revolution In New Zealand
April 11 2019 | From: AlisterBerry

The Globalist's test case trial of Corporatisation: In the early 1980s a group of free market economists came to dominate policy at the New Zealand Treasury.



With the election of the Labour Party in 1984 and the appointment of Roger Douglas as finance minister, the new right elite took power and began relentlessly and ruthlessly turning New Zealand into their vision of the model free market state.

"A coherent and comprehensive account of the years which will define this country for a century to come."
- New Zealand Herald.






Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

5G: The Big Picture & Brussels Becomes First Major City To Halt 5G Due To Health Effects
April 10 2019 | From: TakeBackYourPower / TakeBackYourPower / Various

Acclaimed author and philosopher Jeremy Naydler, Ph.D. is our guide as we explore what a full-scale deployment of 5G may mean for humanity at this critical time... and how we can help create a better alternative. Be sure to read his conclusion.



5G From Space: In November of 2018, the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) authorised the rocket company SpaceX, owned by the entrepreneur Elon Musk, to launch a fleet of 7,518 satellites to complete SpaceX’s ambitious scheme to provide global satellite broadband services to every corner of the Earth.

Related: New York City Deploying 5G Without Informed Consent of Citizens

The satellites will operate at a height of approximately 210 miles, and irradiate the Earth with extremely high frequencies between 37.5 GHz and 42 GHz.


This fleet will be in addition to a smaller SpaceX fleet of 4,425 satellites, already authorised earlier in the year by the FCC, which will orbit the Earth at a height of approximately 750 miles and is set to bathe us in frequencies between 12 GHz and 30 GHz.

The grand total of SpaceX satellites is thus projected to reach just under 12,000.



5G death from space

Related: 5G technology: A disaster waiting to happen

There are at present approximately two thousand fully functioning satellites orbiting the Earth. Some beam down commercial GPS (or “SatNav”), some provide TV, some provide mobile phone services, and some bounce radar back and forth to produce images for meteorologists and military surveillance. The Earth is thus already comprehensively irradiated from outer space.

But the new SpaceX fleets will constitute a massive increase in the number of satellites in the skies above us, and a correspondingly massive increase in the radiation reaching the Earth from them.

The SpaceX satellite fleet is, however, just one of several that are due to be launched in the next few years, all serving the same purpose of providing global broadband services.

Other companies, including Boeing, One Web and Spire Global are each launching their own smaller fleets, bringing the total number of projected new broadband satellites to around 20,000 – every one of them dedicated to irradiating the Earth at similar frequencies.


"What is really driving it is the creation of the conditions within which electronic or “artificial” intelligence will be able to assume an ever greater presence in our lives.”

Why is there this sudden flurry of activity? The new satellite fleets are contributing to a concerted global effort to “upgrade” the electromagnetic environment of the Earth.




5G In 5 Minutes





Related: Dr. Martin Pall: 5G Criminally Insane Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Fry Living Things




The upgrade is commonly referred to as 5G, or fifth generation wireless network. It has become customary in tech circles to talk about the introduction of 5G as involving the creation of a new global “electronic ecosystem”.

It amounts to geo-engineering on a scale never before attempted.

While this is being sold to the public as an enhancement of the quality of video streaming for media and entertainment, what is really driving it is the creation of the conditions within which electronic or “artificial” intelligence will be able to assume an ever greater presence in our lives.

In a previous article for New View(“Radiation, Robot Bees and 5G”, New View, 85, Autumn 2017), I described how the introduction of 5G will require hundreds of thousands of new mini mobile phone masts (also referred to as “base stations”) in urban centres throughout the UK, and literally millions of new masts in cities throughout the rest of the world, all emitting radiation at frequencies and at power levels far higher than those to which we are presently subjected.

These new masts are much smaller than the masts we currently see beside our motorways and on top of buildings. They will be discreetly attached to the side of shops and offices or secured to lampposts.



Related: Why Is The Minister Of Health Taking Advice About The Health Effects Of 5G From A Committee Influenced By
People With Ties To The Telecommunications Industry?


The 20,000 satellites are a necessary supplement to this land-based effort, for they will guarantee that rural areas, lakes, mountains, forests, oceans and wildernesses, where there are neither buildings nor lampposts, will all be incorporated into the new electronic infrastructure.

Not one inch of the globe will be free of radiation.

Given the scale of the project, it is surprising how few people are aware of the enormity of what is now just beginning to unfold all around us.

Very few people have even heard about the 20,000 new satellites that are due to transform the planet into a so-called “smart planet”, irradiating us night and day. In the national media, we do not hear voices questioning the wisdom, let alone the ethics, of geo-engineering a new global electromagnetic environment.


"But the question we should ask is whether we also want increasingly intense exposure of the natural environment and all living creatures, including ourselves, to more and more electromagnetic radiation.”

Instead, there is a blithe acceptance that technology must continue to progress, and the presence in our lives of increasingly “smart” machines and gadgets that each year become cleverer and more capable is an inevitable part of this progress.



Related: Los Alamos Research Explains How 5G Terahertz Waves Tear Apart DNA & Why We Must Stop The 5G Wireless Network

And who doesn’t want progress? Almost everyone loves their sleek and seductively designed phones, pads and virtual assistants, and regards them as an indispensible part of their lives.

But the question we should ask is whether we also want increasingly intense exposure of the natural environment and all living creatures, including ourselves, to more and more electromagnetic radiation.

Is it likely that this does not entail any adverse health consequences, as both government and industry claim?



The colours indicate the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of mobile phone radiation. The SAR is the amount of power absorbed by tissue, measured in watts per kilogram, shown here with red as the highest value, blue the lowest



If the electromagnetic waves that connect our smartphones to the Internet travel through brick, stone and cement, then what happens when these same waves encounter our bodies?

Be assured that they do not just bounce off us! They travel into the human body.

The degree to which they are absorbed can be precisely measured in what is called the Specific Absorption Rate, expressed in Watts per kilogram of biological tissue.

When we fill our houses with Wi Fi, we are irradiating our bodies continuously.

When we hold a smartphone to our ear, electromagnetic waves irradiate our brains (fig.2). Do we really believe this could be completely harmless?

Waves and Frequencies

At present, mobile phones, smartphones, tablets, most Wi Fi and so on all operate at under 3 GHz in what is called the “microwave” region of the electromagnetic spectrum.

If you could see and measure their wavelengths, you would find that they are many centimetres (or inches) long. A smartphone operating at 800 MHz, for example, sends and receives signals with wavelengths of 37.5 centimetres (just under 15 inches).



Related: 5G Network Uses Same EMF Waves As Pentagon Crowd Control System + NZ 5G Update: June 2018

Operating at 1.9 GHz, the wavelengths are 16 centimetres (just over 6 inches). Wi Fi uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band with 12 centimetre wavelengths (just under 5 inches long).

The introduction of 5G will entail the use of considerably higher frequencies than these, with correspondingly shorter wavelengths. Above 30 GHz, wavelengths are just millimetres rather than centimetres long.

The millimetre waveband (from 30 GHz to 300 GHz) is referred to as Extremely High Frequency, and its wavelengths are between 10 millimetres and 1 millimetre in length.3 Up to the present time, Extremely High Frequency electromagnetic radiation has not been widely propagated, and its introduction marks a significant step change in the kind of electromagnetic energy that will become present in the natural environment.



Frequencies and wavelengths of smartphone, Wi Fi and 5G

Related: Amazon looking to build “smart homes” with 5G – should you be concerned?

The reason why millimetre waves are to be used for 5G is that much larger bands of spectrum are available in the Extremely High Frequencies than at lower frequencies.

This means that there can be much broader “bandwidth”. Broader bandwidth means that larger quantities of data can be transferred and the speed of transfer of the data will be significantly faster.

One of the effects of this is that it reduces what is called “latency”, or time-lag, in the system, so it improves the quality of video streaming. But in so doing, it also enables a greater seamlessness between the data accessible from virtual sources and our perceptions of objects in the real world, as is required, for example, in Augmented Reality applications.

Greater seamlessness means that we more effortlessly inhabit the natural and the electronic worlds as if they were a single reality.



Related: 5G And IoT: A Trojan Horse + Wifi Linked To Cancer And DNA Damage, Says New Report: Here’s What To Do


"A single 5G transmitter/receiver will have a large number of tiny antennas, grouped together in one unit.”

One of the technical problems of using frequencies in the millimetre region of the spectrum is that, because the waves carrying the data are so tiny, being only millimetres long, they are less able to pass through physical barriers, like walls and trees, than are the longer waves of lower frequencies.

This is why it is necessary to have so many more new phone masts or “base stations”.

They will need to be spaced at 100 metres apart in cities because beyond this distance their signals weaken and are therefore less able to penetrate buildings, and connect with the devices inside.


As well as being more closely spaced, the 5G base stations will operate at much higher power than current phone masts, in order to ensure that the signals are sufficiently strong.



Qualcomm’s millimetre wave antenna array module for a 5G smartphone. It has four antennas that can accurately point towards the nearest 5G base station. Phones will have four of these modules, i.e. sixteen antennas

Related: "Smart City" Is Really Government Spying On An Unimaginable Scale

Because the wavelengths are so much smaller, the antennas transmitting and receiving them will also be much smaller than those of current phone masts and electronic devices.

A single 5G transmitter/receiver will have a large number of tiny antennas, grouped together in one unit. An array of just over a thousand such antennas measures only four square inches, so will easily fit into a small base station on a lamppost, while the smartphone in your pocket will probably have sixteen.


"But it also means that any living creature that gets in the way of such a concentrated beam will be subjected to a powerful dose of extremely high frequency radiant electricity.”

Both 5G satellites and 5G land-based masts will use a system called the “phased array”. In the phased array, groups of antennas are co-ordinated to radiate pulses in a specific direction and in a specified time sequence.


This Is Getting Scary... You Might Wanna Watch This Video Right Away





Related: Presidential Alert – Stop 5G or Lose Florida




This allows a concentrated beam of radio waves to be exactly aimed at designated targets, to enable signals to be sent or received. Because the beams are concentrated in this way, this adds to their power, which means they are able more easily to penetrate buildings.



Illustration of the absorption of Radio Frequency electromagnetic radiation in the Honey Bee.

At currently used frequencies between 2 GHz (top) and 6 GHz (middle), the wavelength is relatively large compared to the insect. But at 24 GHz, (bottom) the wavelength is closer to the insect’s size and the radiation penetrates further




But it also means that any living creature that gets in the way of such a concentrated beam will be subjected to a powerful dose of extremely high frequency radiant electricity.

A study published earlier this year demonstrated that certain insects, because of their small body-size, are particularly vulnerable to the millimetre waves of the higher frequencies to be utilised by 5G.

Other studies have shown that bacteria and plants are also vulnerable, and so also (as one might expect) are the skin and the eyes of animals including, of course, human beings.

As well as its ability to concentrate power in focused beams, phased array technology has a further complicating factor.

Either side of the main beam, the time intervals between the pulses are different from the time intervals between those of the main beam, but they may overlap each other in such a way as to produce extremely rapid changes in the electromagnetic field.

This can have a particularly detrimental effect on living organisms, because instead of the radiation decaying when it is absorbed into living tissue, it can be re-radiated within the body.


The moving charges streaming into the body effectively become antennas that re-radiate the electromagnetic field and send it deeper into the organism.

These re-radiated waves are known as Brillouin precursors, named after the French physicist Leon Brillouin, who first described them in 1914.

Research suggests that they can have a significant and highly detrimental impact on living cells.



The Un-Reassuring Assurances of Government and Industry

The Government body charged with protecting public health, Public Health England, advises us that there is no convincing evidence that Radio Frequency radiation (which radio, television, mobile phones, smartphones and 5G all use) has any adverse health effects on either adults or children.

This advice is based on the recommendations of a supposedly independent body called AGNIR (Advisory Group on Non-Ionising Radiation), which produced a report in 2012 on the safety of Radio Frequency radiation.



Related: 5G Network Being Pushed On The Public With Zero Concern For Safety

The report stated that there was a lack of “convincing” and “conclusive” evidence for any adverse health effects.


"It was like giving a blank cheque to the telecommunications industry to move on into the higher frequencies, without any heed for the consequences.”

It turns out that far from being independent, AGNIR has a high proportion of members with blatant conflicts of interests, and their report distorted or simply left out of account evidence that should have compelled them to reach the opposite conclusion to the one they arrived at.

In a forensic analysis of the report, the environmental health researcher, Sarah Starkey, makes it clear that only a wilful disregard of the available scientific evidence could explain its internal contradictions and apparent incompetence.



Related: What Parents Should Know About EMFs and WiFi & 5G Is An International Health Crisis In The Making

And yet it is the basis of current UK Government policy, allowing government to roll out 5G without so much as even a nod towards the need for prior health and safety assessment.

Health and safety simply do not feature in Government thinking, despite a veritable mountain of literally thousands of research papers demonstrating adverse health effects, which continues to grow at the rate of roughly 350 per year, on average practically one every day.


"Health and safety simply do not feature in Government thinking, despite a veritable mountain of literally thousands of research papers demonstrating adverse health effects.”

One of the reasons for ignoring this evidence in the hell-for-leather dash to create the 5G electronic ecosystem is the conviction in government circles that, unless we introduce it immediately, we will be “left behind” and our economic growth and competitiveness will be put at risk.

There is simply no time to consider the possible health consequences.

The National Infrastructure Commission, whose 2016 report, Connected Future, forms the basis of current Government policy, pushed this panicky vision of the UK falling behind other nations and urged the government to ensure that the new digital infrastructure is fully in place by 2025.



Related: Seven Reasons Why The Internet Of Things Should Scare You & The Internet Of Things Poses Human Health
Risks: Scientists Question The Safety Of Untested 5G Technology At International Conference


The NIC report repeatedly points out that the rewards of the “connected future” are to be measured in billions of pounds worth of revenue.

The mind-boggling amounts involved are well exemplified in a recent estimate that the global media industry alone stands to gain $1.3 trillion from 5G by 2025, not least because 5G will “unlock the potential of augmented reality (AR) and virtual reality (VR)”.


"The irony that the “connected” future is one in which dizzying profits stand to be made from technologies that disconnect us more and more from the real world is entirely missed.”

The sums involved are sufficient to explain why the telecoms industry has for the last twenty-five years done its utmost to ensure that research into the health effects of wireless technologies produce negative or inconclusive results.

Since 1993, the industry has financed a large number of studies, saving governments a great deal of expense and at the same time preserving the convenient illusion that the jury is still out on whether exposure to Radio Frequency radiation causes harm.

Earlier this year, The Guardian published an article citing research which showed that while 67% of independently funded studies found a biological effect of exposure to Radio Frequency radiation, only 28% of industry-funded studies did.



Related: Microwave EMF Science: Deliberate Claptrap Misinformation? + ElectroSensitivity - A Case Study

Industry-funded studies are almost two and a half times less likely than independent studies to find health effects.

The authors of the Guardian article explain that the telecoms industry doesn’t need to win the scientific argument about safety, but simply keep the argument running indefinitely by producing studies with results that fail to verify, or even better contradict, the research that does find adverse health effects.


"One of the most notorious is the mammoth, industry-funded “Interphone Study”, which managed to conclude that holding a mobile phone to the head actually protects the user from brain tumours!”

This study, which is full of contradictions and suffers from grievous design flaws, is often quoted as the most authoritative to date, while it has in fact been thoroughly discredited.

Nevertheless, the impression is maintained that there is no scientific consensus, and so there are not sufficient grounds for action to be taken. Needless to say, this suits Government just as much as it suits industry.


The Path to Total Immersion

Beyond the health effects there is another level altogether of what the roll out of 5G actually entails.

To gain a perspective on this, we should remember that it was not so long ago that the Earth’s electromagnetic field was undisturbed by human-generated electromagnetic frequencies.




5G Apocalypse - The Extinction Event





Related:
NZ 5G Resources




Before the 1880s, there were only two main causes of electromagnetism, both of them natural: the lightning of thunderstorms, which also set in motion the very weak, low frequency resonances known as Schumann Resonances, and sunlight.

Lightning and sunlight produce effects in specific, and very limited, parts of the electromagnetic spectrum.


"Beyond lightning and sunlight, the energies of the electromagnetic spectrum did not impact on human life, for they were entirely dormant.”

The very idea that such a thing as “electromagnetism” and an “electromagnetic spectrum” existed was not even entertained before the nineteenth century.

And, from the point of view of the pre-electrical age, the truth of the situation was that they indeed did not exist as a factor of experience. Beyond lightning and sunlight, the energies of the electromagnetic spectrum did not impact on human life, for they were entirely dormant.



Natural background electromagnetic radiation, showing frequencies in cycles per second

Related: CIA MKULTRA Mind-Control Meets 5G in Next Generation of Cell Phones

In that pre-electrical world, both lightning and sunlight were regarded with a certain degree of awe, as natural phenomena expressive of powers greater than anything human beings could muster.

In antiquity both were associated with gods – lightning with violent storm gods invariably with Underworld associations, like Seth, Baal and Zeus; and sunlight with sublime solar deities like Ra, Shamash and Apollo.

In the later Judaeo-Christian era the widespread sense that these phenomena had a spiritual source persisted, with lightning regarded as expressive of the divine wrath, and the light as the garment of the cosmic Logos.

We touch here a deeply felt relationship to nature that has been largely eroded in the centuries since the Scientific Revolution.

In the course of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, both lightning and light were stripped of their spiritual numinosity, thereby clearing the way for an entirely materialistic explanation of light, and an entirely technological approach to electricity.



Related: 5G is Part of Sterlizing the Goyim - Not Allowed in Israel

In the early days, the frequencies utilised were at the lower end of the electromagnetic spectrum. In the 1890s, the power lines that delivered the new mains electricity to factories and houses were standardised at either 50 or 60 Hz (or cycles per second).

When public radio broadcasts began in the 1920s, they were mostly in the longwave frequencies under 500 KHz (thousands of cycles per second).

As the century wore on, the frequencies used by new and improved technologies became higher and higher. In the 1930s and ‘40s, medium and shortwave frequencies (between 500 KHz and 1700 KHz) were utilised, while in the 1950s the Very High Frequencies (VHF) of 30 – 300 MHz (or millions of cycles per second) were employed for both radio and TV broadcasting.


"With frequencies of up to 70 GHz envisaged, yet more power will be required for effective transmission of its millimetre waves."

During World War II, a method was discovered for generating even higher frequencies, between 3 and 30 GHz (thousands of millions of cycles per second), which became the basis for radar.



Related: Experts warn about harmful side effects of 5G, which requires 20,000 satellites beaming narrow-band signals to Earth that can “fry the cells of all living things”

With each escalation in frequency, more power was required to transmit the radio waves. The advent of mobile phones, smartphones and Wi Fi, brought into widespread use the Ultra High Frequency (UHF) part of the spectrum (300 MHz – 3 GHz) for signal transmission.

Transmission in these frequencies demands more than ten times the power needed for VHF transmission. Today, poised at the threshold of the new era of an Extremely High Frequency “electronic ecosystem”, with frequencies of up to 70 GHz envisaged, yet more power will be required for effective transmission of its millimetre waves.

Then the natural environment will be fully saturated with an invisible fog of radiation.



Human induced electromagnetic radiation, showing frequencies in cycles per second

Related: Documentary explores Electromagnetic Hypersensitivity Syndrome

In this brief historical sketch, we see higher and higher frequencies forming the basis of each new technological innovation. As each one of the new technologies was introduced, human beings became a little more disassociated from the natural world.

Consider how this happened. From the 1890s onwards, the supply of mains electricity to homes, schools, hospitals and factories caused a revolution in living standards, liberating humanity from subservience to nature’s cycles of day and night, summer and winter, by giving access to a new source of light, warmth and power.

Then, in the 1920s, radio enabled people to communicate over vast distances, and brought the voices of kings and politicians, singers and poets into our living rooms, even though they were not physically present.

In the 1950s, television intensified the experience of an absent yet present world, conveyed by the moving image. I remember as a child the addictive quality of television: one is drawn out of oneself and away from awareness of one’s immediate surroundings into the fascinating world of images on the screen.


"Smartphone addiction both dislocates users from their own inner centre of stillness, and at the same time disconnects them from the natural environment
."

With the advent of the smartphone, the trend towards addictiveness was greatly strengthened, partly because the screen became a portable interface with the Internet, and partly because of the deliberately exploitative policies of Facebook, Google and others to hook people into an addictive relationship to their devices.



Related: The Oxidative Effects of Wireless Radiation

5G will further accentuate this tendency for people to lose themselves, and it will weaken even more their relationship to nature, for it promises to make advanced immersive Virtual Reality accessible to all.

While VR headsets have been commercially available for some time now, VR is still in its infancy. The next development in VR technology is to supplement the headset with a “haptic suit”, which enables the wearer to experience sensations of touch – pressure, warmth, hardness, softness, moisture and dryness – in virtual reality.


"5G will further accentuate this tendency for people to lose themselves, and it will weaken even more their relationship to nature, for it promises to make advanced immersive Virtual Reality accessible to all.”

Such opportunities for “total immersion” in virtual reality will lead to an increasing confusion as to which world we really belong: the electronically generated or the natural world.

The use of Augmented Reality, made possible through special helmets, electronic glasses, or contact lenses, that overlay virtual content onto the experience of the physical world, will add to the confusion, as the virtual is increasingly integrated within the real world.



Related: The Gloves Come Off On EMF / Mobile / WiFi Radiation + Understanding The Dangers Of The “5G” Rollout

People will become adjusted to regarding the virtual world as having as great a claim on their attention, their emotions and thoughts, as the natural world.


"The temptation will be to give their loyalty to that which not only undermines their relatedness to nature but also, through its assault on the imagination, has a corrosive effect on the inner life of the soul.”

The confusion will only be exacerbated by a huge increase in the use of 3D holographics that will give virtual entities the ability to incarnate electronically in the physical environment.

This is what the saturation of the world with extremely high frequency millimetre waves will enable. The waves themselves are only part of the issue: it is the technologies that ride on the backs of the waves and their impact on our inner life that should also concern us.


The Formation of the Global Electronic Brain

But if 5G promises to radically alter the experiential world we inhabit in these ways, there is something further that we must understand if we are to grasp what is really being prepared.




Smart Meter Hell in Sedona







At the same time as increasingly sophisticated technologies increasingly disconnected human beings from the natural world.


"...a network of electronic “intelligence”, global in extent, gradually emerged. At first it was under close human supervision, but it has steadily grown more autonomous”

Consider the difference between radio broadcasting and the Internet: the former is under tight human control and serves a very specific purpose, whereas the latter has established itself as a permanent, constantly available electronic infrastructure of undefined scope and reach.

What has been happening over recent decades is the increasing co-ordination of intelligence- endowed machines, so that they operate without need of human supervision.

The efforts now underway to create a 5G electronic ecosystem are the necessary precondition for developing and perfecting a global Artificial Intelligence network, which feeds on the very fast transfer of large amounts of information.

This global electronic “brain”, innocuously called the “Internet of Things”, is already impacting on our lives.


"But the reality is that The Internet of Things is itself the precursor to what has been called the “Internet of Thinking”, in which human beings will find themselves having to live in relationship to the vast global electronic intelligence.”

Through the Internet of Things, more and more things will be linked to the Internet and made “smart” by being given the ability to function autonomously.



Related: How Computer And Mobile Phone Use Affects Our Blood

On smart motorways your car will drive itself while you, wearing your VR headset and haptic vest, play interactive computer games in the back seat; and in your smart house your fridge will autonomously order more eggs, milk and cheese for you via a wireless connection with a supplier.

It will be active everywhere in our environment and we shall be obliged to interact with it in order to accomplish the simplest of tasks In the Internet of Thinking it is not hard to see the lineaments of an electronically supercharged totalitarian state, with unprecedented control over the minutiae of individuals’ lives.

The possibility of this happening will only be increased by the thousands of new mini phone masts and satellites irradiating every inch of the planet with millimetre waves.

For this is what 5G means: it means putting in place not just an improved telecommunications system, but rather a new “system of systems” – the infrastructure of electronic totalitarianism
.


A Curtain Drawn Against the Light


"For this is what 5G means: it means putting in place not just an improved telecommunications system, but rather a new “system of systems” – the infrastructure of electronic totalitarianismt.”

As our world is increasingly smothered by a fog of radio waves, microwaves and millimetre waves, it may seem that the gods of the Underworld have taken hold of humanity in an ever- tightening grip, drawing us towards the false lights – the illusory lights of the hell-beings and hungry ghosts that the Tibetan Book of the Dead long ago warned against.


"The electromagnetic energies that we have summoned, and which promised to give us new powers, now appear to be overpowering us.”

They are arrying us down into an Underworld realm of hellish entertainment and distraction, of illusion and disconnection from the reality that really matters – the reality of nature and the spiritual order that infuses nature, the reality of fellow creatures with whom we share our world, living in soil and sky and walking the Earth beside us.



Related: Hundreds of scientists issue joint warning about cancer-causing effects of WiFi, Bluetooth and wireless communications

We must ask: Does the Earth need an electronic ecosystem? Is it going to benefit in any way from being irradiated with millimetre waves? Is there actually any need at all for 5G?

Can we even remotely conceive that 5G is the answer to any of the pressing ecological, social and spiritual problems that face us today? We stand at a dreadful threshold, and yet surrender to despair cannot be the right response. What can we do?

First of all we can protest! There are campaigns against 5G that we can join [see below -ed.], there are petitions to sign, letters to write, and legal actions to support. The best place to begin is the “International Appeal to Stop 5G on Earth and in Space”, which has now gathered nearly 30,000 signatures [more than 50,000 now -ed.], including those of many health professionals, environmentalists and other scientists.

But as well as protest there is something further that needs to be done, and that is to bring spiritually informed understanding to the deeper significance of the global electronic brain whose emergence 5G will hasten.

To this end, we need to develop a clear perception of the moral quality of electricity, the better to recognise the kind of spiritual entity or entities that it serves.


"There is something further that needs to be done, and that is to bring spiritually informed understanding to the deeper significance of the global electronic brain whose emergence 5G will hasten”

This will empower us to break the spell that electricity and electronic technologies have cast over us, and it will enable us to form a more appropriate relationship to them.



Related: 5G Genocide & Ecocide: The Most Lethal NWO Conspiracy of the Third Millennium

One of Rudolf Steiner’s most helpful insights into electricity was his observation that it is light in a fallen, degraded state – light that has fallen beneath nature into the sub-natural realm – and that is why we must actively guard against an ever increasing dependence on it, for it threatens to drag us down.

This points to a third thing we can do, which is really the foundation of everything else. It is to rebuild our relationship to the light, which in its selfless benevolence and purity greets us every morning, and which, unlike the false and illusory electronic lights that would lead us into the Underworld, beckons us in a quite different direction, towards our essential humanity.


"It is to rebuild our relationship to the light, which in its selfless benevolence and purity greets us every morning.”

Through a deepened meditative relationship to the light, practised through the hours of the day and the seasons of the year, we can nurture a relationship to the inner light that is the source of all that is creative and good in the world. This inner light the Christian tradition knows as the cosmic Logos.

As the curtain of electrosmog is drawn across our world, we are presented with a sacred task that, come what may, we attend to all that the light has to give, for therein lies the divine Saving Power.


.

Brussels Becomes First Major City To Halt 5G Due To Health Effects

Great news. A Belgian government minister has announced that Brussels is halting its 5G plans at least for now - due to concerns about health effects.

The statement was made by Céline Fremault, the Minister of the Government of the Brussels-Capital Region, responsible for Housing, Quality of Life, Environment and Energy. From an interview last Friday, with L’Echo:

Related: ‘Telecom industry did no research on health impacts of 5G’


"I cannot welcome such technology if the radiation standards, which must protect the citizen, are not respected, 5G or not. The people of Brussels are not guinea pigs whose health I can sell at a profit. We cannot leave anything to doubt.”

- Céline Fremault, Minister of the Government (Brussels-Captial Region), responsible for Housing, Quality of Life, Environment and Energy

Ms. Fremault accurately identified that a 5G pilot project is not compatible with Belgian radiation safety standards (9 V/m, or 95 mW/m2 according to this online converter), and stated that she does not intend to make an exception. (In the Building Biology guidelines, the threshold for extreme concern is 1 mW/m2. However, many government agencies still only consider thermal effects, instead of the cumulative body of thousands of peer-reviewed scientific studies.)

Perhaps with Brussels heading up the European Union, and with one of the two major 5G appeals being addressed to the EU, officials there are better informed and motivated to protect themselves.

May support increase for Ms. Fremault and all officials who are hearing the call to sanity and prioritizing the people over the technocratic oligarchy.



Related: What Do Smart Meters And Vaccinations Have In Common? + Another Vaccine Dump


The 5G Situation in Summary

There is almost no question that a 5G-world would place us all under an unprecedented level of surveillance and control; granting unheard-of powers to soulless corporate algorithms.

That should be enough to permanently delete the agenda right there, filed under “useful technology gone bad.”

Though perhaps an even bigger question for our time is: does 5G pose a major threat to all biological life? The independent evidence overwhelmingly indicates that it does.

That is, unless you ask wireless industry sources, who own the FCC and who recently put out this CNBC propaganda/commercial in a thinly-veiled attempt to quash pushback.

The talking heads of the wireless industry even brashly admit - when forced, in a US senate hearing - that they have not done any safety studies… and they don’t plan to.

The fact is, hundreds of scientists are trying everything to sound the alarm.

One such voice, Dr. Martin Pall, the WSU Professor Emeritus whose research actually lays out the mechanism of how wireless radiation causes harm in our cells, calls 5G “the stupidest idea in the history of the world.”



Related: The Reasons Why We Can't Put Down Our Smartphones

However, within the corporatized halls of government, there is a well-worn pattern of voices of reason being drowned out by the frothed frenzy of technocratic corporations, who envision 5G as an unprecedented economic opportunity for the full-on commercial exploitation of reality.

But 5G pushback is starting to get viral. The compilation of truth assembled in videos on 5G like this one provides a much-needed reality-check on the shocking state of greed and depravation among the agenda-pushers in our world.

While it may sound stark, after observing this for a long while, to me it honestly now appears that those pushing this agenda are stuck in a type of hive-mind syndrome, so frenzied with dollar-signs and “us-versus-them” progress-obsessions that they are in a mode incapable of self-corrective thought. Or at the very least, incapable of seeing where all of this is obviously heading - for them and their kids, too.

When the industry sheep are being presented with an avalanche of scientific evidence for a catastrophe-in-the-making, and yet they refuse to listen and instead continue to tow the profit-pushing line, what becomes visible is the shadow-expression of utter disdain for life. That may sound harsh, but I encourage you to consider this deeply.

Perhaps it’s the global, unconscious ‘death wish’ that is at the core of the 5G push. Perhaps this is also at the core of the desire to darkly exit the human condition via AI and transhumanism. Apparently this thought-form sees its escape and salvation through technology, instead of through humanity and/or our connection with divinity.



Related: The Truth About Mobile Phone And Wireless Radiation: What We Know, What We Need To Find Out, And What You Can Do Now

In any case, to any sane human with normal values, the situation is indeed bewildering. Though once we get over the distress, we are called into a kind of soul-led response. Perhaps it’s first a resolve to be sovereign in our thoughts, and to be steward of our mind.

Then, inspiration and true Connectedness come when we become involved in manifesting the bigger solution - the choice of a positive future.

On this path, our root challenge is to remember: the power in our individual reality is truly within each of us, because who we are is not limited to the realms of duality and separation that we experience here.

If you’re reading this, be welcomed into the humanity protector’s club.


Where You Live: The Pushback Against 5G is Going Viral

While Brussels becomes the first major international city to block 5G, dozens of local governments have passed legislation to prevent or restrict 5G rollouts due to health effects. Environmental Health Trust lists legislation from 21 local governments in the USA.

And on March 13, the Portland (OR) city council demanded that the FCC update its research on the health and environmental impacts of 5G.



Related: Oliver Stone Warns Moviegoers: Beware Of Your Smartphones, 'This Will Be Our Undoing'

Websites such as EMF Safety Network, WhatIs5G.info and My Street, My Choice provides guidelines for how to put the brakes on 5G where you live.

This industry-promoted summary of state-by-state 5G legislative actions is also useful, and gives an insight into their modus operandi.

Below is a partial list of resources where you can learn more and get involved. We applaud everyone out there who is taking the reins and leading from their heart.


Brussels Story – Sources:

Brussels Times

L’echo [English translation here]

Bruzz.be [English translation here]


Scientific Evidence on 5G Harm

EHTrust: Scientific Research on 5G, Small Cells and Health

Dr. Martin Pall’s free e-book: “5G: Compelling Evidence for Eight Distinct Types of Great Harm Caused by Electromagnetic Field (EMF) Exposures and the Mechanism that Causes Them” (PDF, 90 pages)

Dr. Joel Moskowitz: “5G Wireless Technology: Cutting Through the Hype

Electric Sense: “5G Radiation Dangers – 11 Reasons To Be Concerned

Health resources summary from WhatIs5G.info

Health resources summary from TelecomPowerGrab.com

EMF interview by Luke Storey: Dr. Jack Kruse

SaferEMR: Summary 400 new EMF scientific studies, Aug 2016 to present (EMF in general)

Research from Magda Havas

News from Clear Light Ventures

Articles from BN Frank at ActivistPost


Grassroots Communities & Organizations

There are hundreds of organizations popping up everywhere. Here are several:

5G Space Appeal: An International Appeal to Stop 5G on Earth and In Space (sign it)

Environmental Health Trust

Parents For Safe Technology

Physicians For Safe Technology

EMF Safety Network (California)

Our Town, Our Choice

Americans For Responsible Technology

InPower Movement Episode 1: A Mass Action of Liability

Scientists For Wired Technology

Dr Jack Kruse (website & community)

“UN Staff Member: 5G Is War on Humanity” (6 mins, 2019)
Documents the UN Secretary General being notified of harm from 5G and wireless proliferation.


Related Articles:

Vault 7 Bombshell Just Vindicated Every Conspiracy Theorist: The CIA Can Spy On Anyone Through TVs,
iPhones, Smart Phones And Windows PCs + Former Secret Service Agent Dan Bongino Set To Release New Info On Obama: “It’s Going To Blow Wide Open This Week” & Clinton Campaign Manager Robby Mook Confirms He Knew About Wiretaps


WikiLeaks’ Vault 7 Shows How CIA Spies On Your TV, Phone, PC, Mac, And More + Napolitano: Trump First
President To Confront Deep State



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

"Under The Carpet" New Zealand Hidden History Documentary
April 9 2019 | From: MatthewApplegate

The 'powers that be' do all they can to hide real history using the New Zealand equivalent of the US Smithsonian.



All evidence contrary to 'established fact' is ignored, debunked, destroyed, or hidden away. This pattern is repeated all over the world. The Vatican hides her library of treasures. The Egyptians claim the Great Pyramids were built by slaves pulling ropes. Noah's Ark is 'just an old myth'.

Related: The White Tangata Whenua + Maori Legend: Blonde Mummies Of The South Pacific

The quest for the earliest inhabitants of New Zealand continues with Gabi Plumm’s search under the layers of lava, volcanic ash, sand and embargoes to discover the truth about discarded history, destroyed archaeological records and hidden data that show just howmuch information is being kept from New Zealand’s people.

And who is doing the hiding?

This fascinating documentary takes us back to our planet’s oldest people: their origins and their incredible voyages across oceans and seas, the natural catastrophes that have wiped out whole nations leaving barren earth barely fit for habitation, the dogged survival techniques of people forced to become warriors to protect their families, and the resulting archaeological discoveries that remain to tell the tale.



Related: Disinterest In Pre-Maori History Stuns

But this history is being hidden from New Zealanders, they are not taught about their ancient ancestry; decisions have been made to keep the truth hidden and write only what suits a political agenda.

But, Gabi has uncovered information that can no longer be suppressed, will she be allowed to share it with the world, or will it, too, be removed from the shelves and filed under ’fiction’?

There is a world beyond what the history books tell us, and Gabi is determined to find out what should have been written and what has been left out.





Related Articles:


Megalithic New Zealand: Pyramids, Rabbits, And Megaliths Of Upper World And Underworld

The Historical & Current Situations In Aotearoa New Zealand

The Real Indigenous People Of New Zealand

Easter Island - Ancient Links With New Zealand Maori


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Mandela Effect: Did You Know There’s A Term For When You’re Totally Positive Something Happened Even Though It Didn’t?
April 8 2019 | From: MandelaEffect

It’s called the “Mandela Effect”, and a lot of people think it’s proof of an alternate universe.



The Mandela Effect is a theory put forth by writer and “paranormal consultant” Fiona Broome that shared false memories are in fact glimpses into parallel worlds with different timelines.


Broome says that the origin of her theory came out of a discussion about whether or not Nelson Mandela died in prison. Naturally, this happened backstage at Dragon*Con.

The website is a project of Fiona Broome. Fiona is a paranormal investigator with somewhat renegade ideas.

The “Mandela Effect” concept emerged from one of those quirky ideas.


“Many of us - mostly total strangers - remember the exact same events with the exact same details. However, our memories are different from what’s in history books, newspaper archives, and so on.

This isn’t a conspiracy theory, and we’re not talking about “false memories.” Many of us speculate that parallel realities exist, and we’ve been “sliding” between them without realizing it. (Others favor the idea that we’re each enjoying holodeck experiences, possibly with some programming glitches. In my opinion, these aren’t mutually exclusive.)

At this website, we’re using discussions to research real, alternate history and possible explanations for this phenomenon.

I started this website for additional research. I thought it was an interesting fringe topic (and potential book topic) for my spare time.

It’s turned into something much bigger."


Examples of the Mandela Effect

Below is a list of some of the most well-known examples, but this is just a fraction of what has been reported. Visit the Mandela Effect website where you can see people's testimonies posted of their experiences with these topics and many more.


1. Berenstein or Berenstain Bears?

Many people who visit the Mandela Effect website have fond memories of the Berenstein Bears books.



They read them as children, or family members read them aloud. It’s a cherished childhood memory. However, the books in this timestream are Berenstain Bears. A, not E, in last syllable.

That’s not what most visitors seem to remember.





The following are among the many memories people have shared, sometimes as part of longer comments.
The vast majority recall the books as Berenstein Bears.

In March 2014, JM said:



"I too clearly remember it as ‘Berenstein’ even though I never read the books. Why would anyone change that? Seems irrelevant."

 

Jennifer Shepherd said:


"I had overlooked the material here about people remembering the popular children’s books as being Berenstein Bears, not Berenstain Bears; I just saw that today and it blew my mind! I was a meticulous spelling nerd as a child and have ZERO doubt that the books the kids were reading were about the Berenstein Bears.

I tried to research Library of Congress and trademark info today, to see if maybe there had at some point been a changeover due to multiple parties using variations of the name. Nope, the official records state that the series was always Berenstain, after the very real last names of the authors (Berenstain.)"

 

2. 50 or 52 United States?

Many people recall the United States including 51 or 52 states, not 50.

The interesting point is that the memories are fairly consistent, and include Puerto Rico as a state. One teacher suggested this is a common misunderstanding. The daughter of a teacher said that she clearly recalls her mother teaching students that the 52 states included Puerto Rico.

So, is this simple confusion or a glimpse into alternate geography in another timestream?

One respondent listed the 52 states as he recalls them, including Puerto Rico and D.C.:

1. Alabama, 2. Alaska, 3. Arizona, 4. Arkansas 5. Colorado 6. California, 7. Connecticut, 8. Delaware, 9. Florida, 10. Georgia, 11. Hawaii, 12. Illinois, 13. Indiana, 14. Idaho, 15. Iowa, 16. Kentucky, 17. Kansas, 18. Louisiana, 19. Massachusetts, 20. Maryland, 21. Mississippi, 22. Maine, 23. Missouri, 24. Michigan 25. Minnesota, 26. Montana, 27. New Jersey, 28. New York, 29. North Carolina 30. New Hampshire, 31. Nevada, 32. Nebraska, 33. North Dakota 34. New Mexico, 35. Oklahoma, 36. Ohio, 37. Oregon, 38. Pennsylvania, 39. Puerto Rico. 40. Rhode Island 41. South Carolina, 42. South Dakota, 43. Tennessee, 44. Texas, 45. Utah, 46. Virginia, 47. Vermont, 48. Wisconsin, 49. West Virginia, 50. Washington, 51. Wyoming, 52. Washington DC

So, I think the question really is: In an alternate timeline, did Puerto Rico already become a state? Or, did the District of Columbia become one, separately or as well?

Or, is this simply confusion over districts, territories, and states?


3. Nelson Mandela – The Memories, So Far

The previous post, Nelson Mandela Died in Prison? triggered so many, varied responses, it’s difficult to find the Mandela memories in the 150+ comments that followed.

Here are some of them, as of February 2013. (If you leave a comment at this post, do me a favor: Keep it about Nelson Mandela memories. I’m in the process of separating the various memories into individual posts, for people interested in stories related to just one kind of memory.)

Perry Were noted:


"Both my wife and I remember Nelson Mandela dying in prison. Included in this memory are the funeral snippets on TV and a legal flap over book rights involving his Widow."

C. A. Low said:


"I have experienced this many times. Not only Mandela’s death, but also the death of Muammar Gaddafi several years ago…"



4. Patrick Swayze – Alive and Hospitalised?

In late January 2012, stories started emerging about Patrick Swayze being hospitalized. Is that due to confusion over recent interviews with his widow, Lisa?

Is this because his classic movie, Point Break, is - according to the Huffington Post - getting a reboot? I don’t see any news stories related to his brother, actor Don Swayze.  So, it’s not that the two were confused.

When I checked Google Insights, the following terms were listed in the current Rising Searches.





When the term is indicated as “Breakout,” it means it has at least a 5000% increase in searches, relative to the recent past.

Currently, most of those searches are coming from: Canada, USA, UK, Ireland,  Australia, Portugal and Hungary, in that order.

Is there a logical explanation for this quirky surge?  I’m looking for a logical explanation.

It might simply be the confusing headline from Fox -“Patrick Swayze’s widow Lisa Niemi blasts tabloids for coverage of husband’s cancer” - which didn’t make it clear that he was hospitalized over two years ago.

That seems the most likely explanation. However, I’m also wondering if this is Mandela Effect again.  I’d like to think there’s a parallel world in which Patrick Swayze is alive and well, even if - in that reality - he’s briefly in the hospital, hopefully for something minor.

Patrick Swayze, the talented actor, dancer and singer, was born on August 18, 1952  and left this world on September 14, 2009.

His acting career was highlighted by many wonderful films in which he starred, including Ghost, Point Break and Dirty Dancing.


5. Tiananmen Square and “Tank Boy”

Recently, visitors have mentioned Tiananmen Square and “Tank Boy.”

The following are some of the many comments by people who recall “Tank Boy” being run over and perhaps killed.

In September 2011, Angel said:


"I remember “tank boy” getting run over by the tank at Tiananmen Square. My husband doesn’t. We googled it and apparently he didn’t get run over. I have a very vivid memory though. I remember seeing a video of it. I remember learning this in 7th grade history."

Joy, Marna Ehrich, and Sez agreed.

In August 2012, Bree said:


"I remember TANK BOY getting run over. My partner and myself were talking about Tiananmen Square and tank boy. I mentioned how horrible it was that he was killed, my partner had no memory of that and thought I was crazy. He had to go on YouTube to show me that he lived. As i watched i had no recollection of that event of him living."

James agreed:


"Same here I remember seeing blood on the street after the tank rolled over him and how the backlash nearly caused communism to fall apart in china and then they switched to the capitalistic command economy. This is so weird."

 

6. Curious George and Dual Memories

In real life, almost everyone I’ve surveyed remembers Curious George with a tail.

Most usually know he was a chimp (though some books said he’s a “little monkey”), so he shouldn’t have had a tail… but they have specific memories of him with a tail.

That’s an interesting alternate memory. I did a fairly thorough search of Google Images, and found nothing showing Curious George with a tail. (If I overlooked an actual Curious George image with a tail, let me know.)

But, that’s not the only interesting (I almost said “curious”) thing about this particular memory.

It’s also the first where I’ve seen people pause and say:


"Wait. I remember him with a tail, but I can also see him without one. How can that be…?”

In the past, I’ve referred to those as “dual memories."

People have reported many dual memories at this site. That’s when two conflicting memories - nearly identical in most (but not all) respects - seem to be competing with each other.

Sometimes, both memories seem equally “real.” More often, people report the other memory as something vague, distant, or less real. However, they’re adamant that they have both memories, and can’t explain why.

So, I’m interested in your memories of Curious George. I’m also interested in how widespread the dual memory phenomenon might be.

In my real-life surveys, the Curious George question created a dramatic spike in bewildered responses involving dual memories.

And, in one case, pausing to reflect on the Great Pumpkin issue, the person realized he had dual memories for that Halloween special, as well: One in which Linus fell asleep and missed the Great Pumpkin, and one in which Linus was alone when he saw the Great Pumpkin.



7. Forrest Gump

If you recall the famous line from the Forrest Gump movie, which of the following did Forrest say?

a. “Life was like a box of chocolates…”

b. “Life is like a box of chocolates…”

The answer in this reality is A: “Life was like a box of chocolates…”. In my original response to this issue, I said:


"Forrest Gump’s accent is fairly heavy, and he doesn’t always enunciate clearly, but - the the film clip - I hear “was” far more than “is.”"

Here’s that clip from the film:





Also refer to Wikipedia ("Life is like a box of chocolates":


Etymology

Appeared in the 1994 film Forrest Gump, when the lead character Forrest Gump (played by Tom Hanks) says “Mama always said life was like a box of chocolates. You never know what you’re gonna get.” [Emphasis added.]

The book Norwegian Wood by Haruki Murakami, first published in Japanese in 1987, and in English in 1989, has the following: “Just remember, life is like a box of chocolates.” … “You know, they’ve got these chocolate assortments, and you like some but you don’t like others? And you eat all the ones you like, and the only ones left are the ones you don’t like as much? I always think about that when something painful comes up. “Now I just have to polish these off, and everything’ll be OK.’ Life is a box of chocolates.”

I’m not sure how much accent and enunciation, as well as pop culture references, have contributed to this apparent alternate memory. So, I can’t say this is a Mandela Effect issue.

However, one-for-one, everyone I’ve asked in real life about this quotation has been 100% certain the line was “Life is like a box of chocolates…”


8. Moving Countries: Does History Explain Alternate Geographical Memories?

A West Wing clip highlights some issues that make accurate geography challenging. While this was intended as a humorous scene, some people get lost in the political implications, and label this “liberal propaganda.”

In the context of alternate geography, political agendas (if there are any) aren’t the point.  History - and how it might continue to influence our maps - is relevant.

Here’s the video:




So, I think we need to look at current maps for modern-day references, and then at old maps to see if our memories are based on them.

People have reported a variety of locations that have moved.

Maybe our “alternate” memories are based on older maps from childhood geography classes, and those maps have been corrected in recent years.

Let’s rule that out, and then dig deeper.

For example, related to our discussion of Sri Lanka’s location - where it is in relation to India - I’d double-check where it is on maps in this timestream.



The next is a topological map. So, we know where the country is, and what it looks like, on today’s maps in this timestream.

Then, I’d look at old maps of Ceylon, an earlier name for Sri Lanka. I like to go back as far as I can, and then work forward to the 21st century.





The first map is dated around 1535, by Claudius Ptolemy. To determine the suggested location, a north-south orientation is needed. First, look at where the mountains are, compared with current maps. Then, Indian geographical references must be used.




Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window

Based on the mountains, I’d guess that this showed Ceylon southwest of India. (Correct me if my reference points are wrong. I didn’t check the smaller islands indicated on that map, and they may suggest a different orientation.)

A map from around 1650 shows only the outline and geography of Ceylon, with no nearby land masses, except very small islands.  So, this map isn’t especially relevant to our study of Ceylon’s location in relation to India.

What caught my interest was how different the shape was, in this map.  I studied where the mountains are indicated, to get a sense of this map’s orientation. (This is one of several illustrations from Plantas das fortalezas, pagodes & ca. da ilha de Ceilão, a book by a cartographer and illustrator.)


Here’s another map from around 1700 – 1710, by Heinrich Scherer. Relative to India, this map suggests the southeast location indicated on maps in our current timestream. (This actual map came from the Maps Collection at the Library of Congress “American Memory” site.)



The really old maps are intriguing, but the earlier the map, the more questionable its accuracy.

It looks as if “alternate geography” memories of Sri Lanka’s location aren’t based on 20th century maps that were recently corrected. As far back as 1700 - and perhaps earlier - Sri Lanka (Ceylon) was represented at the southeast side of India.


More “Moving” Countries and Changing Geography

Many people remember islands, land masses, and countries in alternate locations. Some of those memories are startlingly similar.

I discussed this in two previous articles. The first was about Sri Lanka’s location, since that had attracted considerable comment.

The other article was about checking older maps, in case newer maps have been altered for political reasons. I showed the process I’d used to clarify Sri Lanka’s location, then and now.

However, specific countries and land masses seem to recur in our discussions. I’m moving those comments to this newer post, so they’re all in one location. (No pun intended.)

Many of the “altered” locations are around the Indian Ocean, but some are not.  New Zealand and land masses around Korea have been the most surprising (and consistent), so far.


So far, the major location discrepancies seem to relate to:

Andorra

Cuba

Denmark & Sweden – islands nearby

Korea

Japan

Mongolia

New Zealand

Oceania (in general)

Poland

Portugal

Sri Lanka (at its own article)


And then there are odd media references, such as the globe in the movie, Dazed and Confused. Are they pranks, Easter eggs, or the kinds of references that document a dramatically changing global landscape?


Close-up below and the actual world as we know it below right.




A phantom landmass?


There are many, many more Mandela Effect examples

Continue reading at: MandelaEffect


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Academic Warns: Young People’s Ignorance Of Socialism Risks “Absolute Catastrophe” & Goodbye Free Internet, Government Is Already Here
April 7 2019 | From: SummitNews / StrategicCulture / Various

“They were never taught about it.”



Canadian academic Jordan Peterson warns that socialism is so appealing to young people because they are “unbelievably ignorant” about the history of the 20th century.

Related: Millennials Don’t Know What Capitalism & Socialism Are

During an event hosted by The Heritage Foundation this week, the clinical psychologist and best-selling author said that millennials are embracing far-left ideology because they weren’t taught about its disastrous outcomes at school.


“People are unbelievably ignorant of history,”
said Peterson.

“What young people know about 20th-century history is nonexistent, especially about the history of the radical left. How would you know? They are never taught about it so why would they be concerned about it?”



Related: Thought crime science: Case studies in becoming an enemy of liberal orthodoxy

He also explained that the simplistic socialist notion of caring for as many people as possible was very alluring for people who had an emotional view of humanity.

Young people are “emotionally drawn to the ideals of socialism, say, or the left, because it draws its fundamental motivational source from a kind of primary compassion, and that is always there in human beings,” said Peterson.

Peterson also blamed the “unholy marriage of the postmodern nihilism with this Marxist utopian notion” for the breakdown in social and family unity, a process which has produced an “absolute catastrophe”.

A major poll last year found that the majority of US millennials would prefer to live under socialism than capitalism.


Related Articles:


The era of artificial intelligence in New Zealand

What is an Insouciant American?

Socialism: Thick Lipstick On A Global Pig

Socialism Equals Triumph For Corporate Criminals + To Remind: Google Is Run By Totalitarians

Globalism, Socialism, Technocracy: Three Names For The Same Thing

Rising Up Against The Oligarchs Does Not Equal Socialism




Goodbye To The Internet: Interference By Governments Is Already Here

There is a saying attributed to the French banker Nathan Rothschild that "Give me control of a nation's money and I care not who makes its laws."



Conservative opinion in the United States has long suspected that Rothschild was right and there have been frequent calls to audit the Federal Reserve Bank based on the presumption that it has not always acted in support of the actual interests of the American people.

Related: IBM, the same company that provided punch card computing systems to the Nazis, lays groundwork for global “Mark of the Beast” cryptocurrency network

That such an assessment is almost certainly correct might be presumed based on the 2008 economic crash in which the government bailed out the banks, which had through their malfeasance caused the disaster, and left individuals who had lost everything to face the consequences.

Be that as it may, if there were a modern version of the Rothschild comment it might go something like this: “Give me control of the internet and no one will ever more know what is true.”

The internet, which was originally conceived of as a platform for the free interchange of information and opinions, is instead inexorably becoming a managed medium that is increasingly controlled by corporate and government interests.

Those interests are in no way answerable to the vast majority of the consumers who actually use the sites in a reasonable and non-threatening fashion to communicate and share different points of view.



Related: Beyond 1984: Insane Elite Promote Global Internet ID

The United States Congress started the regulation ball rolling when it summoned the chief executives of the leading social media sites in the wake of the 2016 election.

It sought explanations regarding why and how the Russians had allegedly been able to interfere in the election through the use of fraudulent accounts to spread information that might have influenced some voters.

In spite of the sound and fury, however, all Congress succeeded in doing was demonstrating that the case against Moscow was flimsy at best while at the same creating a rationale for an increased role in censoring the internet backed by the threat of government regulation.

Given that background, the recent shootings at a synagogue in Pittsburgh and at mosques in Christchurch New Zealand have inevitably produced strident demands that something must be done about the internet, with the presumption that the media both encouraged and enabled the attacks by the gunmen, demented individuals who were immediately labeled as “white supremacists.” 

One critic
 puts it this way:


“Let’s be clear, social media is the lifeblood of the far-right. The fact that a terror attack was livestreamed should tell us that this is a unique form for violence made for the digital era.

The infrastructure of social media giants is not merely ancillary to the operations of terrorists - it is central to it [and] social media giants assume a huge responsibility to prevent and stop hate speech proliferating on the internet. 

It’s clear the internet giants cannot manage this alone; we urgently need a renewed conversation on internet regulation… It is time for counter-terrorism specialists to move into the offices of social media giants.”



Related: Christchurch Terror Attack: Mass Censorship, Mystery Shooters, And The Globetrotting Lone Gunman

It's the wrong thing to do, in part because intelligence and police services already spend a great deal of time monitoring chat on the internet. And the premise that most terrorists who use the social media can be characterized as the enemy du jour “white supremacists” is also patently untrue.

Using the national security argument to place knuckle dragging “counter-terrorism specialists” in private sector offices would be the last thing that anyone would reasonably want to do.

If one were to turn the internet into a government regulated service it would mean that what comes out at the other end would be something like propaganda intended to make the public think in ways that do not challenge the authority of the bureaucrats and politicians.

In the US, it might amount to nothing less than exposure to commentary approved by Mike Pompeo and John Bolton if one wished to learn what is going on in the world.

Currently I and many other internet users appreciate and rely on the alternative media to provide viewpoints that are either suppressed by government or corporate interests or even contrary to prevailing fraudulent news accounts.



Related: Google = Fascist Censorship: Employees Seek To Weaponize IT Services To Aid Left-Wing Agenda - Proffessor

And the fact is that the internet is already subject to heavy handed censorship by the service providers, which one friend has described as “Soviet era” in its intensity, who are themselves implementing their increasingly disruptive actions to find false personas and to ban as “hate speech” anything that is objected to by influential constituencies.

Blocking information is also already implemented by various countries through a cooperative arrangement whereby governments can ask search engines to remove material.

Google actually documents the practice in an annual Transparency Report which reveals that government requests to remove information have increased from less than 1,000 per year in 2010 to nearly 30,000 per year currently
.

Not surprisingly, Israel and the United States lead the pack when it comes to requests for deletions. Since 2009 the US has asked for 7,964 deletions totaling 109,936 items while Israel has sought 1,436 deletions totally 10,648 items. Roughly two thirds of Israeli and US requests were granted.

And there is more happening behind the scenes. Since 2016, Facebook representatives have also been regularly meeting with the Israeli government to delete Facebook accounts of Palestinians that the Israelis claim constitute “incitement.”



Related: Why Confronting Israel Is Important: The Jewish State Is No Friend

Israel had threatened Facebook that non-compliance with Israeli deletion orders would “result in the enactment of laws requiring Facebook to do so, upon pain of being severely fined or even blocked in the country.”

Facebook chose compliance and, since that time, Israeli officials have been publicly boasting about how obedient Facebook is when it comes to Israeli censorship orders.” It should be noted that Facebook postings calling for the murder of Palestinians have not been censored.

And censorship also operates as well at other levels unseen, to include deletion of millions of old postings and videos to change the historical record and rewrite the past.

To alter the current narrative, Microsoft, Google, YouTube, Twitter and Facebook all have been pressured to cooperate with pro-Israel private groups in the United States, to include the powerful Anti-Defamation League (ADL).

The ADL is working with social media “to engineer new solutions to stop cyberhate” by blocking “hate language,” which includes any criticism of Israel that might be construed as anti-Semitism by the new expanded definition that is being widely promoted by the US Congress and the Trump Administration.



Related: The Growing Anti-Semitism Scam

Censorship of information also increasingly operates in the publishing world. With the demise of actual bookstores, most readers buy their books from media online giant Amazon, which had a policy of offering every book in print.

On February 19, 2019, it was revealed that Amazon would no longer sell books that it considered too controversial.

Government regulation combined with corporate social media self-censorship means that the user of the service will not know what he or she is missing because it will not be there.

And once the freedom to share information without restraint is gone it will never return.


On balance, free speech is intrinsically far more important than any satisfaction that might come from government intrusion to make the internet less an enabler of violence.

If history teaches us anything, it is that the diminishment of one basic right will rapidly lead to the loss of others and there is no freedom more fundamental than the ability to say or write whatever one chooses, wherever and whenever one seeks to do so. 


Related Articles:

Trump Sets His Sights on Campus Free Speech

Facebook Insider Leaks Docs; Explains “Deboosting,” “Troll Report,” & Political Targeting in Video Interview

Magic, Manic and Monstrous: How Facebook is Programming Us

Google’s AI Manifesto: Accountability, Privacy, and No Killer Robots

7 Reasons Why I Am Leaving Google – Social Media Tips by Steve Cioccolanti

To protect speech and democracy, President Trump must now seize the domain names of Google, Facebook, Twitter and other tech giants that abuse their power to silence human beings


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Director General Of DoC Claims 1080 Doesn’t Kill Non-Target Species Whilst DoC’s Own Studies Show It Does & “Hidden Agenda” Of 1080 Poisoners Needs Scrutiny
April 6 2019 | From: EnviroWatchRangitikei / Scoop / Various

"1080 does not kill any Non Target Species" - Head of DOC, Lou Sanson.



From ‘NO to 1080’ facebook page, it was written by Joel Lund of Wanaka, who had the chance to meet up with Lou Sanson at a function recently, and made the most of the opportunity. 

Related: Rangitikei Environmental Health Watch - Facebook Group

Now I’ve seen this decried recently in social media in that the CE was attending a funeral and therefore this was a reluctant ‘interview’.

My response to that is, as unfortunate as the setting may have been & all due respects to the departed, nevertheless this is what goes with the territory surely of CEs on their vastly bloated salaries.

In bed with the banking fraternity & the greenwash club, and heading up a corporation that is in it for profit only (corporations do not consider humans, just profits, don’t believe me?

Watch ‘The Corporation’ movie on the Corporations page, they are literally not allowed to consider the effects of their activities on humans) - that means you get what you give. Why should Joel Lund therefore be obliged to return human ethics to a steely cold corporate entity?

This particular corporation is shutting out all questions from the public on the ground level (witness the folk who have been phoning them up lately with pretty basic questions about imminent aerial 1080 operations who are hung up on and treated like the so-called terrorists media is making anybody who is against 1080 to be).



Related: British Documentary Maker Concludes That Money Not Science Is At The Bottom Of NZ’s Continued Use Of 1080 | Our Poisoned Land?


Read On:

A few weeks ago I met the boss of DOC Lou Sanson and took the opportunity to explain the possibilities and current technology available for the development and use of “Smart traps” to control predators of our endangered native species.

Lou’s response to my quick explanation of the technology and capabilities of such trapping systems was:


“Whats wrong with using 1080?”

I responded with, “Well 1080 is toxic, extremely dangerous and kills so many non target species.”

His abrupt and seemingly angry response was,

“1080 DOES NOT KILL ANY NON TARGET SPECIES.”

Even though I was a bit shocked to hear such a totally blatant lie from the boss of DOC I quickly and calmly said,

“1080 kills about 65 dogs in NZ each year and kills many native birds such as Kea which DOC’s own studies show.”

I am not sure I have quoted the following exactly correct word for word but will be close to it. The conversation continued with Lou Sanson making up excuses as to why the development of advanced “Smart Traps” would not be suitable for predator control instead of 1080 poison.

He said such things as; “It will cost too much.”

My response was: “Smart traps would initially cost a hell of a lot to develop and set up but would become much cheaper over time.”

He gestured at the distant snow capped Southern Alps and said, “Look at that area, the area is too big, their is too much land to cover and so much of NZ is inaccessible.”

I argued that, “Nowhere in NZ is inaccessible because everywhere is accessible by helicopters and we don’t need to trap every single part of Public Conservation land to save endangered species.

Some scientists have also recently made it clear that it would be possible to have many small areas of intensively monitored and predator trapped areas in NZ which could be enough to ensure the survival of endangered species and possibly even allow them to flourish.”

His response was: “You would know how hard it is to get good staff.”

Which I agreed to and responded with, “I am absolutely sure good staff can be found as their are plenty of people who would be very happy to be in the bush trapping especially if they could make a reasonable living out of it.”

I explained how camping and working in the bush is dramatically easier than it was in the old days due to advancements in equipment such as cheap satellite communication, GPS, ultra light weight technically advanced hiking and camping equipment that I use myself now such as my ultra light down insulated mattress.

Lou then said:

“So how do you kill all the deer, pigs and chamois ?”

I would describe this as a clear admission from Lou that big game animals are targeted to be killed by 1080 poison and reinforced what I am absolutely sure is fact,  that DOC’s current long term goal is to try to eradicate all big game on public conservation land.* [Editor’s note, they are indeed, see the link below].

I said to Lou; “After World War 2, deer cullers managed to get the massive deer numbers down without out all the extremely advanced equipment we have today such as helicopters, jet boats and thermal imaging equipped hunting rifles etc.”

Lou went on to ask what my profession or skills were before saying, “It sounds like you should apply for a job with DOC.”




Related: SPCA Calls For Ban On 1080 & “No Birds,No Kiwi, Tui, Weka, Kereru - All Gone” – An Observation On The West Coast From An 82 Year Old

Then he handed me his DOC business card. I expressed my interest in developing trap technologies but did not take up what seemed to be a job offer.

I spoke further about how companies such as some helicopter companies will be very worried about losing big long term lucrative government 1080 contracts if 1080 is banned but they need to wake up and realize that the 1080 contracts could be changed to contracts to fly in trappers and trapping equipment into Public Conservation land which might actually generate more profits for them than 1080!

It appeared he was in a bit of a “huff” when he finally said he had to talk to other people and walked away.

My impression of Lou is that he is a devout salesman that won’t let the truth get in the way of business deals and feels under pressure to honour the massive multi million dollar long term 1080 logistics and application contracts he has no doubt signed up with various companies.

Those companies that have invested in the growing 1080 industry and no doubt gone ahead and financed such things as new trucks and helicopters on the back of long term government guaranteed contracts will not be very happy with him if the 1080 industry came to a screeching halt!




DOC’s Chats with Thompson & Clark Reveal Anti-1080 Surveillance





I won’t be feeling sorry for Lou Sanson when that day (hopefully) finally comes as it is hard to have any respect for a man that is so quick to lie to you even in person by saying, “1080 does not kill any non target species”.

Disgusting conduct from the Boss of DOC!

All over the world the word has gone out that all creatures great and small that are not indigenous to that land will be terminated.  It’s not just New Zealand.


If You are New to NZ’s 1080 Poisoning Program Here is a Good Article to Start With:

Why are People so Concerned Over 1080?

A must watch also is Poisoning Paradise, the doco made by the GrafBoys (banned from screening on NZ TV, yet a 4x international award winner). Their website is tv-wild.com. Their doco is a very comprehensive overview with the independent science to illustrate the question marks that remain over the use of this poison.

There are links also on our 1080 resources page to most of the groups, pages, sites etc that will provide you with further information to make your own informed decision on this matter.

You can also find further 1080 articles at ‘categories’ (left of the news page) or by using the search box. Other vital info regarding risk to humans can be found on the Suspected 1080 Poisoning page.



Related: 1080 Was Added To Water Supplies By Germany In WW2 As A Chemical Weapon Says A US Manufacturer – But The New Zealand Authorities Are Dropping It Aerially Into Our Waterways

Note: For further articles on 1080 use categories at left of the news page.

If you are new to the 1080 poisoning program, a must watch is Poisoning Paradise, the doco made by the GrafBoys (banned from screening on NZ TV, yet a 4x international award winner).

Their website is tv-wild.com. Their doco is a very comprehensive overview with the independent science to illustrate the question marks that remain over the use of this poison.

There are links also on our 1080 resources page to most of the groups, pages, sites etc that will provide you with further information to make your own informed decision on this matter.

Related: 1080: A Senior Man Is Assaulted By DoC Employees In A Public Car Park


“Hidden Agenda” Of 1080 Poisoners Needs Scrutiny

A Fiordland 1080 aerial 1080 poisoning by TBfree NZ needs close scrutiny as to its purpose and justification says the Sporting Hunters Outdoor Trust.



The aerial poison drop is being carried out by TBfreeNZ, an arm of OSPRI formerly the Animal Health Board, who aim to eradicate bovine TB and blame possums for the transmitting the disease.

Related: Crisis In New Zealand

However, informed sources say monitoring of possums in the Hope River catchment of the proposed poison drop area, showed virtually no possums in the area. But recent reports indicated the drop would still proceed despite the absence of possums.


"Indeed further information is that even monitor researchers were puzzled as to the justification and reason for the drop, especially since TBfreeNZ ’s claim that possums spread bovine TB is simply a pretence,”
he said.

Word also was that the Department of Conservation in the light of almost zero numbers of possums, considered cancelling the poisoning but then relented saying even though there were no possums there, it was too late to stop the drop.

Laurie Collins described DoC’s attitude as “weak and pathetic”.

The OSPRI fact sheet issued before the drop said the poison was for possums and rats.

“Since there’s no possums now it is only for rats,” said Laurie Colins. But the poison drop is being done by OSPRI who are concerned only with bovine Tb.



Related: Banned In Most Countries And Classified By The WHO As ‘Highly Hazardous’: 1080 Is A Broad-Spectrum
Poison That Kills All Oxygen-Breathing Animals And Organisms – Dr Meriel Watts


Questions about this ridiculous spending of taxpayer and farmers’ money need to be answered.

Are OSPRI now pretending rats transmit bovine Tb? Why are OSPRI dropping 1080 in an area that has no farms? Shouldn't farmers be asking hard questions?”

Laurie Collins said a frequently asked question was about the purpose of 1080 drops when pre-poison monitoring showed low or zero numbers.


"Besides OSPRI and DoC know from questions in Parliament in 2016 by NZ First MP Richard Prosser to the then Minister of Agriculture that extensive autopsies of 9800 possums showed nil TB.

Possums are not the imagined Tb spreaders which gives no reason for OSPRI’s existence.

Laurie Collins said other sources indicated that the Department of Conservation’s hidden agenda was to eliminate deer on public lands.



Related: Community Groups, Farmers, Doctors, Scientists And Individuals Are Actively Working Toward A Complete
Ban Of 1080 Poison Use In NZ


"If so then it’s simply a crazed ideological obsession which has no conservation reason as deer were browsers of vegetation just as the now extinct moa had been for million of years,”
he said.

“Understandably SHOT is very concerned about wild deer being poisoned and suffering over a slow 48 hour agony to death, not to mention lack of reason and shocking waste of protein. But we’re equally concerned at the ecosystem damage to other creatures from vital insects and invertebrates to birds.”

Laurie Collins said both the Ministers of Conservation and Environment needed to ask hard questions since millions of dollars of public money were involved.

Related: 1080: NZ Animals Killed For No Reason In $80m Yearly 1080 Drops


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Trump Slams Dems For “Defrauding The Public With Ridiculous Bullshit” & The Shame Of America: Russia Gate Hoax And Mainstream Media Lies – Hanne Nabintu Herland, WND, Herland Report
April 5 2019 | From: Infowars / TheHerlandReport / Various

President calls for ‘group of major losers’ to be held accountable for ‘sinister sabotage’ efforts.



President Trump blasted Democrats during a rally Thursday that served as a victory party following the end of the 2 year plus witch-hunt over fantasy Russian collusion theories.

Related: It’s Happening! Sean Hannity: The Deep State “Day of Reckoning” is About to Break Wide Open

Trump was given a rock star welcome by an arena packed to the rafters with supporters:



Related: President Trump points out flaws in Democrats over Russian collusion


"So the Russia hoax proves more than ever that we need to finish exactly what we came here to do: Drain the swamp,”
Trump said to frantic applause.

Trump didn’t hold back, telling Democrats that they need to “decide whether they will continue defrauding the public with ridiculous bullshit, partisan investigations, or ways they will apologize to the American people and it join us to rebuild our crumbling infrastructure.”



Related: Newt Gingrich on Russia Collusion Aftermath: “This was the First Deliberate Attempt of a Coup d’Etat by the Deep State We’ve Ever Seen”

Trump devoted an extended time of his speech to declaring “the Russia hoax is finally dead”.


"The collusion delusion is over.”
The President declared, adding “The special counsel completed its report and found no collusion and no obstruction. I could have told you that two-and-a-half years ago very easily. Total exoneration, complete vindication.”

“You know, it’s interesting. Robert Mueller was a god to the Democrats,a god to them, until he said there wasn’t any collusion. They don’t like him so much right now.” Trump added.

The President also blasted the media, saying that “the crazy attempt by the Democrat Party and the fake news media right back there, and the deep state to overturn the results of the 2016 election have failed."



Related: Spygate: The Inside Story Behind the Alleged Plot to Take Down Trump


"This was nothing more than a sinister effort to undermine our historic election victory and to sabotage the will of the American people.”
Trump exclaimed.

“We defeated a very corrupt establishment, and we kept our promise to the American people, and it’s driving them craaazzy,” Trump said to the raucous crowd, describing opposition to his presidency as a “disgusting cloud”.

“This group of major losers did not just ruthlessly attack me, my family and everyone who questioned their lies. They tried to divide our country to poison the national debate and to tear up the fabric of our great democracy, the greatest anywhere in the world.

They did it all because they refused to accept the results of one of the greatest presidential elections, probably number one in our history.”
The President urged.

“Many, many people were badly hurt by this scam, but more importantly, our country was hurt. Our country was hurt. And they’re on artificial respirators right now. They are getting mouth-to-mouth resuscitation.” Trump added.

The president added that everyone who “perpetuated the single greatest hoax in the history of politics, they have to be - I’m sorry - they have to be accountable.”

The wild crowd joined in with chants of “lock them up”.

Watch the entire speech here:




Related Articles:

Trump Plans to Prosecute Hundreds of Deep Staters in 2019

Trump Coup-Plotter Confronted In Congress

The Obama Admin Was Spying on Roger Stone, Carter Page, Paul Manafort and others… President Trump Needs to Release ALL of the Evidence

CEOs of Google, Facebook, Twitter and YouTube should all be going to prison over complicity with the Russia collusion hoax

Facebook announces ban on white nationalism and separatism



The Shame Of America: Russia Gate Hoax And Mainstream Media Lies – Hanne Nabintu Herland, WND, Herland Report

Are we nothing but con men, eager to lie and defame one another, publicly displaying to the rest of the world the lack of national responsibility and accountability that permeates the current American establishment and especially the Democratic party?



As it turns out, the whole Russia Gate and Russian Collusion story was a hoax that the mainstream media so willingly spread into all the corners of the world, writes historian and founder of The Herland Report, Hanne Herland at US based WND.

Related: Cynthia McKinney: Deep State is Real, Here, Now - Red Pill Interview

The Democrats’ massive impeachment attempts failed, American treachery and deceitfulness is now on display for all the nations to watch
.

It is such a shame and a demonstration of the decay of justice in America. When something like this can be done to a President, what level of justice can ordinary citizens expect?





The Herland Report TV:


"Russia Gate is an ongoing coup among an elite of top officials in the Obama administration, to undermine the very presidency of Donald Trump.

This is the worst crime in American history. We have not seen a political crisis like this since the American Civil War,"
says William Marshall, senior investigator at Judicial Watch.

Marshall is a former intelligence analyst and investigator with the Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA), private and non-profit sectors for over 30 years before joining the team at Judicial Watch.

Judicial Watch is the public watch dog that investigates and prosecutes government corruption, under the leadership of Tom Fitton. Founded in 1994, Judicial Watch seeks to ensure government and judicial officials act ethically and do not abuse the powers entrusted to them by the American public.





Nations Around The World are Tackling Fake News at Home





Related:
Russian Investigation Postmortem: Anatomy Of A Failed Coup




This is the first of several interviews that The Herland Report has with the leaders of Judicial Watch.

The Herland Report is a Scandinavian news site and TV channel on YouTube, reaching millions yearly, presenting leading intellectuals' view on foreign policy, current affairs, religion, the Middle East, Western decadence - free from the censoring political correctness that now permeate Western media and its political propaganda.

The Herland Report believes in freedom of speech and its editorial policy resides above the traditional Left vs Right paradigm which we believe has lost its relevance and ability to describe the current driving forces in Western politics.

We regularly feature a variety of opinion and analysis from a number of commentators from across the political spectrum.

The Herland Report is founded and hosted by Hanne Nabintu Herland, a Scandinavian historian of comparative religions, bestselling author, commentator and TV producer, known from the media for sharp analysis and fearless speech. She was born and raised in Africa, has lived in South America, the Middle East and in Europe for many years.



Related: The Full Story Of How Obama, Hillary And Brennan Carried Out The Crime Of The Century + Russia Hoax
Collapses: Not A Single American Charged With Collusion With Russia; Left-Wing Media Has Been Lying All Along


Judicial Watch’ president, Tom Fitton has called Russia Gate a Deep State coup attempt, an ongoing mutiny against the people’s choice for President in the United States. Senator Rand Paul demands the investigation of the Obama aides who pushed the Russia Gate conspiracy hoax to the public, and rightfully so.

Those responsible for spreading the hoax should be held accountable and tried for treason, defaming America’s democratically elected top official and tainting the nation’s reputation all across the globe.

Plus, making the American media outlets look like complete idiots, Europeans too, parroting as we do, whatever we find in the New York Times or Washington Post.

For years, we have been terrorized by CNN and New York Times, at it from morning till night, about president Trump’s “Russian connection” and “election meddling”. Megyn Kelly even went to Russia to discuss “the meddling” with president Putin, who has been remarkably silent, the poor man, probably thinking that the Americans have gone completely mad.

After all, Russia has an economy about the size of Italy, struggling internally with numerous issues, corruption for one, suddenly being elevated to “enemy of the world” in a media stunt that only ends up shaming the West so totally.



Related: Deep State Nazionists Establishing A Parallel State for Ratline 2.0


The Herland Report Scandinavian news site and TV channel on YouTube has millions of readers/viewers yearly, featuring leading free thinkers, intellectuals, authors and activists on foreign policy, Western cultural decay, religion and the need for international justice and respect for national sovereignty.

The Herland Report believes in freedom of speech and its editorial policy resides above the traditional Left vs Right paradigm which we believe has lost its relevance and ability to describe the current driving forces in Western politics. Hanne Herland is here seen with editor in chief of Fort Russ News, Joaquin Flores.

Click on the picture and watch the show “How to create a revolution and regime change.”

In case anybody wonders, we look like idiots to the Russians, not even being able to stop this embarrassing story before.

Russia Gate goes down in history as a remarkable display of Western stupidity. And the world is watching our brave new world fall to pieces.

Even before this new nail in the coffin of the notoriously lying mainstream media, 77 % of the American public believes that the media does not speak the truth.

Wonder what it will drop to now. How can the media editors live with themselves, knowing that the people fully understand what is going on?




Related: Russiagate Is Finished & Senate Intel Committee Finds No Direct Evidence Of Conspiracy Between Trump
Campaign and Russia

Why are these incompetent editors, so eager to sell out in a system that obviously does not serve the public, not replaced by genuine journalists?

Probably because over 90 % of the mainstream media is owned by only 6 corporations, and the narrative presented serves the maximum profit gain of the multinational companies that own it.

The editors are sad PR puppets in a system that only serves the 0.1 % ultra-rich.

The free press was established to report injustice, the abuse of power, corruption, enlighten the public on the complexities of reality, enhance knowledge and create better understanding between groups, – ideals long gone in the hedonist, extreme liberal New World Order.

Rogue market capitalist owners have turned our once free media into PR companies and propaganda outlets, who now work for the globalist financial capital owners and whatever benefits the hedge fund managers of the world, such as George Soros. It is high time to question this development which sure is not democratic.



Related: Confirmed? Mainstream Media Acting As Political Operative For The DNC

It has been a growing problem. The past years, and especially since the 1990s, we have seen a remarkable thrust of globalist capitalism. It is an economic system that departs from the traditional, nation based model that was closely knit to the Protestant ethic, with ideals such as trust, dependability, worker’s rights, reinvestment, modesty and so on.

The new, rogue capitalism has reinforced an international economic model that benefits the ultra-rich in an unprecedented scale.

Globalism has produced a system in which 62 persons now own over 50 % of world assets, only made possible by the transnational business model that is dependent on open borders and refuses to redistribute wealth when outsourcing jobs. Or pay taxes, for that matter.

Naturally President Trump, who wants to reinforce national borders, strengthen national sovereignty and force the ultra-rich to pay taxes to the US is fought by a media owned by his adversaries.

The battle ground and defamation process against the President was easily channeled through the mainstream press. Alas, it did not end so well.


Related Articles:

And the winner of The Post’s Mueller Madness bracket is …

'Nobody is panicking!' Rachel Maddow sheds 500,000 viewers in post-Mueller slump

Poll: More Americans Think Hillary Colluded With Foreign Operatives Than Trump

Just how long did Robert Mueller sit on the fact that the Russia collusion narrative was a HOAX? Long enough for Dems to win the House in 2018

NSA Documents Prove Surveillance Of Donald Trump & His Family + Documents Show Obama Surveiled Entire Trump Family For 8 Years



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

"Shrinkflation" - How Food Companies Implement Massive Price Hikes Without You Ever Noticing
April 4 2019 | From: ZeroHedge

Do you ever get the sense that your favorite steak at that Quick Service Restaurant of your choice keeps getting thinner and thinner all while your check size at the end of the night continues getting larger and larger.  Well, it is. 



How else are publicly traded chains going to continue to deliver margin growth to wall street in the midst of rising labor costs, rising commodity costs and shrinking customer traffic?

Related: Shrinkflation - Real Inflation Much Higher Than Reported

As a new study in the U.K. just revealed, shrinking portion sizes among food manufacturers is actually way more common than you might think and you probably never even noticed it.  In fact, according to data from the Office for National Statistics, over 2,500 consumer products in the U.K. shrunk in size over the past five years despite being sold for the same price.

But it's not just food manufacturers that are shrinking portions while maintaining price as many consumers goods items from chocolate to coffee to toilet paper are all experiencing the same trends. 



Related: Shrinkflation Hits The UK: Toblerone Shrinks By 10%, Price Stays The Same

Known in grocery circles as 'liar packs', shrinking portion sizes became an attractive alternative to simply raising prices back during the great recession when consumers became particularly sensitive to price. 

Of course, the net effect is exactly the same but it's much more difficult to notice that fine print on the bottom corner of the packaging than it is the price tag at check out.  Per The Telegraph:


"Mark Jones, a food and drink solicitor at Gordons law firm, said: “Shrinkflation was borne out of the recession and has gathered staggering pace since 2009. The ONS’s report confirms this. Against the back drop of a weak economy, commodity prices have been rising over the last five years.

The recession made people very price sensitive and you can see the evidence of that by looking at the impressive growth of discount retailers in the last five years, no retail sector has grown faster.

Suppliers and retailers do not want to raise the ‘on the shelf’ price, but both have had to adapt to increasing commodity prices.

Shrinking the size of the products being sold, whether that is toilet paper, chocolate or cleaning products, is just another way of pushing through a price increase, but in a more subtle way.

How many of us noticed Andrex reduce the number of sheets on a toilet roll from 240 to 221?”



Related: 'Shrinkflation' has hit over 2,500 consumer products over the past five years 

And here is the breakdown by month over the past 5 years:

But it's not just British consumers getting duped by "shrinkflation" as all the same games are played in the U.S. markets as well. 

For example, who is actually going to notice that 10 sheets of paper are missing from the Bounty rolls on the right versus those on the left?  Yet, assuming that both packages are sold at the same price this small reduction in size equates to a substantial 9% price hike on a per sheet basis.



Meanwhile, these containers are completely identical aside from some tiny print in the bottom right hand corner.



Conclusion: Caveat emptor (buyer beware] - there is a whole army of Harvard MBAs working in consumer goods companies all around the world whose sole mission in life is to get you to pay more for less without ever noticing.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

World’s Elite Try To Wipe Out All Knowledge And Use Of Natural Cures, While They Privately Use Them For Their Own Longevity
April 3 2019 | From: NaturalNews / Various

The dark side of Western medicine has been erased from U.S. history books and from Google search results, along with any trace of truth about the success of natural cures and homeopathic medicine.



Any doctors or scientists who attempt to “peer review” natural remedies are stripped of their medical license or research funding by the corrupt American Medical Association (AMA) and Big Pharma.

Related: Colloidal silver was ‘erased from textbooks’ because cured diseases from tuberculosis to syphilis

In fact, at least half of all clinical “trials” have never been reported, because when natural cures are proven to work, the results are removed or skewed in favor of chemical medicine.

The American healthcare system is set up to profit from illness, and those in charge are making sure that never changes.

It all started when oil tycoon J.D. Rockefeller decided to control modern medicine by empowering the pharmaceutical industry while crippling the highly successful practices of naturopathy and homeopathy.

How did Rockefeller accomplish this? He funded bogus research by a man named Andrew Flexner, who then authored the infamous Flexner Report of 1910.

Flexner used the money to visit every U.S. medical school, and with the backing of the AMA, reduced the number of physicians while limiting “authorization” of any new medical school licenses to doctors who supported only chemical medicine
.



Related: How Rockefeller Founded Big Pharma And Waged War On Natural Cures

The Rockefeller family waged war on natural cures and holistic healing, while privately using them for his own health.

Today’s mainstream medicine is nothing but sick care management, where chemical pills are dished out to quell symptoms of deep-rooted illnesses, and surgery, radiation and chemotherapy are used to only temporarily stave off organ failure, heart attacks, and cancer.

Most of the richest Americans know better than to eat GMOs, drink tap water, get flu shots, or ever even consider chemotherapy for cancer.

These elitists eat organic food daily, they take organic supplements, and they visit naturopathic physicians when they get sick. The only time they visit hospitals is for emergencies when they incur a deep cut or broken bones.

John Davison Rockefeller, Sr. was America’s first billionaire. He lived to be 97 years old, thanks to a strict food and medicine regime that did not involve eating the chemicals he found in his petroleum, coal, gasoline, and oil industries.



Related: The Eradication Of Natural Alternatives: Big Pharma Wants To Eliminate The Competition

Today, artificial food coloring comes from petroleum, and many processed oils contain hexane, a vapor constituent of gasoline. Today, tap water and vaccines contain chemicals you would never consume, if you only knew.

Rockefeller led a double life as the ultimate hypocrite. He was a business bully who cheated on his wife and tried to bury natural cures (while he used them himself), but ironically he suffered from anxiety and died of pneumonia.

Rockefeller Jr. became the Post WWII industrial “emperor” of chemical agriculture and chemical medicine.

After the U.S. helped Great Britain defeat the Nazis, U.S. politicians and business magnates built a chemical “empire” of their own in America. Hitler had used his own “Big Pharma” (I.G. Pharben) to create chemicals for warfare and the gas chambers.

Now, America would use many of those same chemists and chemicals to manufacture U.S. food and medicine, all part of a huge scheme (invented and funded by the Rockefellers) to make a fortune off the sickened masses, who would never believe their amazing country was turned so evil by monopolists.



Related: MMS - One Of The Biggest "F You's" to The Medical Establishment

Most people these days who get cancer think it’s hereditary. They think it’s genetic. That’s how bad the system has them fooled.

They believe every word that comes out of their doctor’s mouth – the same doctor who would never take chemo himself, and who graduated from a school sponsored, funded, and controlled by Big Pharma and the Rockefellers.

Today, nearly all conventional food is covered and smothered in chemical pesticides. Today, nearly all conventional food contains genetically engineered pesticides that continue spreading in the human gut, fueling immune disorders and cancer cell development.

Today, nearly all conventional medicine contains deadly chemicals that cause the body to remain acidic, breeding more disease and disorder. It’s a wicked formula that the elitists know and avoid at all costs.





Related: Introduction / Overview: The ‘Healing Computer’ Technology

Tune into NaturalCures.news for more information on superfoods that have not been banned by the likes of Rockefeller and Big Pharma, so you can not only survive, but thrive.



Related Articles:

What Is Natural Health? A Comprehensive Guide to Living Healthy

Why Does Modern Medicine Have A Big Problem With Natural Health?

The Logic, Wisdom and Scientific Evidence for the Homeopathic Treatment of Influenza

Periodic fasting rapidly stimulates a multitude of healing processes

Periodic fasting rapidly stimulates a multitude of healing processes

The importance of Fasting with Don Tolman

10 Reasons Why You Should Perform Oil Pulling

Hydrogen Peroxide

Great talk re MMS - Get some asap

Discovery of MMS and the History of the Genesis II

The importance of Fasting with Don Tolman

Cannabinoids found to reduce seizures in children with epilepsy

The Borax Conspiracy How the Arthritis Cure has been stopped

Coconut Oil Protects Against Macular Degeneration

Did you know that turmeric is just as effective as 14 pharmaceutical drugs?

Rapper Nipsey Hussle Shot Dead at 33 … And Some Say It’s a Conspiracy


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Christchurch Terror Attack: Mass Censorship, Mystery Shooters, And The Globetrotting Lone Gunman
April 2 2019 | From: Sott / Various

Censorship has been put into effect like never before in the aftermath of the multi-site terror attacks in Christchurch. There's no other word for what governments and Internet corporations have instituted.




New Zealand and Australian Internet Service Providers have been blocking access to video-hosting sites, forums and other websites that mirrored, in part or whole, the 17-minute long video footage 'lone gunman' Brenton Tarrant recorded from a GoPro camera attached to his head-gear, along with footage of the aftermath of the shooting at the Linwood mosque, and copies of Tarrant's 'manifesto'.

Related: NZ Door-To-Door Gun Confiscation, 1 Dead So Far

Media outlets and social media platforms globally have followed suit. The Internet has effectively been 'bleached' of this evidence (though it's not entirely gone, if you're prepared to look hard enough for it).

Tarrant's video in particular has been "classified by the Chief Censor's Office as objectionable," under a 1993 New Zealand law, meaning Kiwis face prison time and a $10,000 fine for 'downloading a copy of it' or 'distributing' it.

The government has been leaning heavily on ISPs to block websites until they have removed it while, globally, several million iterations (including just links to it) have been removed by all media outlets and all social media platforms - and not just by Facebook, YouTube and Twitter; it's also gone from BitChute and similar lesser-known video-hosting platforms.

New Zealand Police have also been
demanding personal data on users who even discuss Tarrant's 'manifesto' or video.

Though ostensibly done out of consideration for the victims of the attacks and their families, to 'protect children and the vulnerable from seeing these images', and to not 'give the attacker the attention he wants', no such 'clean sweeps' have previously been conducted following the many gruesome mass shootings and bombings in terror attacks around the world, particularly those in non-Western countries.




YouTube Deletes Infowars Video On Christchurch Shooting





Related:
Max Igan Analysis Of New Zealand False Flag Event In Christchurch & New Zealand False Flag – What They
Don’t Want You To See




All these years 'ISIS' and affiliated terrorists have enjoyed full use of Western social media platforms to share footage of their crimes - footage which is then typically shown by corporate media outlets, complete with running commentary (just search '
Charlie Hebdo massacre' or 'ISIS beheadings' on YouTube) - but now suddenly it's imperative that all "objectionable materials" relating to this event be excised from global consciousness. Why would that be the case?


The Censored Video

As expected, the official narrative has 'collapsed' on a 'lone gunman'. On the one hand, it's a plausible narrative: the whole world saw (or were told about) that which it is now 'illegal' to personally verify; one gunman murdering 42 of the 50 victims at the first mosque.

On the other hand, there are clues that he had help doing it. No one can doubt that he is The Killer, but did he plan and carry it out all by himself?

At timestamp 6:37 in Tarrant's video, we see him shoot dead the first of his victims in the front entrance to the Al Noor mosque.

This presumably corresponds to 1:40pm local time, which remains unchanged in the consensus timeline as the moment shots were first fired.

The next five minutes are horrific to say the least. Tarrant unloads magazine after magazine into everyone who could not escape the mosque, briefly exits into the car park, then returns to fire additional shots into every single slain person in the main room.



Related: John Podesta touring in New Zealand days before shooting after praising Prime Minister and calling them a 'Juicy Target!'

He does this so methodically that you're left wondering whether he had prior experience doing this kind of thing.


He is known to have had target practice at a gun club, but is that really the extent of his training?



The Subaru Tarrant drove

By 12:30 in the video, Tarrant is driving away, at high speed, north on Deans Avenue, then east on Bealey Avenue. According to Google Maps it takes 11 mins to travel the 7kms by car from one mosque to the other. His video ends abruptly at 17 minutes, so we don't see him make it to the second mosque - which is odd considering his obvious intention to broadcast or at least record his complete 'mission'.

By this point we've seen him driving for 4.5 minutes since leaving the Al Noor mosque and he has made it as far as the intersection of Bealey and Fitzgerald, so he still has almost the same distance to travel to reach the Linwood mosque on Linwood Avenue. This means, presumably, that the shooting there began no earlier than 15 minutes after it began at the Al Noor mosque, at 1:55pm.

Christchurch: Cat Stevens (Yusuf Islam) Speech And Performance

Yusuf Islam speaks and performs in memory of the victims of the mosque terror attacks. After our earthquakes, the message was “Hope”. This time “Peace” is clearly the theme.





Peace…we can only hope

Cat Stevens (Yusuf Islam) contributes a rendition of his “Peace Train” song, with a prelude, to the remembrance ceremony for 50 victims of the mosque terror attack.

Regardless of any agendas and whatever is going on around the subject of the mosque shootings, we can surely all take a break and appreciate a message of peace and a great performance by a talented musician.

The ConTrail is a meeting place and a safe haven for awakened people from all cultures, all perspectives, all walks of life, working not just to expose evil, but fight it with goodness and love and the celebration of the variety and diversity that makes us human.



Tarrant was in custody 36 minutes after Christchurch police received their first call about a shooting at a mosque, which New Zealand's top cop - Police Commissioner Mike Bush - says occurred one minute after the first shots were fired.

He was finally stopped on Brougham Street, between the intersections of Strickland Street and Scott Street, which is almost the same distance again from the Linwood mosque. This implies that Tarrant - from the moment he opened fire at the Al Noor mosque - carried out his attacks at both locations inside 37 minutes, ending with his arrest at 2:17pm.




Three crime scenes: the mass shootings at these two mosques, and the location of Tarrant's arrest

Related: What was John Podesta doing in New Zealand until the day before the Mosque Shootings?

In Tarrant's video, you can clearly hear him speaking with someone as he's tearing east along Bealey Avenue. It's not Tarrant muttering to himself, and it's not Tarrant 'speaking to his audience': he is having a one-on-one conversation with someone about how the massacre at the Al Noor mosque went down.

The other person's voice - of a lower tone than Tarrant's - though faint, can be heard at one point, and whatever is said prompts Tarrant to laugh and respond. Among the comments made by Tarrant in this conversation, he says "there's time for the fuel," presumably in reference to whatever they both knew was planned beforehand for the red jerry-cans in the trunk of Tarrant's car.

There may not have been someone present in the car with Tarrant, but that doesn't rule out a conversation with someone else over car speakerphone and/or via earpiece.


Linwood Mosque

In contrast to the clear video footage showing what happened at the Al Noor mosque, what happened at the smaller Linwood mosque is murky. All agree that the death toll there would have been higher but for the fact that the attacker (for this event hiding his face with a mask or balaclava) was confronted and chased away.

One version is that 48-year-old 'hero refugee' Abdul Aziz, despite being unarmed, managed to at least temporarily distract and limit the gunman to shooting at worshipers from outside the building, rather than entering it, by "throwing a credit card machine at him."

Once the gunman was back in his car, Aziz says he saw him off by throwing a shotgun (which the gunman had dropped earlier) at the car's windscreen "like an arrow," which, he said, "shattered the windscreen" (it didn't), and spooked him into driving away, then Aziz chased after him on foot down the driveway and back onto Linwood Avenue.



Linwood Islamic Centre, aka the Linwood mosque, a small building at the end of a 50m driveway off the north side of Linwood Avenue

Related: New Zealand Shooting Being Used By Governments To Create An Internet Police State

Other eyewitnesses describe the gunman being confronted by an unnamed worshiper inside the small building. One eyewitness to this, Faisal Sayed, describes at the end of this interview how a "young guy" tackled the gunman from behind, which caused him to drop his weapon, flee the building and escape the grounds in his car.

This account is supported by another eyewitness, Syed Mazharuddin, who told the New Zealand Herald:


"The young guy who usually takes care of the mosque... he saw an opportunity and pounced on [the gunman] and took his gun. The hero tried to chase and he couldn't find the trigger in the gun... he ran behind him but there were people waiting for him in the car and he fled."

Is this a different hero? Two different gunmen perhaps? These two versions of the event may not conflict; they could, for example, be describing two confrontations against one gunman by two different people in sequence, but what is most interesting is Mazharuddin's closing statement about "people waiting" in the car the gunman escaped in.



Related: Hillary Clinton meets with Jacinda Ardern in Auckland

Both accounts agree that the attacker(s) at the Linwood mosque fled in a car, so what are we to make of these statements from the manager of a business located nearby?


"A second shooting happened at a mosque in the Linwood area of the city.

Witnesses said they heard multiple gunshots around 1.45pm.

Mark Nichols, manager of Premium Tyres and Auto in Linwood, said he saw a gunman run past his shop around 45 minutes ago.

He heard five gunshots, and he believed the activity was centred around the nearby Linwood Masjid mosque.

He saw two injured people carried on stretchers past his shop. Both appeared to be alive.

"I seen a guy with a gun running up the road. He's been firing about five shots, I think we heard," Nichols said.

"It might have been a shotgun. I didn't get a good look at it, I just cleared off. "

To pass the entrance to Premium Tyres (situated on the opposite side of Linwood Avenue) on foot, Tarrant would have to have at least temporarily exited his car, but Aziz says he witnessed the car speed away on Linwood Avenue when he chased after it down the mosque's driveway.



The Linwood Islamic Centre, a small mosque, is set back from Linwood Avenue. Premium Tyres is across the Avenue, with its storefront facing southeast, away from the mosque. Someone passing on foot needs to cover at least 110 meters

Related: NZ Massacre Reveals Mainstream Media’s Double Standard In Covering Religious Attacks & The Christchurch Shooting And The Normalization Of Anti-Muslim Terrorism

Another eyewitness reported seeing two police cars cordon off nearby Harrow Street, located about 1km south of the Linwood mosque. There they arrested another man, images of which the New Zealand Herald has apparently seen though they do not appear to be in the public domain:

Could this have been the armed man seen running past Premium Tyres, east on Linwood Avenue? There has been no follow-up from the police about this arrest.



Related: Christchurch: How They Did It


Double-Trouble at Tarrant Arrest

Though he has since said just one IED (improvised explosive device) was found in just one car, recall that Commissioner Bush specifically "confirmed", at his his first press conference 3 hours after the Linwood attack ended, that "several IEDs attached to cars have been made safe now."

You don't say, much less confirm, 'several' anything, unless you have in mind at least two, and more likely three or higher, vehicles with bombs in them. Emphasizing his point, he subsequently commented: "This speaks to the seriousness of what occurred."

A Guardian stringer cited police sources as saying they were searching for three people in this area, while a local man said "a white van" was "at the center of police focus." One eyewitness to Tarrant's arrest on Brougham Street reported that a second man was in Tarrant's silver Subaru, and that this man escaped from police at the scene:



Statements given to newsroom.co.nz, March 15th 2019

Related: Exposé On Cabal-Driven Worldwide Terrorism Implemented By The United States And It's Allies

On the day of the attacks, it was reported that - in addition to a bomb having been defused in Tarrant's Subaru - a second bomb had been defused in a white vehicle on Strickland Street. This incident was later conflated with Tarrant's arrest, apparently because of this location's proximity to Brougham Street.

However, we know from this local media report that there was indeed at least one other separate incident in this immediate area, south of the city center, that afternoon: a different man was arrested here after being stopped driving a 'white sedan'. A modified long gun, apparently a shotgun fitted with a silencer, was found in his possession:



The man arrested on Strickland Street




The shotgun found in his possession




Close-up


The authorities are not saying anything about who this man on Strickland Street was, nor who the man arrested on Harrow Street was, thus leaving it implied that they are from among the four people police confirmed arresting in the immediate aftermath of the attacks.

Besides Tarrant, the three others have since been charged with offenses, though Commissioner Bush insists that none were involved in the attacks. Two - a man and a woman - were charged with illegal possession of firearms, while an 18-year-old was charged with "publishing objectionable publications" on the basis that he shared a link to Tarrant's video and, allegedly, sometime prior to the attacks, published an image of the Al Noor mosque with the caption 'target acquired'.


Simultaneous Active Shooter Training & Foreign Military Snipers

One of the hallmarks of false-flag events is simultaneous drills or training events being held in the city for emergency response personnel.



Related: FBI director James Comey arrives in Queenstown for 'Government conference'

New Zealand is one of only a handful of remaining countries in the world where the police do not generally carry firearms. But when Tarrant's car was rammed by police, the two arresting officers were 'lucky' to intercept him. Their boss, Senior Sergeant Pete Stills, recounted the fortuitous intervention to the New Zealand Herald:


"They were actually training when the call came through that there was an active armed offender in Christchurch. They had their work vehicles there with them with firearms in them.

They operationalised themselves and got into one car, they decided to skirt the city, they thought that's what the offender would do - rather than drive through the CBD [central business district].

They were driving on Brougham Street because they thought, if he'd just been to Linwood, that's a route he might take
. We practice for this stuff - to be honest, it was lucky two officers with that amount of service and experience were there."

The training session was "
on how to deal with armed offenders," or active shooter situations, and was being held in a facility at the nearby Princess Margaret Hospital.

This meant police officers did not have to first meet up at their stations and arm themselves, which enabled tactical response units - some in plain clothes - to respond in unusually fast time to the reports of shots fired at multiple locations.

New Zealand Police Association President Chris Cahill was proud of his colleagues, saying: "Any police force in the world - to get to the scene in six minutes, a specialist team there in 10 - that would be a success."



Related: New Zealand Follows Communist China In Erecting “Great Firewall” Of Internet Content To Block All
Independent Journalism About The Mosque Shootings


On the simultaneous active shooter training for Christchurch officers, Cahill said it was a "hell of a coincidence."

And then there's this:


NZSAS soldiers in Christchurch for snipers event responded to mosque terror attack

Some of the world's most deadly sharpshooters were in Christchurch
when New Zealand's worst ever terror attack unfolded on Friday, with NZSAS taking to the streets to help hunt the rampaging mosque shooter.

Snipers from the New Zealand military, as well as professional snipers from Australia and Asian countries, had been at the Defence Force shooting range at West Melton, 25kms west of the city, the Herald has been told.

When the massacre unfolded, they were sprung into action and understood to have been granted special powers to take up arms in order to protect the public.

NZSAS soldiers were photographed with weapons and balaclavas masking their face near the Al Noor Mosque by Hagley Park where a gunman stormed Friday prayer and shot dead more than 40 people. [...]

Others responded to a callout at Papanui High School which was feared to have been under attack too.

Heavily-armed masked officers were seen travelling in civilian rental vehicles with police on Friday afternoon.

New Zealand Police special tactics group (STG) officers were also on the frontline.



The country's top police units and top military units - in addition to 'foreign snipers' - just so happened to be in Christchurch, training, when the attack occurred

Related: Mainstream Media Promote Terrorism Propaganda In New Zealand

The presence of such heavy firepower in the form of New Zealand's most elite police and military units can indeed be seen as a "hell of a coincidence."

What this overlooks, however, is the flip-side to coincidental arrangements like this: the presence of 'foreign sharpshooters' and 'elite military marksmen' on the scene provides ideal cover for 'intelligent' perpetrators to blend in, present credible ID, provide plausible reasons for being on or near the scene, and even 'pull rank' on junior officers inexperienced in handling firearms, much less responding to an intentionally chaotic multi-site terror attack.

Here's how it could happen...


Mystery Gunmen

In my previous article, I referenced the arrest of this man outside the Papanui High School:



The man arrested outside Papanui High School

Related:
Bilderberg On Steroids – Meet The Secret CIA-Funded Group Behind The ‘War On Terror’

He has since been cleared of any involvement, and named as local 30-year-old man Stephen Millar. In statements he made to the New Zealand Herald, Millar says he was at the school to pick up his 13-year-old brother-in-law, and just happens to be fond of wearing camouflage clothing.

As far as the narrative is concerned, this clears up any confusion about the presence of gunmen at or near this high school.

The point they miss, however, is that a heavy police response was drawn to this school - miles from either mosque - just as the shooting sprees came to an end
.

A video recorded on a bystander's phone - time unknown - shows two other men armed with long guns outside the entrance to the high school that day, with one of them seen entering the premises:



Both men are armed with long guns of some kind, and are wearing what appear to be backpacks or vests

Related:
False Flag Terrorism Isn’t A “Theory”: It’s Admitted And Widespread

The bystander who recorded this footage was situated on the opposite side of Langdons Road, in a carpark at the back of the Papanui Library, facing the entrance to Papanui High school, which means the armed men's location when they are filmed is here:



Related:
Snowden Smashes The Police State In Most Epic Rant Ever, ‘Terrorists Don’t Take Our Rights, Government Does’

Papanui students and staff said their school 'went into lockdown' when an alarm went off "at about 2.30pm."

It's unknown what prompted that, but a police helicopter with a marksman hanging out of it was soon seen "circling very low overhead," for about one hour, while armed police - some in uniform, some not - searched the school grounds and surrounding streets on foot.



Armed police - some in uniform and some in 'civvies' - on Langdons Road in Papanui

Related: BBC Host: We Must “Get Used” To Islamic Terror Attacks & UK Warns Of 'Imminent' Second Attack

Although it's plausible that the two armed men outside the school in the above video were members of a plain-clothed tactical response unit, the rapidly-empowered SAS snipers or 'foreign marksmen', the fact remains that a significant armed response was deemed necessary to investigate a reported threat at a location miles away from what were, by this time, the two known major crimes scenes (the mosques).

In addition, this armed response continued for 1 hour from 2.30pm to 3.30pm. Recall that Tarrant was arrested at 2.17pm.

If there was never any reason to presume that more than one shooter was involved (because there was officially only one), and the single shooter was already in custody, why would this kind of response have occurred?

Papanui High School is situated 6kms north of the Al Noor mosque, and over 7kms from the Linwood mosque. Incredibly though, that isn't the furthest location to which armed police responded.

The New Zealand Herald reported that:


"Christchurch resident Mandy Rooney was trapped in her car within metres of a mosque in Bishopdale.

She said she tried to get out of the car to see what was going on but was ordered back into her vehicle by armed police.

"They have their guns up and are walking around scoping through them," she said.

"It is chaos. People have been trying to drive away and are just crashing into other vehicles."

The small mosque in Bishopdale is called the Rasullulah Centre and is located a further 3kms northeast of Papanui High school, or 7.5kms, by car, northeast of the Al Noor mosque.

In addition to all schools, all hospitals in Christchurch were placed under armed police guard, something that was probably prompted by someone reporting gunfire at Christchurch Hospital in the city center.

Similar security responses occurred beyond Christchurch, with the New Zealand military conducting three controlled explosions after bomb calls were made to Auckland's main train station hours after Tarrant's arrest.

This pattern of police being drawn out across a city is reminiscent of what occurred immediately following the Las Vegas terror attack, when Las Vegas police and Henderson SWAT were redirected to casino resorts as far north as two miles up the Vegas Strip to investigate reports of gunfire at those venues.

Clearly, police resources become strained by having to investigate each incident. When, in addition, many of the police are not in uniform, but are sporting powerful weapons, we can see how additional gunmen or 'spotters', party to the attacks, and intent on escape, could easily 'blend in'.



Related:
Anonymous: Will The Internet Get Real? A Manifesto On False Flags, Big Lies, And The Loss Of Integrity By All Law Enforcement Agencies And The Media


World Traveller

For "just an ordinary, working class, 28-year-old white man" who worked in a gym, Tarrant sure got around. New Zealand and Australian authorities claim he had not once before come up on their radar, despite Tarrant's claim that he made contact with jailed Norwegian terrorist Anders Breivik, is highly fluent in the rhetoric of extremist websites, obtained a 'Category A' firearms license soon after relocating to New Zealand in 2017, and has supported himself for the last 8 years by 'investing in BitCoin'.

On that last score alone, the NSA keeps close tabs on every BitCoin user, globally.

New Zealand is party to the Five Eyes global surveillance and security system, so what the NSA and British GCHQ sees, Kiwi intelligence sees
.

New Zealand security services are not telling what they know, but other governments have taken the lead in highlighting Tarrant's travels to some 'unique' global hotspots, where terrorists and spooks are known to mingle.

Turkey's government in particular has asked Australia and New Zealand's governments what light they can shed on Tarrant's multiple trips to Turkey in 2016, one of which lasted 43 days (and two of which, they mentioned, occurred either side of the attempted coup against president Erdogan in July that year).

Turkish media outlet TRT World quoted a Turkish government source as saying that they "believe" Tarrant was in Turkey "to carry out a terror attack and/or an assassination."



Related: Trey Gowdy To Gun Grabbing Politicans: “Show Me A Law That Will Prevent The Next Mass Killing”

Over a period of about three years, Tarrant also visited the Balkans; Gilgit-Baltistan in Pakistan, which borders Kashmir; the Wakhan Corridor, the sliver of Afghanistan that connects to the Xinjiang region of western China; Xinjiang itself; North Korea, and Israel.

Erdogan's government may simply be capitalizing on the Christchurch event's 'evil white European' theme, or answering Tarrant's calls in his 'manifesto' for Erdogan to be assassinated and for the Turks to be 'driven out of Europe to the other side of the Bosphorus', or they may know something we don't - as they did with the Saudi murder of Khashoggi.

They certainly aren't alone in suspecting that Tarrant had help carrying out his mass murder, with Erdogan yesterday telling a crowd of supporters on the campaign trail for upcoming local elections:



"They are testing us from 16,500km away, from New Zealand, with the messages they are giving from there.

This isn't an individual act, this is organized
."


Update Friday 22 March 2019

Police Commissioner Mike Bush has since adjusted the official timeline, stating at a press conference on Wednesday 20 March that the police stopped Tarrant 21 minutes after they received the first emergency call of shooting at the Al Noor mosque at 1:41pm, and explaining that the earlier time he gave of 36 minutes was actually a reference to how long it took to put Tarrant in custody:


"Within 10 minutes, the Armed Offenders Squad were on the scene ready to respond," Bush said.

"Within 21 minutes, the person that is now in custody was arrested, 21 minutes from when we were first notified."

Bush acknowledged this was a change of information, "I have previously said the offender was in our custody within 36 minutes," he said.

"I have now been made aware that, while we had the offender in custody at the Justice Precinct within 36 minutes, it in fact only took 21 minutes from the first 111 call for the offender to be apprehended at the roadside by the two officers."

Recall that Tarrant opened fire at the Al Noor mosque at 1:40pm, which corresponds to 06:38 in his video. When we last see him at the end of his video (timestamp 16:55), he has reached the intersection of Bealey and Fitzgerald Avenues at 1:50pm, 9 minutes after police received the first emergency call.

According to the new timeline then, this leaves Tarrant just 11 minutes to drive the remaining 3kms to Linwood mosque, open fire on worshippers there for several (4 max.) minutes, then drive another 5kms until his arrest on Brougham Street.

That is perhaps possible for someone with training, but it's still very tight...



The 21 minute timeline

See also:
'Clash of Civilizations' Arrives in New Zealand: 49 Massacred by Multiple Gunmen During Multi-Site Terror Attack in Christchurch


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Google Whistleblowers: Search Engine Penalizing All Sites That Don’t Conform To Political Correctness & Everything You Need To Know About Net Neutrality
April 1 2019 | From: NaturalNews / Digg

Tech and media behemoth Google is continuing to flex its considerable muscle by controlling more of what you are ‘allowed’ to see. And it’s being based entirely on political ideology.



As reported by Breitbart News, company whistleblowers are now coming out of the woodwork to spill the beans on the tech giant’s growing bias against conservative thought and opinion after Google fired engineer James Damore for daring to challenge the company’s predominant Left-wing bias in a 10-page memo, where he defended diversity of viewpoints and offered a fact-based defense of gender gaps for certain fields.

Related: Nationwide #MarchOnGoogle announced for Saturday, August 19th, across 9 U.S. cities

As Breitbart noted, more Google employees are speaking out in support of Damore’s manifesto, but they are having to do so anonymously because ‘diversity-seeking’ Google really doesn’t want diversity of thought or opinion, just authoritarian compliance with Alt-Left orthodoxy:


Damore’s ten-page manifesto, which was met by an immediate backlash, described a climate of fear, in which employees who challenge prevailing leftist narratives at the company are faced with immediate threats to their career. Damore’s own experience appears to confirm this.

In response, the site is publishing exclusive interviews under the series title “Rebels of Google,” featuring employees of the tech giant who have reached out to confirm much of what Damore wrote.


Google’s Worst Nightmare

The American people are preparing to fight back against the internet giant.

Jack Posobiec has launched the website marchongoogle.com in an attempt to raise awareness that Google is rigging algorithms to manipulate its search results in what they see as a favorable manner.



In the first interview of the series, one employee named “Hal” talked about how Google mid- and upper-level managers conduct “witch hunts” and practice ideological intolerance against conservatives.

Hal also discussed dysfunction at the company’s upper management echelons. (Related: Google redefines ‘fascism’ to smear conservatives.)

In a follow-up, an ex-Google engineer using the alias “Emmett” - who worked at the company for several years - was asked about allegations that employees within the company’s Ad Sales department had “a great deal of sympathy” with Google’s Sleeping Giants campaign, which reportedly denies ad revenue to independent and alternative media like Breitbart News and The Rebel Media.

According to one anonymous source, some Google employees in Ad Sales are “openly encouraging Adwords customers to pull their ads from Breitbart and Rebel Media.”

Emmett confirmed that claim.



Related: A Convergence Of Evil: Google, Amazon And Facebook Use Technology To Enslave Humanity, Suppress Knowledge And Accelerate Human Suffering


"A number of friends have privately confirmed this to me,” said the whistleblower. “I know there are efforts to demote anything non-PC, anti-Communist, and anti-Islamic terror from search results. To what extent that has been successful, I don’t know.”

That said, Emmett told Breitbart he personally saw Leftists within the company program bias into YouTube’s algorithms so that anti-PC content would be pushed off the platform’s “related videos” recommendations.


"I have read internal mailing list email from SJWs [social justice warriors] absolutely incensed that there’d be, say, a Sargon of Akkad video appearing as a video related to one of their favorite SJW vloggers.

This is what happens when you have unbiased algorithms, which at the time, was true. I don’t have to tell you that, in that e-mail, the SJW was quite literally asking that the ‘related videos’ function be perverted so that such a thing would stop happening,”
Emmett said.



Big Data: Shocking Evidence that Nobody's Talking About








What’s more, the former engineer said, ordinary users of Google and related servers won’t even notice that there is censorship taking place.


“The software could just astroturf your ‘Related Videos’ section, and you would be none the wiser,” he said.

“Sure, if you know what to look for, perhaps you’d notice. But the vast majority of the viewership would never know. That’s the whole point of such a disinformation program, right? If you can tell it’s disinformation, you would never ever believe it.”

He added it was “only a matter of time” before the company began to bias its search results against Trump supporters, Republicans and anyone who leans to the right, politically."

“I don’t have to tell you that there was an internal meltdown at Google when the election was over,” he said.

“The hysteria has only ever reached a higher level once. That was throughout this weekend, thanks to the #GoogleManifesto [Damore’s screed] scandal.”

He noted that it’s even unwise to speak out against Democratic politicians at the company, let alone agree with Damore.

There are search and media alternatives to this kind of blatant censorship and ideological blackmail, including GoodGopher.com and Censored.news. Bookmark and utilize both if you want your news and information unfiltered.


Related Articles:

Ideological Diversity Under Attack

Google, Not GCHQ, Is The Truly Chilling Spy Network & Top 10 Disturbing Facts About Facebook

YouTube Cracks Down on Diamond and Silk - Demonetizes 95% of Their Videos ‘For Supporting Trump’



Everything You Need To Know About Net Neutrality

While the term “net neutrality” may elicit the same effect as as taking a Tylenol PM, recently it got some serious star power behind it. Silicon Valley celebs from over 40 tech companies like Facebook, Google, Reddit, Netflix, and Pornhub rallied to inform the masses of the dangers of net neutrality rules being removed.

The imminent threat to net neutrality has the potential to seriously affect each and every one of our daily lives, and we should all be informed of the consequences.

Related: Here’s How You Stop Internet Censorship

How and why, you ask? Let’s start from the very beginning:


What Exactly is Net Neutrality?

According to the Internet Association, “strong net neutrality rules give people the power to choose which websites and apps are best.” In other words, they essentially keep the internet free, as we know it.

A rollback of these rules will give Internet Service Providers (ISPs) the power to prioritize the sites and apps you visit every day: slowing them, speeding them, or blocking them altogether. Your ISP could even choose to slow down or censor websites that opt out of paying extra fees to be prioritized. Website you really, really love. Like Netflix. Or Hulu. Or Digg. Or, y'know, Pornhub.



Related: Seven Reasons Why The Internet Of Things Should Scare You & The Internet Of Things Poses Human Health Risks: Scientists Question The Safety Of Untested 5G Technology At International Conference

On the other hand, ISPs could also choose to charge individuals like you and me extra fees to access sites that typically use more data. (Again, think streaming services and GoT.) Worse, they could potentially manipulate your internet access to push their own business agenda like proprietary cable services, news sites, email services, etc.


What the heck was “The Day of Action”?

Led by the aforementioned tech giants, The Day of Action was an effort to make pro net neutrality sentiments heard by the FCC. From posting on social media to posting homepage banners to requesting users reach out themselves, The Day of Action succeeded in drawing much needed attention to the issue.


How Can You Get Involved?

All signs point to FCC Chairman Ajit Pai initiating a rollback of net neutrality regulations later this summer, and a singular day of action may not be enough to stop it. If you like free internet, you can give the FCC a piece of your mind, by clicking here and then clicking “+ Express” to send a message.





Related:
8 Ways You Should Already Be Protecting Your Data From Hackers

If you really want to make things complicated for your ISP, you may choose to start using a VPN when you surf the web. Employing a VPN, like Disconnect, allows you to bypass the throttling and censorship efforts that could be put forth by your ISP. Disconnect routes your mobile and desktop internet traffic through a private server, encrypting your every move from the prying eyes of your ISP and cyber criminals alike.

Perhaps best of all, VPNs just make things incredibly inconvenient for your ISP (especially when it comes to selling your data to ad marketers). And who doesn’t love that?




The Internet Has Empowered The People After It Was Designed To Take Full Control

Technology is a double edged sword and the internet is being used to destroy the globalists.

Alex Jones talks with Dr. Steve Pieczenik about how the internet was created to take more control from the people but ended up having the opposite effect.





Related Articles:

Top Canadian Court Permits Worldwide Internet Censorship & Five-Eyes Nations Want Communications Providers To Bust Crypto For Them

Soros Expands Efforts To Keep “Net Neutrality” Censorship

In Connected World, Users Are Getting Reared As Slaughter Animals + Facebook Employees Are Quitting Because Of Users Being Censored

If You Question The Establishment You Are Guilty Of Espionage, Says Corporate Media - Because Russia + The “Fake News” Furor And The Threat Of Internet Censorship

Censored, Surveilled, Watch Listed And Jailed: The Absurdity Of Being A Citizen In A Police State

Stop Censorship: Time For Us All To Finally Break Google, Facebook and Twitter?

Censorship Shock: Amazon.com Bans Investigative Book ‘Nobody Died At Sandy Hook’ Because It Disagrees With Government Version Of What Happened

Imagine The Internet Without Links: Censorship Is Like A Virus, So We Need To Be Viral Too


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Astounding Profit Australian Banks Make In New Zealand Every Hour & Debt Scam Disclosure
March 31 2019 | From: Newshub / FinalWakeUpCall / Various

Australian banks are making $580,000 in New Zealand every hour, money a former Kiwi banker says should be staying in the country.



Sam Stubbs created a tool to show Australian Banks' profits. Credits: The AM Show

Sam Stubbs joined The AM Show on Wednesday after developing a tool to track the profits of the four Australian banks operating here - ANZ, ASB, BNZ and Westpac.

Related: Sam Stubbs calls for financial services sector to answer 25 questions

The Aussie Bank Profit Clock calculates the profits made since the beginning of January 2019 and in just over two months, it is currently sitting at a healthy $905 million, after tax.

Mr Stubbs says Australian banks may be using New Zealand to subsidise problems they're facing in Australia.


"We're very concerned that we're paying for their losses. We saw in the latest ASB profit announcement that profits in New Zealand were up six percent, but they were down six percent in Australia."

He said New Zealand has consistently been a huge source of profit for Australian banks, their highest source on a per capita basis.





Related: Australian Banking Scandal: New Zealand Regulator In talks With Financial Firms


"While lending has gone up marginally, profit seems to be going up even more, the margin seems to be going up more, the four Aussie-owned banks here closed a combined 25 branches last year, they keep on squeezing the costs, they keep on squeezing the lemon."

"The problem is these profits account for 2.5 percent of GDP here versus 2 percent of GDP in Australia."

Mr Stubbs says there is an easy way to keep the money in New Zealand, and that is by switching banks.


"Vote with your chequebook. You can switch KiwiSaver and your bank account so much faster than you used to. I just moved all of my accounts from BNZ to Kiwibank and it was extremely quick."

"You can send a message that this is not good enough."



Related Articles:

Australian banks could face prosecution, damning report by Royal Commission shows

Australian banks 'sucking' New Zealand's wealth, expert claims

'It's out of order': Australia banking shakeup a warning for New Zealand





Debt Scam Disclosure

Banks can never go broke, they control the World.nTheir Financial secret is founded on fraudulent accounting.



The secret of money creation lies in not accounting for it. There is no National Debt without the same amount in National Credit.

Related: Who Owns New Zealand's Banks - And Australia's Banks - Anyone's Banks?

By design, every government runs on debt money, accumulating more debt every day, which is termed “National Debt”.

This debt is composed of Promissory Notes, I.O.U.’s, or legal tender, commonly known as fiat money. All these movements are fraudulently administrated in the criminal government bookkeeping systems.

For example; When someone pays you with a debt note or certificate, which is synonymous with today’s fiat money, and you accept this debt as payment, then a credit is created for this person and a debt is accrued for you.

You never get paid for anything until you “pass this liability on” to someone else, by using this fiat debt instrument as a means to receive something of real intrinsic value in return.



Related: More Confessions Of An Economic Hit Man: "This Time, They’re Coming For Your Democracy"

Think about it in another way; every time debt is created, credit of an equal amount is created as well.

Because mathematically, debt and credit should always cancel each other out. There cannot be e.g. 20 Trillion dollars of “National Debt” created, without the existence of an equal 20 Trillion of “National Credit”.

Governments on the whole, have been very careful and diligent and have accrued no equal debts, so that 20 Trillion-dollars in National Credit, and in actual fact it is a great deal more than that, has been accrued on the people’s side of the ledger.



Related: Why The Whole Banking System Is A Scam - Godfrey Bloom MEP

It’s time to start with accurate bookkeeping, zeroing out the “National Debt” against the “National Credit”. It should be a routine process akin to balancing a check book, but instead, it has been morphed into an excuse for fraud and theft on an unimaginable scale.

Governments have been very reckless. They have borrowed and borrowed and avoided paying their debts, by squandering money like drunken sailors for decades, and in the process, they have accrued Trillions in National Debt for themselves.

It is time that we the people wake up and begin to send home the majority of members of Parliament and Congress in dishonour, holding them responsible for their gross lack of oversight, accountability, honesty, and competence.

Most of these politicians have no idea how the government is supposed to work, or how to act within the framework in which they should have operated.

They have no clear knowledge of how the government’s bookkeeping and accounting system is supposed to work, apart from knowing how to “appropriate” money for every unauthorised and questionable purpose, they haven’t the faintest idea where the so-called money comes from, how it is created, or anything else about it.



Related: Overseas Banking Villains Suck New Zealanders’ Wealth Offshore

Think about it, Parliament or Congress, has the singular task of holding the purse-strings, which they have unmistakably failed to do.

Keep in mind; The principal weapon of the Deep State is money and blackmail, and that makes it vital to end all Rothschild-owned central banks.

The City of London, which is the main source of the Deep State’s funding, is, via Brexit, to be handed over to the Earth Alliance, once the ‘No-deal Brexit’ has become fact probably on the 29th of March next.


Phantom Money Rigs the Markets and Creates Debt Enslavement

Knowing this, it should be better understood how the market manipulation functions, especially with respect to gold and silver prices. – The banks bet with large amounts of phantom money to lower silver and gold prices, and should they lose the bets, they only lose fake money but no money of value out of the bank’s vaults.



Related: The Secretive Bank Of England - Controlling The World's Money Supply + Banking Data Dump

They don’t bet to gain money, it’s to rig market pricing. Equally, they buy stocks for the sole purpose of illustrating the excellent performance of the asset markets, to falsely validate the strong performance of the economy.

Be assured that most of the natural resources like oil and copper, etc. are rigged in the same manner. The banks’ investment scope is manipulation, and the promotion of insider trading with their friends to profit from this knowledge.

Banksters in the banking cartel are seldom fined and never sent to jail, which of course is absurd. Knowing that the banking cartel controls governments won’t come as a surprise then.

If the GAAP accounting principles were applied, entailing the registering of all newly created money that isn’t accounted for in their books, most of the world would be out of debt.

Now every reader may understand why we the people are debt-slaves, the usurped power of money creation is intentionally producing enslavement.


Banks Never Can Go Broke, They Control the World

The accounting measures of the Banks is a far cry from reality; it doesn’t account for the  money created. With the banking reserve system legislation, no bank can lose money. In spite of this, they continuously tell the public that the banks are in trouble.

This is criminally ridiculous.



Related: The Khazarian Bankster Cult That Hijacked The World & Worthless Pieces Of Paper - Interest On Fake Money Is Confiscating Your Freedom

It has nothing to do with reality, but has everything to do with their agenda for the total enslavement of the people.

It is the banking cartel families, the Rothschilds, Rockefellers, Morgans, Warburgs and others that are responsible and in control of almost every central bank, and the Too Big to Fail – TBTF-banks in the world.

The whole banking system operates on the Rothschild money creation trick to entrap and enslave the world by selling lies about their insolvency. Marco Saba, the President of the Italian Institute of Superior Studies on Economic & Monetary Sovereignty, correctly asks:

 “How can a bank that is allowed to create money out of thin air ever be insolvent?

The secret of how money is created needs to be revealed to the public in its entirety. The power of money creation has made the Banksters more powerful than any nation on Earth.

In fact, the international Banksters which comprise the World Bank, IMF, BIS and all central banks, including the Federal Reserve are the shadow government that controls almost all nation states across the globe.

Now this fraudulent accounting crime is coming to light, the best thing every reader can do is to share this knowledge with all their contacts.

If many more learn about this swindle, it will be stopped sooner
.



Related: The Bankers’ Scam - The Power Of Money: Beat The Bankers Through Debt Termination & Commonwealth Bank Of Australia: One Of The Largest Banks In The World Just Accused Of Laundering Millions For Drug Cartels


The Core Banking Secret, Is Founded on Fraudulent Accounting

The monetary system was created to be top-down corrupt. Worst of all, it was founded on the basis of fraudulent accounting practices; with the acquired power of money creation, a bank never can go broke.

They just create all the money they need, but don’t book it in their ledger. In other words, this money isn’t accounted for in their cash flow account. They have the power to create money out of thin air and lend it out against interest; i.e.: usury.

But what is widely unknown, is that the granted loan is also not booked! Consequently, they have no debt coupled to their power of money creation.

Banks cannot go broke! Therefore, loans that are not or only partially repaid are never a loss to the bank. – Every tiny bit of the loan plus interest that has been repaid, is a one hundred percent profit for the bank!

When for example €100 is created and lent out and not accounted for in the ledger, if only €20 is returned, the bank already has a profit of €20, because the remaining €80 of this phantom money laundered into existence was never booked as a claim on debt, which is why there can never be a loss!



Related: Governments Are Corporations & The Gold Standard Will Break Up The Banking Cartel

This is why the repayment of € 20 is pure profit for the bank. This exactly is the crux of the great banking secret, it is deliberately centred on fraudulent accounting, giving the banking industry immense power, in combination with the creation of phantom money.


Their Secret of Money Creation Lies in Not Accounting for it

The real secret of money creation lies in it not being accounted for. In other words, freshly created money is not administered in the ledger.

Therefore, a bank without debt claims on its balance sheet, and equipped with the power of money creation can never go bust, there is always sufficient money available to stop any gap, hence financial banking troubles don’t exist.

The reality is that money is created out of nothing at no cost the moment it is lent out. This money is intentionally never entered in the bank’s bookkeeping!

Banksters are scandalously deceitful about money creation. They know full well, as does everybody else, that once money is created, it must be entered into their ledger, which will show up on their balance sheet!

When professional questions are asked about this procedure, they never dare to answer. All is kept in secret; meanwhile the masses are becoming aware of money creation out of nothing, money that by no means whatsoever comes out of the bank’s vault.

But nobody, or at least very few know about the corresponding accounting hoax.



Related: A Central Banker’s Plan For Your Money

For example, when a mortgage is in arrears, not only is the property confiscated by the bank, but the repaid part of that loan, plus the property itself are a one hundred percent profit for the bank, while the ‘debtor’ remains liable for the unpaid part of the loan until the property is auctioned off, and if a discrepancy results between the unpaid loan and the selling price, the debtor is still liable for its repayment.

This horrendous swindle provides the Deep State the power to buy and manipulate everything and everyone on earth, including governments
.


Clarification of the Banks’ Accounting Scam

Generally, it is not known that the bank’s accounting system is a scam; new money is not recorded in their cash flow, while they do record the expenses when defaults occur, but not accounting for the creation of assets is what makes the bank’s accounting system an intolerable scam.

Worse still, they tell the public about their imminent bankruptcies, which can never happen, but that is said to extract even more money from the National coffers, as was seen for example with the Too Big to Fail Banks in 2008 and the financial crisis in Cyprus in 2013, when trillions worth of taxpayers’ money were injected!



Related: Banks Are Stealing Our Future? How To Put An End?

Learn by heart; Central Banks and commercial banks can never go bankrupt because of the money created out of thin air, that should be recorded in their cash accounts. Banks can maintain this practice because they are beholden to no one, perhaps only to the Rothschilds.

Like in every other business, they should apply the GAAP i.e. Generally Accepted Accounting Practice rules, but these are deliberately not honoured. Even their external, certified public auditors like the KPMG, Price Waterhouse, Lloyds, etc. certify their accounts at their demand, while knowing full well that these GAAP rules are not met!

Banks tell the public otherwise, asking for financial support from governments by faking being on the brink of collapse, which is another blatant lie, but that is the signal that accountholders like you and me, can be plundered through the bail-in legislation already widely incorporated into law.

People by now should understand that keeping money in the bank is very dangerous.


Fractional Reserve Cannot Work in a Free Market

Banking all over the world operates on the “fractional reserve” system. Although a sound banker should keep 100% on reserve against demand deposits: he should hold one ounce of gold in his vault for every one-ounce of banknotes he has issued. And he should be permitted only to lend the proceeds of time deposits, not demand deposits.



Related: The Great Transition: The Shadow Ruling Force Behind The Central Banks Secrecy Is Repugnant In A Free
And Open Society

But under the rule of “fractional reserve banking” he is allowed to lend out 10 times that amount, which means that this system cannot work in a free market; for this reason, fractional reserve banking has been legislated by the people’s puppet government.

As it can’t work where banknotes are redeemable into a commodity, such as gold; the banknotes have to be “legal tender” or strictly paper money that can be created by fiat to make it profitable for the banksters.

Due to the reasons as outlined above, fractional reserve banking is far more profitable than any normal businesses. In any industry, high average returns attract competition, which in turn reduces the returns.

That is the reason why the banking sector by law is protected, so there is no competition from outsiders. A banker can lend out an amount, which a businessman might use to buy an item.

When the seller of that item re-deposits that amount, a banker can lend it out at interest again. The good news for the banker is that his earnings are compounded several times over. The bad news being that, because of the pyramid-like leverage, a default can cascade.



Related: Black Magic: Satanists Rule The World, Not Politicians, Bankers Or Military Heads [Although They Are
Usually All One And The Same] + Another Illuminati Whistleblower Speaks Out

In each country, the central bank periodically changes the reserve percentage – theoretically, from 100% down to 0% of deposits – banks must keep with these changing anomalies, according to how the bureaucrats in charge perceive the state of the economy.

The fractional reserve banking system, with all of its unfortunate attributes, is critical to the world’s financial system as it currently is structured. You can plan your life around the fact that the world’s governments and central banks will do everything they can to maintain confidence in the financial system.

To do so, they must prevent deflation at all costs. And to do that, they will continue printing up more dollars, pounds, yen, and euros. While currency crises, bank runs, and episodes of economic collapses are devastating to paper assets, they often offer opportunities to buy hard assets on the very cheap as is the case today for gold and silver.

Use this moment to your advantage, and you will never ever regret the follow up on this piece of advice.


Basel III Sets Gold Price Free

The use of gold is necessary to avoid financial catastrophe for the populace at large. Alongside the existing currencies, the oldest form of money, which is gold will be set free on the 29th of this month when the Basel III accord is implemented.



Related: Democracy Is A Front For Central Bank Rule & Financial Starvation In A Fiat Debt Slavery Financial System

Basel III is intended to make sure that all countries are asset – Gold – backed, otherwise they would not be able to participate in the Global Currency Reset. [Comment: Time will tell].

With Basel III is said that physical gold -not paper gold- will be on par with fiat money and other debt instruments. That signifies the end of the gold price manipulation, requiring a much higher gold price for the physical stuff.

The only way to survive the debt crisis is that nations reflate their currency established on gold as a reserve, which implicates a much higher gold price. This higher price is necessary to accumulate equity in line with their massive debt.

Think about the complication that is involved; because gold is going to bring down the private Central Banks with their fiat currencies. Confirming what Q already had told us awhile ago that gold will bring down the central banks.

As real gold is going to rise in price. A short period of time has been opened in which many of us can take advantage of this knowledge by buying gold and silver right now. Since gold will continue to rise, it eventually will outshine the debt notes that all are paper currencies.



Related: Forgotten History: US Bankers Financing US Enemies - And Why It Is Important Now

Even more, as people are going to realise that the paper notes they are holding are absolutely worthless they want to change it for real money, implying gold and silver. These prices are going to rise and that will make the paper currencies to decline, that as a result will destroy the private central banks.


Debt Money Scam Explained

Debt cannot be used as money. Nonetheless, the entire world monetary system is based on debt, which is a contradiction in itself! Consequently, the financial system is heading for a disastrous, inevitable failure. There won’t be a way around it, because debt can’t be used as money.

Money created through the energy of ordinary people who trust each other, resulting in trust-money, is legally synonymous with money created by the central banks which is debt-money, by transferring the trust placed into the first, into the latter; debt money. This results in inflation, which in itself is straightforward theft.

The Central Banks’ increase of the money supply goes far beyond social trust.



Related: 30 Plus Cold Hard Facts About The IRS: An Agent Of A Foreign Corporation - A Collection Entity For The
Federal Reserve Bank


The conflict between the two kinds of money – trust versus debt money – is clear: because a dollar/euro/yen/or any other unit can be spent only once – in principle for private transactions between citizens, but that same unit is again promised to pay off the public debt  through the schemes in which governments are engaged, without the consent, nor knowledge of we, the citizens.

This debt scam results in the following consequences: if all debt is repaid, then there is no money left in circulation.

Because the first component of the money supply – trust money – serves as collateral for the second – debt money – and the second is for the purchase of the first, while both support the illusion of money.

In other words, Public debt is required to create money while the people are told that their money is needed to pay off public debt, which of course is complete nonsense and a huge lie!

The pledge of trust money is a promise.

The debt money that arises from “debt” requires collateral for which taxes are created, collected by the government to pay off the ‘never-ending’ or perpetual debt spiral to the Central Bank in the currency that the central bank itself has issued out of nothing.

That then is mixed in with the trust money already in circulation, making the SCAM invisible.


The Trut